Chess Master and Grandmaster - Euwe&Meiden&1978

Chess Master
and
Grandmaster
Chess Master
and
Grandmaster
Max Euwe
and
Walter Meiden
LONDON
George Allen & Unwin
Boston Sydney
First published in 1978
This book is copyright under the Berne Convention. All

rights are reserved. Apart from any fair dealing for the pur
pose of private study, research, criticism or review, as per
mitted under the Copyright Act, 1956, no part of this publi
cation may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or
transmitted, in any form or by any means, electronic,
electrical, chemical, mechanical, optical, photocopying,
recording or otherwise, without the prior permission of the
copyright owner. Enquiries should be addressed to the
publishers at 40 Museum Street, London WClA lLU.
© Max Euwe and Walter Meiden, 1977
ISBN 0 04 794007 7
Originally published in the USA in 1977 as CHESS

MASTER VS CHESS MASTER. American spelling and
usage have been retained.
British Library Cataloguing in Publication Data
Euwe, Max
Chess master and grandmaster.
I. Chess - Collections of games
I. Title II. Meiden, Walter
794.l '52 GVl452 78-40113
ISBN 0-04-794007-7
Printed in Great Britain by

Hollen Street Press Ltd at Slough, Berkshire
Contents
Preface ix
Introduction 1
To the Reader 10
Game Opening Players
Two Knights ' Defense : Kuindgi-Klovan 15

4 N-N5 Line
2 Ruy Lopez : Byrne-Spassky 31
Breyer Defense
3 Petroff Defense Browne-Bisguier 47
4 Falkbeer Countergambit Farkas-Szell 61
5 French Defense : Kostro-Uhlmann 71
Tarrasch Variation
6 Alekhine Defense Spassky-Fischer 84
7 Pirc Defense Timoshenko-Karasev 1 00
8 Sicilian Defense : Karpov-Korchnoi 11 1
Dragon Variation
9 Sicilian Defense: Peters-Larsen 1 23
Paulsen Variation
10 Sicilian Defense : Karpov-Spassky 135
Scheveningen Variation
11 Sicilian Defense : Rodrigu.ez-Quinteros 147
Najdorf Variation
12 Sicilian Defense : Savon-Mecking 1 59
Najdorf Variation
13 Sicilian Defense : Fischer-Petrosian 170
Irregular
14 Queen' s Gambit Declined : Mikenas-Kupreichik 184
Slav Variation
15 Queen ' s Gambit Declined : Fischer-Spassky 1 96
Tartakower Variation
16 Queen ' s Gambit Accepted Gligoric-Portisch 214
v
vi Contents
17 Nimzoindian Defense : Hort-Ivkov 235

4 Q-B2 P-B4 Line
18 Nimzoindian Defense : Portisch-Bobotsov 246
4 P-K3 P-B4 Line
19 King's Indian Defense : Gheorghiu-Westerinen 256
Samisch Variation
20 Queen's Indian Defense Kotov-Kholmov 269
21 Griinfeld.Defense: Petrosian-Fischer 282
4 B-KB4 Line
22 Catalan Opening Balashov-Tal 297
23 English Opening = Smyslov-Mecking 313
Sicilian in Reverse
24 Benoni Defense Gligoric-Kavalek 328
25 Reti Opening Furman-Stein 343
Index of Openings 36 1
Index of Players 362
Index of Subjects 365
Strategic Themes
Game Theme
1 Bringing Every Piece into Play 14

2 The Queen Sacrifice 30
3 The Sacrifice 46
4 The Attack against the Castled King behind an
Unweakened Pawn Structure 60
5 The Pawn Chain 70
6 The Pawn Salient 83
7 Castling 99
8 Attack against the Opponent ' s King Castled K-side 1 10
9 Attack and Counterattack 1 22
10 Strategy vs . Tactics 1 34
11 The Initiative 147
12 Winning a Game through Small Advantages 158
13 The Isolated Pawn 169
14 The Combination 1 83
15 Hanging Pawns 195
16 Pressure 212
17 Neglect of K-side Development 234
18 The Sacrificial Attack with Pieces 245
19 Waves of Attack 255
20 The Pin 268
21 Bulldozer Strategy 28 1
22 Zugzwang 296
23 The Sham Sacrifice 312
24 The Center Majority vs . the Q-side Majority 327
25 The Fianchettoed Bishop 342
vii
Preface
The purpose of this book is to show the amateur player how to

improve his chess by a detailed study of the techniques of twenty-five
games between masters and grandmasters played during the first five
years of the 1 970' s .
These games not only embody the fundamental principles o f chess
which have been recognized since the days of Morphy and Steinitz
and refined by the great masters of the first half of the twentieth
century , but they also include examples of some of the modern
techniques which have been introduced into chess as a result of the
intensive research that has been going on in the game for the past
twenty-five years . The principles and techniques exemplified and
explained will continue to be valid for instructional purposes long
after these individual games are forgotten and after as yet unknown
masters have come to the fore in the chess arena .
Games of the first half of the 1 970' s were chosen partly to illustrate
the way chess is now played , partly to acquaint the reader with some of
the more recent masters .
The choice of games was dictated by a desire to present a number of
openings and variations currently in vogue in tournaments and
matches , to illustrate various styles of middle game and endgame
play , and to give recent games of a number of masters who are active
at the present time . The absence of any master from the games in this
collection by no means implies that this master is not important or
even outstanding . It was impossible in twenty-five games chosen for
specific opening and middle game techniques to include more than a
limited number of players .
The method of annotating the games is distinctive in that emphasis
is placed on revealing the reason for each significant move rather than
on giving numerous tactical variations-although the latter are also
included where they serve to clarify the possibilities of a given
position .
It is hoped that our explanations will help the amateur to understand
what considerations go into the choice of a master' s move, to com
prehend the thought processes which one master uses to defeat an
other , and to incorporate that type of chess thinking into his own
game.
ix
x Preface
We wish to thank friends who have read these games in manuscript

form and aided us through their comments and suggestions . We are
especially indebted to Mr. Fred Foote of Middleville, Michigan , and
to Mr. Tom Kuhn and Mr . Steve Wygle of Columbus , Ohio , for their
critical reading of the manuscript , and to Mr. Fred Foote and Mr .
Steve Wygle for their careful reading of the proof . We are very
grateful to Miss Naomi Lisle of Fremont , Ohio , and to Dr. Harry
Vredeveld of the Ohio State University for their help in preparing the
manuscript .
M . E.
W. M.
Chess Master
and
Grandmaster
Introduction
How does a chess master differ from other chess players?

A master is thoroughly conversant with the technique of handling
each phase of the game : opening , middle game , and endgame . He
treats the game as a whole, each move being part of a certain strate
gical or tactical concept . He keenly appreciates the possibilities of all
positions . He can analyze accurately and foresees rather exactly the
consequences of this move or that . He understands the basic principles
involved in the various positions . His tactical play is accurate ; he
makes fewer and less serious mistakes than other players . He knows a
great many chess games of the past and is well informed on the lines
played in the tournament games of the present .
There are various categories of masters . The Federation lnter
nationale des Echecs (FIDE) has adopted the Elo system, which
evaluates the performance of a chess player on a scale which attempts
to list players in the probable order of their strength . Professor Elo
developed it by using the mathematical theory of measurements . His
system is based on a normal distribution of the results of perfor
mances . Its application has led to some practical indications : those
who have 2500 or more Elo points tend to be (but are not necessarily)
international grandmasters ; those who have 2300 or more Elo points
are likely to be international masters ; those who have 2200 or more
points are usually national masters ; and those who have 2000or more
points are considered experts .
FIDE creates and regulates only international masters and grand
masters . These two titles are awarded by FIDE after a favorable vote
of its Qualifications Committee upon sufficient evidence of the per
formance of a player against other masters and grandmasters . In
general , depending on the strength of the tournament, a player must
attain a certain percentage of wins on two different occasions .
However, over and above the mere title of international master or
grandmaster, differences of style of chess play make the various
masters stand out one from the other . For instance , Morphy and
Marshall were strongest in the open game and in combinational chess ;
1
2 Introduction
Steinitz was famous for his scientific handling of positional chess ;

Capablanca ' s chess was characterized by the simplicity of his style
and his unparalleled mastery of the endgame ; Alekhine , Tai , and
Spassky are known for their attacking genius ; Lasker and Botvinnik
are outstanding for their all-around play and their ability to see a long
series of moves in advance ; Petrosian is noted for his defensive play
and his ability to build up a winning position almost imperceptibly;
Fischer stands out because of his classical style of play , his complete
mastery of openings , and his ability to get an advantage in the middle
game and to exploit it in the endgame; Karpov excels in positional
play and in an ability to switch to combinations at the proper moment .
Thu s , when one master plays another , it is not merely a contest
between two outstanding players who are expert in all phases of the
game but also between two highly experienced chess players who are
distinguished by their own predilections for certain types of games and
who have special areas of strength . For that reason , during the past
half century before matches and tournaments masters have customari
ly studied the games of the participants carefully so as to get an
accurate idea of the type of chess their opponent will probably play
and to be prepared to meet it .
Every chess game consists (a) of a general plan or series of plans
(strategy) ; (b) of successive moves , many of which suggest various
reasonable continuations but each of which must be carefully
evaluated whether it contributes to carrying out the strategic plan or by
necessity simply meets the moves of the opponent (the operational
phase of strategy) ; and (c) at times of series of more or less unexpected
moves which make up combinations (tactics) .
Let us consider each one of these important concepts and its role in
master play .
Strategy
Strategy is the overall plan for handling a game or a certain part of a
game . Some , such as Game 24, have practically only one strategic
plan , for the aims of the two sides are clear and nothing enters in to
seriously interfere with them . In most cases , however, a game is
divided into a series of strategic phases with definite goals to be
attained . Once a given aim is realized , there is normally a shift to a
new strategic phase based on the characteristics and requirements of
the new position . Such strategic phases are illustrated in many of the
following games , notably in Games 1 6 and 25 .
Introduction 3
The master has a very keen awareness of the general direction in

which each part of the game should go . He has a firm grasp on the
overall situation. Unlike many amateurs , he does not simply play from
move to move, although he does not fail either to take into consid
eration the essential requirements of move-to-move play .
The Operational Phase-The Role of Analysis

The moves of master games, which seem to flow one after another
in an easy and logical sequence as one plays them from the score , are
actually the result of long and arduous analysis. In the opening phase,
where both players are well acquainted with the main lines and a great
many variations , moves are usually played mechanically and very
rapidly in order to gain time on the clock , but even there the situation is
not always mere rote, for , as in Game 1 3 , masters often prepare new
variations or deliberately play a line which has fallen into disuse in
order to force the opponent into difficult analysis from the very outset .
Only when the game score indicates how much time was taken to
reflect upon each move can one truly appreciate the amount of thought
that goes into the choice of moves at the various critical positions. The
complicated analyses of the possible lines , sometimes with several
sublines which may include two or three variations themselves , must
be gone over carefully by both of the adversaries. If a master should
fail to analyze carefully at a given point , his opponent might well
detect a defect in his reply and then proceed to exploit it .
The master must , above all , have the ability to visualize positions
and then to hold those positions in mind while he rapidly explores the
lines and sublines arising from them .
The long paragraphs of main lines and branches found in the printed
analyses of master games are not merely a more complete post
analysis of what could have happened . MllSters actually accomplish
much of this analysis while playing the game . Of course , the analysis
of an adjourned position must , by the conditions under which it is
made, be even more thorough than that made while the clocks are
ticking .
Can intuition be substituted for analysis or for part of it? There are
some positions which are so complicated that masters must at times
resort to intuition-and a few such positions have been pointed out in
the games that follow . Others fall into patterns which the masters have
often met previously so that playing them is a matter of rote . But
playing by intuition is dangerous . It leads to overlooking hidden or
4 Introduction
unexpected lines , so that a master cannot very often trust to his

intuition alone . He is forced , because he knows that his opponent will
also do so , to look as far as possible into each variation .
It is of paramount importance that analysis be accurate, for an error
may result in the loss of a Pawn, the Exchange , or even a piece . An
error in the analysis of a position is usually more serious in its
consequences than an error in the general strategy of the game , for the
result of the former makes itself felt immediately in the form of some
tangible disadvantage , whereas an error in the latter can normally be
exploited only through a long series of moves ; moreover, there is
always the chance in the strategical area that with a shifting tactical
picture the failure to find the most appropriate plan may not result in
any concrete loss and that the position will eventually right itself
again.
Tactics
In carrying out the operational phase of the game, a position
sometimes arises with certain characteristics which might , under the
right circumstances , lead to a combination : there may be a loose piece
on the board ; the opponent' s King may be exposed ; the possibility of a
desperado may exist ; an in-between move could perhaps be played
advantageously ; both of the opponent ' s Rooks might be attacked
simultaneously, etc .
Discovering , analyzing, and taking advantage of such situations
belong to the realm of chess which we shall call tactics.
The master has a sharp eye for spotting positions which may lead to
a combination, and he has the ability to analyze the moves necessary
to execute the combination successfully . He is an excellent tactical
player .
Characteristics of Master Play

Master play is characterized by strong and accurate moves which
have as their purpose to give the player an advantage if possible or, if
not, at least equality . Each successive position may offer several
possibilities of approximately equal value , and in such cases the
master may choose the one most suited to his temperament . But one of
the most notable differences between master and amateur games is
that the former are relatively free of the questionable moves which
abound in the latter .
The master has at his command a considerable number of tech-
Introduction 5
niques and devices for attaining effective play . These we shall pre
sently summarize , and the masters represented in this work will give
examples of them in the course of their games .
In addition to the technical devices used wherever possible in play ,
there are the intangible elements of imagination and of superior insight
into the position and a feeling for the presence of tactical combina
tions . An impressively large percentage of the twenty-five games
which follow were won by combinations which in most cases involved
sacrifices .
Although chess masters are far better equipped by their knowledge ,
experience , and natural talent to win games than are amateurs ,
nonetheless they lose some games to other masters . However , about
50 to 60 percent of the games played between masters of equal
strength end in draws .
The fundamental question dealt with in this work is how one master
wins from or loses to another . Aside from an occasional oversight or
inaccurate move made under time pressure , the master does not make
the same type of errors as the amateur . Therefore , the methods
masters use to defeat each other are usually more subtle and less
obvious than those found in games between amateurs .
How Masters Won the Games in This Book

Among the means used by the masters of this work to obtain
superiority , the following merit special comment . (The games re
ferred to at the end of each category are only those in which the
technique in question is most clearly illustrated . )
1 . The combination
As a sequence of moves made to attain a specific end , the combina
tion implies the ability of the player execut �pg it to penetrate keenly
into the position , to see far ahead , to weigh the consequences of the
series of moves , and to judge its final outcome . It requires both
imagination and precise analysis on the part of the master . The
combination is the crowning glory of chess play , and during the
nineteenth century the beauty of a game was judged by the complexity
of its combinations. (Games 2, 3, 4, 8 , 1 1 , 1 2 , 1 4 , 1 8 , 20 , 22 , 24)
2. The sacrifice
The sacrifice is a special type of combination called a ' ' sacrificial
combination . ' ' It contains the element of surprise . It requires the same
6 Introduction
abilities as those listed above under the combination . (Games 2, 3 , 1 1 ,

1 4 , 1 8)
3 . The threat
A move embodying a threat forces the opponent to take into
consideration what will happen if his adversary gets the opportunity to
carry out the threat on the following move , and it therefore seriously
limits the scope of the opponent's action . In master games the threat is
used constantly, as attested by the fact that the lines analyzed under
numerous moves begin with a statement containing ' ' . . . threaten
ing . . . . " (All games)
4. Pressure
Pressure is one of the most potent weapons in a game of chess .
Pressing on squares of the opponent's position , and in particular on
certain of the opponent's pieces , with as many of his own pieces as he
can bring to bear on them is one of the most common techniques used ,
and it is an important factor in the success of the winners of these
games .
A master opponent naturally tries to meet pressure with counter
pressure , but at times one player is able to exert more pressure on a
given enemy piece than his opponent is able to oppose with coun
terpressure . At such times the position may be broken open to the
advantage of the side with the greatest amount of pressure , or the
player with the most pressure may win a piece or a Pawn . (Practically
all games , particularly Games 1 2 , 1 7 , 22)
5. Direct attack against the opponent's King

A significant number of wins are based on an attack of some sort on
the opponent's King . Many of these are directed against a King which
has already castled K-side : in one case still protected by its three
Pawns in their original position (Game 4); in another by a pawn
structure slightly weakened because one or more Pawns have already
advanced (Games 8 , 1 9) ; in a third when some Pawns are missing
(Game 24) ; in one game where two Pawns are missing and where the
K-side is shorn of all pawn protection (Game 1 8) . Some of the other
games are won by attacks against a King that has not yet been able to
castle or that , for practical reasons, found it unwise to do so . (Games
7, 1 1 , 1 4)
6 . The initiative
There is a tremendous advantage in having the initiative . In many of
lntrodu cdon 7
the games the winner was the player who seized this initiative at a
certain point and used it to keep his opponent so busy defending that he
was never able to take over the initiative himself because of the
constant necessity of protecting himself from the strong thrusts of his
opponent. (Almost every game , but very strong in Games 9, 1 3 , 1 5 ,
1 7)
7 . Giving the opponent an unfavorable pawn position

The master , keenly aware of the types of pawn formations that are
weak, is frequently able to manipulate in such a way as to leave his
opponent with an unfavorable pawn position and then to exploit the
weaknesses it entails . (Games 1 3 , 1 5)
8 . Exchange of pieces or refusal to permit exchange of pieces

The master is very sensitive to the power of his own and his
opponent ' s pieces in the positions at which they are posted . He
constantly asks himself whether he benefits more from exchanging
one of his own for an opponent 's well-posted piece or from retaining
his piece and attempting to realize its full power . In the endgame
especially it is often important to retain certain pieces to assure a win .
In some endgames even considerable material superiority does not
lead to a win . (Games 9, 1 3)
9 . Simplification into a favorable endgame position

When a master has attained some advantage, whether in material or
a superior. pawn structure , he normally simplifies through exchanges
to a favorable endgame_, for it is much easier to retain an advantage
and to make it count in the endgame, where technique predominates ,
than i n the more volatile and complex middle game , where through a
sudden quirk the opponent may tum the tables and himself emerge
with the more advantageous position . (Games 3 , 1 3 , 1 6)
In addition to the nine major techniques described above, the

following devices are found in certain of the games . In each case , one
game which uses the device is mentioned, but there are often several
others which also employ it .
1. Standard types of attacking patterns (Game 3)

2. Opening lines for attack (Game 2)
3. Pressing the attack (Game 1 5)
4. Effective play with the Bishop pair (Game 25)
8 Introduction
5 . Judicious play with Bishops of the same color or with Bishops

of opposite colors (Game 22)
6 . Choice of moves which prevent the opponent from getting
counterchances (Game 1 5)
7 . Control of diagonals and files (Game 10)
8 . Exploitation of holes (Game 1 9)
9. The in-between move (Game 22)
1 0 . Driving the King into the open field (Game 7)
1 1 . Creation of a flight-square for the King (Game 1 6)
1 2 . Exploitation of the loose piece (Game 1 8)
1 3 . Preparation of the mating net (Game 4)
1 4 . The outpost (Game 9)
1 5 . Pawn chain technique (Game 5)
1 6 . Effective coordination and use of all pieces (Game 17)
1 7 . Penetration into the opponent' s position (Game 1 0)
1 8 . Restriction of the movement of the opponent' s pieces (Game
1 6)
1 9 . The pin (Game 20)
20. Occupation of strong squares (Game 1 6)
2 1 . Zugzwang (Game 22)
Why the Masters Lost the Games in This Book

The methods , techniques, and devices used to win the games are
listed above . But how did the opposing player come to allow the
winner to get the upper hand through their use ?
In general , the loss of the games may be ascribed to the following
types of inadequacies on the part of the loser :
1. an insufficient knowledge of certain patterns in the opening or

in variations or of a line especially prepared by the opponent ;
2. a false positional judgment ;
3. inaccurate analysis .
On examining the twenty-four games which were lost by one of the

players , one finds that they were most often lost because
1 . the loser was unable to defend himself successfully against the

sharp thrusts of the winner ;
2. for one reason or another the loser found himself with an un
favorable pawn position .
Introdu ction 9
It is noteworthy that in many of these games it required just one

incorrect move or misjudgment to lead to the eventual loss of the
game. In others there were several questionable moves on the part of
the loser .
Errors of Masters and Grandmasters

In Game 6, the only one which ended in a draw , there were
questionable moves by both players so that their possible errors of
judgment canceled each other out and led to the final draw .
Although masters are far less prone to err than amateurs, master
games and even games played by world champions are not always free
from errors or even , at times , from serious blunders . Considering the
tension under which masters play , the time limits to which they are
subjected, the psychological factors which often play their part, and
the element of fatigue in a long and strenuous tournament , it is not
surprising that errors are sometimes made even by the world's leading
players .
Most important is that the level of master play is very high and that
the great majority of master moves are accurate and often original and
imaginative .
To the Reader
This work is designed for a wide range of chess players-from the

relatively inexperienced amateur who has had some opportunity to
play but has never " studied chess " to the near expert, who may also
find some revealing and helpful information in the comments on the
moves of the games.
Players of varying strengths will approach the material in different
ways . The advanced amateur who is already familiar with "book
chess" needs no indications as to how to derive the greatest profit
from a treatise on chess play . What follows , therefore , is for the less
experienced player and most of all for those who up to now have had
little contact with "book chess . " It may serve to give them some idea
of how they can study the games with the greatest benefit to
themselves .
1 . The introduction to the games

Before each game there is an Introduction which contains general
remarks on some basic phase of chess play . Although no reference is
made in this material to the game that follows , on playing over that
game you will find exemplified what has been discussed in the
Introduction .
The material in these Introductions is relatively elementary in
nature and is designed , for the most part , for the less advanced player .
2 . The opening
Each game illustrates a line of some well-known opening . By going
over the moves of the opening you will get some idea how that
variation of the opening develops and why.
Remember that there are many other lines of the same opening and
many other variations of the line actually played . Take these opening
moves as an example of what could be played and why , but do not
consider them to be the only or even the preferred line of the opening
in question .
If you are completely unfamiliar with chess openings, you may find
it profitable to get a standard book on openings , although the size and
10
To the Reader 11
scope of such works i n this decade i s s o great that such a book may
prove to be more confusing than helpful. In any case , never forget that
the important thing in the opening variation is its basic ideas rather
than just the sequence of moves .
3 . The middle game

The comments under the moves of each middle game , as well as
those under many of the openings and endgames , contain basic
explanations of the reasons for those moves , their strengths and
weaknesses , and numerous analyses of possible lines which could
arise from the position and which had to be taken into consideration by
the master playing the game .
In the middle game you will also find exemplified certain tech
niques which can be used in given situations ; for instance , pinning the
White QN on c3 by the Black Bishop on b4 and/or by the Black Queen
on a5 , followed by intensifying the attack by playing the Black KN to
e4 . An acquaintance with such techniques may help you in your own
middle game play .
On your first study of the game , read over the explanations and try
to understand the reasons for each move . It is a good idea to try to
anticipate the next move of the game itself and then to compare your
projected move with the one made by the master .
On the initial reading it is probably best not to go through the
analysis of the variations . To do so then could result in distracting your
attention from the main line and from understanding the principles
behind the play . The extensive analyses are simply illustrations of
what could happen .
4 . The endgame
Here few pieces are left on the board , and the play is less complex .
As you go through the endgame, before lookiqg to see what the master
played , try to anticipate his move . Decide mentally what move you
would make in this position , then compare it with the one actually
made . Perhaps the move you chose is discussed in one of the
variations .
5 . The analysis of the variations

The great value of the variations lies in their ability to develop your
own analytical powers . Once you have gone over the games as
described above , you can then go back and study the variations at your
leisure in order to develop your own analytical skill .
It is time saving to have two boards set up with the position . On one
12 To the Reader
board you keep the position of the main line ; on the other you play out
the detailed analysis .
It is a good idea, in going over these variations , to ask yourself
repeatedly : "What would I do if I had to make the next move in this
position-and how would my opponent answer my move? "
6 . Restudying the game after a lapse o f time

After having studied the games and their variations , you may find it
prof.itable to lay the book aside for several months and then to play
over the games again . Ideas which were clear when you first looked at
the games may have faded. Going over them a second time will bring
them back with greater clarity . They will then be more likely to
become an integral part of your own play .
Algebraic Designations of Squares on the Chessboard
7 . Notation system used in this book

This book is written predominantly in the descriptive system , which
is currently used in most English works on chess . The scores of the
games and the analyses of the positions are always given in the
descriptive notation .
In the annotations to the moves the algebraic system is used :
{a) often to refer to a given square when this would be simpler ;

e . g. , "Now f6 has become weak " instead of "Now Black' s
KB3-square has become weak . "
(b) sometimes to indicate pawn positions when the use of the
descriptive notation might be confusing ; e . g . , "Black decides
to capture Pc5 rather than Pc3" instead of "Black decides to
capture White's P/QB4 rather than his P/QB6 . "
To the Reader 13
(c) occasionally to indicate the position of a piece; e.g. , "White

must capture Black' s Bishop with his Ne5 , not with his Ng5 , "
instead o f "White must capture Black' s Bishop with his N/K5 ,
not with his N/KN5 . "
For those unfamiliar with the algebraic notation the diagram on the
preceding page will facilitate locating the proper squares.
Abbreviations and symbols used
dis eh discovered check

db ch double check
(!) a good move
! a very good move
!! an excellent move
(?) a questionable move
? a bad move
?? a very bad move
Game 1
The 4 N-N5 attack in the Two Knights' Defense with the strongest 5 • • •
N-QR4 line
Development vs. material
The sacrifice of the Exchange to open the opponent's K-position
The initiative
The threat
Bringing all the pieces into play
Attack against the unprotected King
Transition to the endgame with a plus Pawn
Exchange of Rooks in order to facilitate the win
Advantage of an endgame with light pieces when the opponent's pawn
position has weaknesses
Bringing Every Piece Into Play

One of the most important principles of chess play is to bring all the
pieces into the field at the earliest opportunity and to place each piece
where it will function most effectively . As far as possible , the pieces
should be put where they will work harmoniously together .
If for a special reason a piece was temporarily moved to the edge of
the board to perform a necessary function but is no longer needed
there , it must then be brought back into the mainstream of the game at
the earliest practicable moment so that it can cooperate with the other
pieces in both attack and defense . Otherwise , the player with a piece
that has strayed off will find himself in effect playing with one man
less.
For example , in the well-known 4 N-N5 variation of the Two
Knights ' Defense ( 1 P-K4 P-K4 2 N-KB3 N-QB3 3 B-B4 N-B3 4
N-N5 P-Q4 5 PxP N-QR4) , Black's QN is played over to the QR-file
in order to enable Black to drive the White pieces from their best
squares and then to develop a strong attack . This maneuver is quite in
order at Black' s 5th move, but the QN cannot safely be left out of play
for very long . At the first opportunity , it must be brought back toward
the center of the board where it too can participate in the play . Failure
14
Two Knights' Defense: 4 N-N5 Line 15
to reintegrate his QN into the struggle can lead to serious conse

quences for Black .
Two Knights' Defense - 4 N-NS Line

Tblllsi, USSR- 1973
Alexander Kuindgi - USSR Vanis Klovan - USSR

I P-K4 P-K4
Up to the twentieth century , this was by far the most common way
to begin a chess game . It continues to be an excellent way to open , for
with it some of the most important objectives of the opening are
realized :
(a) Lines are opened for the development of pieces .

(b) Control in one way or another of the four center squares (d4,
e4, d5 , e5) is most desirable . If one of the players should fail to
attain such control , his opponent would soon get an overwhelming
position . By 1 P-K4 P-K4 each player occupies one of the center
squares (his own K4-square) . He also exercises some control over
his Q5- and KB5-squares, for his opponent cannot play a piece or a
Pawn to either of these squares without inviting its capture .
2 N-KB3
A very common continuation . It is important to get each piece into

play and on the square from which it can exercise the most influence .
Here the White KN is developed toward the center of the board where
it can move to the greatest number of squares . It is threatening to
capture Black 's KP, and it exercises control over its own Q4-square .
2 • . • N-QB3
Black develops his QN toward the center of the board . It protects his
attacked KP and at the same time vies for control of White' s
Q4-square .
3 B-B4
White develops his KB to a square from which it is aimed at the
rather weak f7 . For the moment White threatens nothing , but in this
16 Game 1
game we will soon see how it cooperates in a later attack on that

square . Moreover, this KB vacates f1 so that White can now castle .
Even stronger is 3 B-N5 , for at b5 the White KB presses against the
Black center, threatening at the right time BxN, taking away the
protection the Black QN gives to its KP . The implications of this
theme will be discussed in detail in Game 2 .
3 . . . N-B3
One of the best replies to this position . It is more aggressive than

3 . . . B-B4 since it attacks White' s KP .
4 N-NS
The old and dangerous continuation of the Two Knights' Defense,

in which White attacks Black' s KBP with both his Bishop and his
Knight . No one knows whether it is better for White or for Black . It is
certain that any continuation will be complicated and that if one side
goes wrong , the other will have chances .
Here is an instance in which the same piece can (perhaps profitably)
be moved a second time in the opening because the ensuing position
may lead to a big tactical advantage for White .
Equally good but leading to quite another type of game is 4 P-Q4 .
4 • • • P-Q4
For a long time this move was considered the only adequate reply to
4 N-N5 , but in modem times 4 . . . B-B4 , the Traxler Gambit , has
come to the foreground . One example is 4 . . . B-B4 5 NxBP BxPch !
6 KxB NxPch 7 K-Nl Q-R5 8 P-KN3 NxNP 9 PxN QxPch 1 0 K-Bl
R-Bl 1 1 Q-R5 with incalculable complications .
5 PxP
If now 5 . . . NxP, all sorts of interesting variations and combina

tions can arise . Most of these lines are too complex and too far afield
from the present game to go into here ; however , 6 NxBP (the Fegatel
lo) is often played , a line in which White sacrifices his KN in return for
a promising but perhaps not decisive attack against the Black King ,
which comes out into the open with 6 . . KxN 7 Q-B 3ch K-K3 . Many
.
masters consider 6 P-Q4 (the Rio Variation) the strongest answer to

. 5 . . . NxP .
Two Knights' Defense: 4 N-NS Line 17
5 • • . N-QR4
The ' 'official ' ' variation, considered by theory to be the best Black
reply to White' s strong attack .
Certainly the Black QN is now posted on a square which is not
ideal , for the Knight is so far from the center that it cannot actively
participate in play there . On the other hand , because this Knight
attacks White' s KB , the power of this aggressive Bishop is broken . It
must either withdraw , be protected, or attack .
6 B-NSch
In this main line White keeps the gambit Pawn , but in return he will
be subjected to continual harassment by Black .
The chief alternative is 6 P-Q3 , after which there follows 6 . . P
.
KR3 7 N-KB3 P-K5 , and now a recently discovered continuation is 8

PxP NxB'9 Q-Q4 N-N3 1 0 P-B4, and it appears that White 's strong
center and two Pawns compensate for the piece sacrificed . It is
difficult to decide whether 6 B-N5ch or 6 P-Q3 is better for White .
6 . • • P-B3
Also possible is 6 . . B-Q2 , but Black prefers to sacrifice the
.
Pawn permanently , for by doing so he opens for himself the Q-file, the
QN-file , and diagonals for his Queen and QB . He also wins a tempo
which will allow him to continue a bit later with 8 . . . P-KR3 and if 9
N-KB 3 with 9 . . . P-K5 . Thus, Black is willing to sacrifice a little
material for an advantage in time .
7 Px:P Px:P
Black does not take advantage of the opportunity of bringing his QN

back into the center by 7 . NxP but prefers rather to recapture with
. .
18 Game 1
the Pawn, partly to open files and diagonals for himself, partly to force
the White Bishop to lose a tempo by moving once more , which will
then give Black the opportunity to continue with 8 . . P-KR3 .
.
White could now play 8 Q-B 3 , indirectly attacking Black ' s QR , but
then 8 . . R-N l seems to be sufficient for Black, since after 9 BxPch
.
NxB 10 QxNch N-Q2 1 1 P-Q3 B-K2 1 2 N-KB3 0-0 Black has a

considerable lead in development for two sacrificed Pawns , although
it has not been proved that he has equalized . Perhaps he has more or
less . Practice in grandmaster games must decide .
8 B-K2
White has won a Pawn , but Black will soon get a lead in develop
ment and a great deal of freedom of movement . These intangible
plusses compensate in many cases for material disadvantage .
Black now has two isolated Pawns , but they afford him open files
and diagonals for attack . In the opening and in the middle game these
isolated Pawns will not be much of a problem for Black ; but if the
game reaches the endgame stage , they will then constitute weaknesses
and be difficult to defend .
Now that Black has repulsed White ' s attack at the cost of a Pawn
and a poorly placed QN , he must make use of his superior develop
ment and mobility before White can make his material advantage felt .
I n all cases i n which a player has sacrificed material for development
and mobility he must face this problem at once . Let us see how Black
handles it .
8 . . . P-KR3
9 N-KR3
Surprising, for this gives Black the opportunity to mutilate the

White K-side pawn position by 9 . . . BxN . But after the more usual
line 9 N-KB3 P-K5 1 0 N-K5 B -Q3 1 1 P-Q4 Q-B2 1 2 P-KB4 0-0 1 3
P-B3 P-B4 theory indicates that chances are equal .
Fischer also prefers the text move and the ideas behind it .
9 • • • B-QB4
Black continues to develop his pieces-and note how undeveloped

White is ! Black is in no hurry to exchange on h3--for the White
Knight will not run away-but prefers rather to make the exchange
after White has castled , for then the weakness of White' s K-side will
weigh more heavily.
10 N-B3
Here 10 P-Q3 may lead to a transposition of moves after 10 . . . Q

QS 1 1 N-B 3 . If instead 1 1 B-K3 , then 1 1 . . . QxNP . Certainly 1 2
N-Q2 BxB 1 3 PxB BxN 1 4 PxB QxN i s worth considering, but Black
emerges successfully .
10 . • • Q-QS
Threatening 1 1 . . . BxN followed by 1 2 . . . QxP mate .
1 1 P-Q3
In order to answer 1 1 . . . BxN by 1 2 B-K3 . Now we must look far

ahead to see what the consequences of these two moves will be. For
instance , 1 1 . . . BxN 1 2 B-K3 Q-KR5 1 3 BxB (forced , for
1 3 . . . BxB is threatening) 1 3 . . . BxP 14 R KN I QxRP 1 5 K-Q2
..
R-Q l 1 6 K-B l , and now roles are reversed : Black is a Pawn up , but he
will find it difficult to continue his development effectively , and so
White is probably better off .
But Black finds a stronger line and plays
11 • • • Q-KRS
Again threatening 1 2 . . . BxN followed by mate . Now 1 2 B-K3 is
ineffective because of 1 2 . . BxB .
.
12 0-0
20 Game 1
Practically forced.
12 • • • 0-0
Black continues to develop . He is still not in a hurry to exchange his

QB for White ' s KN . He can do that later and then win White's P/R3 .
13 K-Rl
In order to make a place for his KN.
13 • • . BxN
Now that White ' s KN can withdraw to g l Black does make the
exchange .
14 Px:B
Now Black could win back his Pawn by either . . . QxRP

or . . . BxBP. This is a result of his postponing the capture of White' s
KN until Black ' s 1 3 . . . BxN .
14 • • • QR-Ql
Bringing a new piece into the game and threatening 1 5 . . . P-K5 .

But Black may be carrying the idea of developing rather than
winning material too far. It is difficult to say , but perhaps he should
have won back his Pawn in one of the following lines :
1 ) 1 4 . . . B xP 1 5 B-B3 followed by 1 6 B-N2 . The White pieces

are better posted, but White has an ugly pawn position , for the
doubled isolated Pawns on White' s K-wing are worse than the
isolated QRP and QBP on Black' s Q-wing . All in all , Black is
probably a bit better off , for his only drawback is his QN , which is
temporarily out of play on a5.
2) 14 . . . QxRP
2a) 1 5 P-B4 B-Q3 , and perhaps White is a little better off ;
2b) 1 5 B-B3 followed by 1 6 B-N2 .
15 P-B4
In order to open the KB-file , giving greater freedom of movement

to his pieces , and to avoid 1 6 . . . BxP .
Also deserving of consideration are 1 5 B-K3 and 1 5 B-B3 with
about an equal game . However, the text is best .
If Black now answers 1 5 P-B4 with 1 5 . . . P-K5 , White can play 1 6
Q-K l . There might follow 1 6 . . . QxQ ( l 6 . . . QxRP? 1 7 PxP) 1 7
RxQ KR-K l 1 8 R-B l , and White has maintained his plus Pawn and
stands a little better , although by pushing 1 8 . . . P-K6 Black can
exercise pressure against the White position by preventing the de
velopment of the White QB .
15 . . . PxP(?)
Since with the text Black gives up the possibility of playing . . .
P-K5 , 14 . . . QR-Q l has lost part of its meaning . Black should have
played 1 5 . . . P-K5 , which was suggested under 1 4 . . . QR-Q l as
the purpose of Black ' s 1 4th move .
16 RxP
As soon as Black has played 1 6 . . . QxP there will be material

equality , but although many of the White pieces are still on their
original squares , they mutually protect one another and all of a sudden
become more active than the better developed but less well protected
Black pieces . The Black QN is still completely out of play .
16 • • • QxP
Because Black did not play 1 4 , . . BxP, he has to play

1 6 . . . QxP in order to get material equality , and now his Queen gets
B
22 Game 1
into trouble . White takes advantage of the awkward position of

Black ' s Queen in a marvelous way .
It is curious to note that although White ' s K-side is somewhat open ,
it is adequately protected , whereas Black' s K-side is closed , but it is
not too well protected because of the absence of certain vital Black
pieces from the vicinity of the Black King .
How can White take advantage of this situation ?
17 RxN!
A wonderful move ! It permits White to assume the initiative . As

compensation for the Exchange, White gets attacking chances on the
K-side , and in this position Black is at a great disadvantage because
his QN is too far from the center of action to participate in the game
either offensively or defensively.
17 • • • PxR
18 N-K4
The White Knight now threatens both 1 9 NxB and 1 9 NxPch .

Moreover, the Knight is now in such a commanding position that the
Black Queen will soon find itself being chased from pillar to post and
nearly trapped .
18 • • • B-QS
With this move Black parries both of White' s threats and places his
Bishop on a diagonal where it may eventually protect his King
by . . . B-N2 .
19 B-N4
A third threat ! Because of the strong position of his Knight , White is

in a position to make a series of moves which will seriously threaten to
win the Black Queen .
19 • • • Q-RS
20 B-Q2!
A fourth and double threat: 21 BxN and 2 1 B-K l , winning the

Queen . In three moves White has already justified the sacrifice of the
Exchange made on his 1 7th move . All his pieces participate in the
attack , and the Black Knight and even the Black Queen have become
vulnerable . This is due to the fact that the Queen went on a foraging
expedition without the support of its minor pieces and because the
Black Knight is a loose piece and for all purposes out of play .
20 . • . P-KB4
Black must open an avenue of retreat for his Queen . If White now
plays 2 1 BxN , Black can reply 2 1 . . . R-Q4 and the game could
continue 22 B-N4 PxB 23 BxR R-KR4 24 Q-K2 KxB or perhaps
24 . . . B-K4 .
21 BxBP R-Q4
Black is thinking in terms of an active defense . His Rook protects

his threatened Knight and attacks the White Bishop . However ,
perhaps 2 1 . . . N-N2 would have been better in order to bring the
Knight a bit closer to the center of the struggle .
22 Q B3 -
This move (a) develops the White Queen to a square where it can
participate more actively; (b) protects White' s KB ; and (c) clears his
1 st rank for the development of his QR .
22 • • • N-N2
24 Game 1
At last Black's Knight begins to return toward the center of the

board in order to take part in checking the strong White attack .
23 B-Kl
To drive away the Black Queen and to create the possibility of a

direct attack against the Black King .
23 • • • Q-K2
24 Q-N4ch K-Rl
After 24 . . . B-N2 the game continues 25 B-B3 P-B3 (forced) 26

Q-N6 , and Black is in a very precarious position . He must give back
the Exchange by 26 . . . R-B2 (the best) 27 Q-R7ch K-B 1 28 B-N6 ,
after which White has a plus Pawn and an excellent position .
25 Q-R5
Now it will be difficult for Black to defend his KRP. Seemingly
25 . . . B-N2 would stop the attack , but then 26 B-B3 again practical
ly decides , for White threatens QxPch, and 26 . . . BxB ? 27 QxPch
leads directly to mate .
25 • • • Q-K3
The only move , but Black is not really offering a Queen sacrifice
but rather an exchange of Queens which will be advantageous to him ,
for if 26 BxQ RxQ, White loses the attack and he is also down the
Exchange .
26 N-N3
White protects his Queen and his Bishop . Now the Black Queen is
really attacked .
26 • • • N-Q3?
· In the series of moves that follows Black gives back the Exchange ,
as will appear from the comments that follow . Moreover , the text is
tantamount to resigning, for it leads to an ending with a plus Pawn for
White in which all of Black's Pawns are isolated .
Let us consider some alternatives :
1 ) 26 . . . Q-B3 27 B-Q2
l a) 27 . . . N-Q3 28 BxP wins at least the Exchange, for
Black must now move either his King or his Queen since
White is threatening 29 B-N5 dis eh ;
l b) 27 . . . K-N2 28 Q-R3 (threatening 29 N-R5ch)
28 . . . Q-Q3 (he must protect his KRP) 29 B-K4 wins the
Exchange , for it threatens both 30 BxR and 30 N-B5ch.
2) 26 . . . Q-Q3 27 B-Q2 K-N2 28 N-K4 , and the Queen must
give up the protection of the KRP (if 28 . . . Q-K3 ? 29
Q-N4ch) .
3 ) 2 6 . . . Q-K6 ! (This i s Black' s strongest reply . It threatens
mate , and because White has to take immediate measures to
defend against mate Black can consolidate his position with
27 . . . Q-N4 . ) 27 B-B2 Q-N4 28 BxBch RxB 29 Q-B3 and
3a) 29 . . . R-KB5 30 QxP RxB 3 1 NxR QxN 32 QxPch ,
etc . ;
3b) 29 . . . N-Q3 30 R-KN I ! (30 QxP? NxB 3 1 NxN QxN
32 QxPch K-N l 33 R-N l ch R-N5)
3b l ) 30 . . . . NxB 3 1 NxN R-KB5 (3 1 . . . Q-B5 32 NxR) 32 QxP
R-KN5 (32 . . . QxN QxPch) 33 .. RxR QxR 34 QxPch
K-N l 35 N-K7 mate;
3b2) 30 . . . R-KB5 3 1 QxP RxB (3 1 . . . NxB 32 NxN) 32 QxN
(32 NxR? QxN 33 QxN Q-B6ch draws) 32 . . . R-KN l (32
. . . R-Q l 33 NxR) 33 Q-Q4ch R-K4 (33 . . . P-B3 34
NxR) 34 QxP, and White has a slight advantage with three
Pawns for the Exchange ;
3b3) 30 . . . R-KN I 3 1 N-K2 QxB 32 NxR .
26 Game 1
To summarize the analyses of the three variations to 26 . . . N-Q3 ,

it appears that White maintains his superiorl�y, although 26 . . . Q
K6 ! certainly would have given better chances than 26 . . . Q-B 3 , 26
. . . Q-Q3., or the text .
27 B:xQ
In this way White regains the Exchange and reaches a won

endgame .
27 • • • R:xQ
28 N:xR P:xB
Now White has a sound plus Pawn and some attacking chances
against the Black Pawns , all of which are isolated .
A new phase of the game has begun. White makes the most of his
advantage in the simplest way .
29 B-N3 N-B4
Black is down a Pawn , and his Pawns are isolated . Without coun
terchances all he can do his defend his Pawns if they are attacked .
30 R-Kl
Not 30 R-KB l , for 30 . . . NxBch 3 1 NxN RxRch 32 NxR BxP,

and White has lost his plus Pawn .
30 • . • N:xBch
In view of Black's vulnerable Pawns and White's attack on his KP,

he has only the alternative 30 . . . R-K l , after which 3 1 P-B3 and
1 ) 3 1 . . . B-N3 ? 32 B-K5ch , which wins the Exchange ;

2) 3 1 . . . B-N2 32 NxB or 32 B-K5 , and White emerges with at
least as great an advantage as in the game.
31 N:xN R-B3
To protect both his KP and RP.

If instead 3 1 . . . BxP, then 32 RxP would lead to the loss of an

additional Pawn for Black .
32 P-N3
The plan is to save his Q-side Pawns in order to have an easy win in
the Knight vs . B ishop ending . Probably 32 P-B3 would have been just
as good .
White places his Pawns on the White squares so that they cannot be
attacked by the h�tile Bishop , which is confined to the Black squares .
This is often an effective procedure . However, sometimes putting the
Pawns on the same color as that of the opponent' s attacking Bishop
seriously restricts its mobility , and this is also a good idea. In such
cases, the player must be sure that his opponent cannot (a) break up the
player' s pawn chain by attacking it with Pawns; or (b) attack the pawn
chain from behind with his Bishop ; e . g . , if White had the pawn chain
c2-d3-e4 , Black might be able to bring his Bishop to bi and capture
one or more Pawns of White ' s pawn chain .
32 • • . K-R2
In the ending , the King begins to " live . " It should become active as
soon as possible and preferably in the center . Equally good would
have been 32 . . . K-N l , but not 32 . . . K-N2 ? , which would be
answered by 33 N-R5ch .
33 R-KB l
White offers to exchange Rooks , because he knows that in this

position the ending with his Knight against his opponent' s Bishop is
easily won . The Knight can attack the hostjle Pawns, whereas the
Black Bishop can do nothing of the sort . Moreover , the White King
can move freely against the Black Pawns .
33 . . . K-N3
34 K-N2
Both Kings head for the center , for in the endgame it is important to
have the King in a position where it can participate actively , and the
more so when the opponent 's King is near the center. In this case , the
White King must get to at least f3 .
28 Game 1
34 • . . RxR
Neither side can afford not to exchange Rooks .
3S NxR
He recaptures with the Knight instead of the King so that his King
can reach the center more rapidly.
35 • • • K-B4
36 K-B3 K-K4
37 N-K3
White wishes to bring his Knight to better squares and to prevent

Black from penetrating the somewhat vulnerable White Q-side pawn
structure .
Even though the Knight is more valuable than the Bishop in this
type of endgame, White need not fear the exchange 37 . . . BxN,
since a pawn ending with a plus Pawn is a sure win in 99 percent of the
positions, and this position is no exception . So White deliberately
plays for the exchange of his Knight for the Black Bishop .
For his part, Black is not going to oblige White by exchanging . If
37 . . . B xN , White can simply march on : 38 KxB P-B4 39 P-B3
K-Q4 40 P-Q4 PxPch 41 PxP P-KR4 42 P-KR4 P-R3 43 P-R3 P-R4 44
K-Q3 K-Q3 45 K-K4, and White can penetrate .
37 • • • P-B4
Now 38 N-N4ch would have won a Pawn for White , but he

probably feared 38 . . . K-Q4 39 NxP B-N2 40 N-N4 K-Q5 , and the
Black King can penetrate ; however, this does not mean too much after
4 1 K-K2 K-B6 42 K-Q l K-N7 43 P-QR4, and White' s KRP must
decide .
So rather than to risk this continuation , White played
38 N-N2 B-N8
39 P-KR3 K-QS
Black suddenly gets a chance to penetrate White ' s Q-side Pawns

and tries to take advantage of it .
40 N-B4!
Because of 4 1 N-K2ch , Black is now threatened with losing a piece

and cannot continue with 40 . . . K-B6 immediately .
40 • . . Resigns
A possible continuation could have been 40 . . . B-R7 4 1 N-K2ch

K-Q4 42 K-N4 B-Q3 43 K-R5 B -B 1 44 K-N6 K-Q3 45 N-N l K-Q4 46
N-B3 K-Q3 47 P-KR4 when , for example , on 47 . . . K-Q4 48 P-R5 ,
48 . . . K-Q3 loses : 49 K-B7 B-K2 50 K-N7 , etc . Black is in Zug
zwang after White ' s 48 P-R5 .
White won because (a) his pieces were active , whereas Black' s
displaced QN was his greatest disadvantage ; (b) through the sacrifice
of the Exchange he was able to open up Black ' s unprotected K-side ;
and ( c) through exchanges he could convert his middle game advan
tages into an endgame in which he had a plus Pawn and Black had no
counterchances . It was mainly the plus Pawn that decided the battle .
Black' s inferior pawn position was of secondary importance .
Game 2
General ideas behind the Ruy Lopez and especially behind the Morphy
Variation
Characteristics of the Closed Variation of the Ruy Lopez
The importance of White's playing P-KR3 in this variation
Giving up two tempos in order to maintain the center in a safer way
The customary maneuverings of White's QN in the Closed Variation of
the Ruy Lopez
Problems arising from "unprotecting" a Pawn
Opening the center by a pawn push when one's Bishops are directed
toward the center and thus come to full activity
The in-between move
The Queen sacrifice
Using the developed pieces to best advantage
Keeping the opponent on the run with active moves
Liquidating the dangerous passed Pawn
Maneuvering to win further Pawns in the endgame
The Queen Sacrifice

The various chess pieces have different relative values . Not all
chess masters agree on the relative worth of each piece , but the
following numerical values are often assigned to them: Queen = 8;
Rook = 41/2 ; Bishop = 3; Knight = 3 ; Pawn = l .
These are only approximate values , since one of the most important
factors to consider in determining the worth of a piece is its strength in
the position it occupies on the board at a given time .
Theoretically , the Queen is by far the strongest piece because ,
unlike every other piece , it can move horizontally, vertically , and
diagonally any number of unoccupied squares . Therefore , players are
understandably reluctant to part with their Queen .
However , there are positions in which the Rooks, the Bishops , the
Knights , and possibly the Pawns as well are so strongly posted that
they exert a combined pressure which is stronger than that of the
Queen itself and where a player can afford to give up his Queen ,
30
Ruy Lopez: Breyer Defense 31
especially if by so doing he can bring the remaining pieces into an even

stronger attacking position .
To play without the Queen and to get the maximum use out of the
remaining pieces requires consummate skill . The Queen must not be
sacrificed without a careful analysis of subsequent play .
But a master is well equipped to make judgments as to the force of
his remaining pieces , and there exist in master play beautiful exam
ples of Queen sacrifices where either by careful analysis or through
intuition the master has judged his position strong enough to gain
victory without the Queen .
Ruy Lopez - Breyer Defense

Candidates' Match - San Jose, Puerto Rico - 1 974
Robert Byrne - USA Boris Spassky - USSR

1 P-K4 P-K4
2 N-KB3 N-QB3
3 B-NS
The Ruy Lopez , an opening which affords White more possibilities

than most others .
With 3 B-NS , White exercises indirect pressure against Black' s
position , for with BxN h e threatens t o win Black' s KP at some future
time. He cannot do so immediately , since 4 BxN QPxB 5 NxP is
answered by 5 . . . Q-QS or 5 . . . Q-N4 , either of which leads to
regaining the Pawn and gives Black at least an even position . But
Black must continually take into account the possibility of White' s
playing BxN under more favorable circumstances , as he threatens to
do after 6 R-K l . Therefore , 3 B-NS is SOPlewhat stronger than 3
B-B4, which was played in Game 1 .
3 . . . P-QR3
The Morphy Variation , considered the strongest line of the Ruy

Lopez , since Black reserves the possibility of breaking White ' s
pressure o n the Black Q N at any time b y . . . P-QN4.
Important elements of White ' s strategy in this variation are (a)
direct pressure against Black' s QN ; (b) indirect -pressure against
Black' s Pawn on e5 ; and (c) an attempt to weaken Black' s Q-side first
32 Game 2
by playing 4 B-R4, which forces Black to drive back the Bishop

by . . . P-QN4 at the proper time , and later by playing P-QR4 to
exploit Black's . . . P-QN4.
Black ' s general strategy is the opposite of White ' s . He will attempt
to prevent White from attaining the three above-mentioned goals .
Also , Black often later tries to exchange the White KB for his QN by
means of . . . P-QN4 ; B-N3 N-QR4 .
4 B-R4 N-B3
A developing move which contributes to the centralization of

Black' s KN and attacks White's KP .
s 0-0
At this point 5 P-Q4 is not considered strongest , since it would

relieve the pressure against the Black KP by allowing Black to
exchange it .
s . . . B-K2
The Closed Variation, the basic idea of which is to complete

development as rapidly as possible . Black builds up a solid position
and hopes to be able to maintain the center, that is, to keep his KP on
e5 .
At this point Black could have played 5 . . . NxP, not to gain a
Pawn , for White can easily win the Pawn back , but to reach equality in
the simplest way . This line is known as the Open Variation .
6 R-Kl
White protects his KP and now threatens to win a Pawn by 7 BxN

QPxB 8 NxP. Unless he intends to play 6 . . . P-Q3 , the text forces
Black to drive back the White Bishop to the excellent b3-square by
6 . . . P-QN4, and the resultant Black Q-side pawn configuration
(Pa6-Pb5) will give White the opportunity to attack the Black Q-side
Pawns by P-QR4 if he wishes .
6 . . . P-QN4
Black has postponed . . . P-QN4 until the last possible moment,

since White's KB will in some ways be more active on b3 (from which

point it attacks f7) than on a4 . However , the attack by the White
Bishop on f7 is less significant than a few moves earlier, since Black is
now able to castle .
7 B-N3 P-Q3
Black protects his KP a second time and frees his QN . Now by

8 . . . N-QR4 Black can threaten to exchange his QN for White ' s
rather active KB .
8 P-83
This move is played (a) so that if 8 . . . N-QR4, White has available
9 B-B2 to avoid exchanging the Bishop for the Knight ; and (b) to gain
a strong hold on the center by P-Q4 .
8 • • . 0-0
9 P-KR3
This is an important precautionary move in this variation of the Ruy

Lopez. If instead White should play 9 P-Q4 immediately, Black could
reply 9 . . B-N5 , forcing White to play 10 P-Q5 in order to avoid
.
doubling his Pawns and opening his K-position by 10 . . . PxP 1 1

PxP BxN 1 2 PxB . Moreover 1 0 P-Q5 would give Black some addi
tional possibilities ; for instance, after moving his QN, he could attack
White' s advanced QP by . . . P-QB3 and perhaps later, after ade-
quate preparation, play . . . P-Q4 itself. In general , after having
attained Pd4-Pe4 , White should try to. maintain this strong center
formation .
34 Game l
Let us now examine the other side of the board . How should Black
continue?
In the Ruy Lopez the Black QN on c6 presents a problem in that it
blocks the eventual development of Black ' s QBP and also inhibits the
effectiveness of the Black QB on b7 , the square to which it will
eventually go. Therefore , this Knight has in general two possibilities :
(a) it can return to b8 and then go to d7 , from which point it protects the
cen£er better than at c6; or (b) it can drive away White' s QB from b3
by . . . N-QR4 and eventually go to c4, from which square it may
threaten White:'s b2 and at times his Be3 .
Black chooses (a) and plays
9 • • . N-Nl
The Breyer Variation .

This move looks strange , for it costs two tempos , but it does have a
strategic basis . As explained above , from here the Knight will go to d7
where it will offer more reliable protection to the Black center .
In this closed game , in which both sides spend time maneuvering , a
tempo more or less does not matter a great deal . The center is better
protected with Black's QN on d7 than on c6, because after going to b7
Black' s QB will have free reign on the long diagonal , and the QN
cannot be attacked as easily on d7 as on c6.
It is best to play 9 . . . N-N l at this point rather than later so that 1 0
P-Q4 can be answered by l O . . . QN-Q2 , and the Knight again
protects the Black KP .
10 P·Q4
White builds up his center and presses against Black' s KP. If he can
force Black to play . . . PxP, then the possibilities of a K-side attack
arise . Moreover , after White has answered . . . PxP by PxP, his QN
can develop to c3 .
10 • • • QN-Q2
1 1 QN·Q2
In the Ruy Lopez White 's QN is often developed via d2 and f 1 to g3

or e3 , from which point it exercises considerable influence on the
center.
According to theory the attempt to undermine the Black center Pe5
Roy Lopez: Breyer Defense 35
by 1 1 P-B4 and 1 2 P-B5 does not accomplish much . Black is not

forced to capture White's QBP . One advantage of this line , however ,
is that White gets c3 for his Knight .
11 • . • B-N2
Attacking White ' s KP a second time . Many of the opening moves

in the Ruy Lopez center around Black ' s attack on and White' s protec
tion of that KP .
12 B-B2
White protects his KP with a third piece . He will now be able to

continue the development of his QN by 1 3 N-B l .
12 . • • R-Kl
To press indirectly against White 's KP and to free f8 for the Black
KB .
13 N-B l
As already explained , from fl White can bring his Knight into the
game more actively by playing it to either e3 or g3 .
In the lOth Fischer-Spassky game Fischer played 1 3 P-QN4 at this
point, expanding White' s Q-wing and guarding against a possi
ble . . . P-QB4 and also blocking Black' s QNP so that an eventual
P-QR4 could not be answered by . . . P-N5 . That move is neither
better nor worse than the text .
13 . . • B-KBl
Indirectly attacking White's KP once more and planning , after

proper preparation , to develop his KB to g7 .
14 N-N3 P-N3
Black opens up a square at g7 for his KB , from which point that

Bishop can press against the White center . It will also furnish indirect
support to Black 's vulnerable KP. It is a .sort of preparation for the
Black counterpush in the center, which will soon follow . It also
36 Game l
prevents White from establishing his Knight on the strong outpost f5 .

This move does create a certain weakness in Black's K-side pawn
formation , but this is significant only if White gets attacking chances
with P-KR4-5 or if he can attack the Black K-side with pieces at g5 ,
f6 , or h6 .
15 P-N3?
To be able to develop his QB to a square where it will support his

center . But the text " unprotects " White 's QBP, which, as we shall
soon see, will become very vulnerable and will constitute a gnawing
problem for White .
Perhaps 1 5 P-QR4 would have been better , and if 1 5 . . . B -N2 1 6
P-Q5 , and then Black cannot successfully continue 1 6 . . . P-B3 to
attack the White center because of 17 PxP BxP 1 8 QxP .
15 • • • B-N2
16 P-QR4
In order to weaken Black' s QNP. But 1 6 P-Q5 would have been

better to prevent Black from opening up the center , as he now does ,
for then-as already remarked-1 6 . . . P-B3 would fail against 1 7
PxP followed b y 1 8 QxP .
16 • • • P-Q4!
The counterpush in the center . Both Black Bishops are very well
posted for this counterpush . Suddenly all the Black pieces become
active , whereas the White pieces are not very effectively placed . They
are posted defensively , whereas the Black pieces are posted aggres-
sively. White ' s QBP is somewhat weak , whatever is played , and

especially if the al/h8 diagonal is opened .
17 PxKP
More or less forced , for 1 7 PxQP is answered by 1 7 . . . NxP and

there follows 1 8 B -N2 (to protect the QBP) 1 8 . . . N-B5 , and Black
has the makings of an attack because of his preponderance in space .
17 • • • KNxP
Now both White ' s Pc3 and his Pe5 are en prise , and his QBP is very
weak .
18 BxN
White is forced to remove the Black KN because of the weakness of

his QBP, but he will end up with a very annoying Black Pawn on e4 .
He could have played 1 8 NxN , keeping his Bishop , but a whole
series of factors must be taken into consideration when making this
choice . Questions arise such as : What happens after a Black Queen
sacrifice such as occurs in the game at Black 's l 9th move if there were
a Bishop at c2 but no Knight at g3? In other words , how would the
game have continued after 1 8 . . . PxN 19 B-N5 PxN 20 BxQ?
Apparently White did not take into consideration the possibility that
Black would offer to sacrifice his Queen after 1 9 B-N5 .
18 • • • PxB
If now 1 9 NxP NxP, Black' s position is a bit better, for his Bishops
are working along the diagonals and White's position has several
weak points . Moreover , Black has the advantage of the Two Bishops
against Bishop + Knight .
19 B-NS
An in-between move which attacks the Black Queen . White hopes

for 1 9 . . . Q-B l 20 NxP NxP, and things begin to look better for
him . Among other advantages White controls f6 .
A simple continuation for Black would have been 1 9 . . . P-KB 3 ,
and after 2 0 PxP NxP Black still stands a bit better . But instead of
38 Game l
choosing the conventional way , Black plunges into a sea of complica

tions which no one could foresee or judge even with analysis, and
whose outcome no one could predict .
The point is : Be very careful when making a n in-between move . All
possibilities must be calculated beforehand . In this position White
does not lose because of his in-between move, but he does give his
opponent the opportunity to create promising possibilities .
19 • • • PxN
Black offers his Queen in exchange for a very strong attack against
the White King by his Bishops , his Pf3 , and his Knight , which will
soon be on e5 .
20 BxQ QRxB
Two Bishops for a Queen are not a great deal , but what Bishops !
Black has two threats : (a) the indirect attack of his QR on the White
Queen ; and (b) the continuation . . . PxP followed by . . . NxP and
. . . N-B6ch . The weakness of White' s QBP must also be taken into
consideration. The Black Bishops are working wonderfully well to
gether . All the Black pieces are in action .
The following variations show the force of Black's position and
some of his possibilities :
1 ) 2 1 PxBP NxP 22 Q-B2 NxPch 23 K-B l NxR (with 23 . . . N

R7ch Black can force a draw) 24 RxN RxRch 25 KxR B-B6, and
White is lost, since he has no defense against 26 . . . BxPch 27
QxB R-Q8 mate , and 26 N-K4 or 26 N-K2 is refuted by
26 . . . R-K l .
2) 21 Q-B2 NxP (threatening 22 . . . PxNP and 23 . . . N-B6ch)

practically forces 22 RxN RxR 23 PxBP BxP 24 PxP PxP , and
White has no moves to strengthen his position , whereas Black
threatens for instance 25 . . . KR-Q4 followed by 26 . . . R-Q8ch
27 RxR RxRch 28 K-R2 B-K4 and mate on h l .
3) 2 1 P-K6 N-K4 22 PxPch KxP 23 Q-B l PxNP 24 Q-B4ch K-N l
25 N-K4 R-KB I , and Black wins at least the Exchange, maintain
ing a very strong attack .
4) 2 1 N-B l ! NxP 22 Q-B2 PxNP 23 N-R2 . This is what Spassky
considered to be the best defense . A White Knight now controls f3 ,
and Black' s attacking chances are not very promising . On the other
hand, Black has almost full compensation : two Bishops and two
Pawns for the Queen . Spassky draws attention to the remarkable
continuation : 23 . . . P-N4 24 QR-Q I N-N3 , threatening
25 . . . N-B5 and 26 . . . NxP mate . After 25 P-B3 N-B5 26
K-B2 the mate is parried, but the struggle goes on .
21 PxNP NxP
22 PxRP?
This is equivalent to resigning , for Black now reaches an ending in

which he has two light pieces for a Rook .
White should have tried 22 Q-B2, and after 22 . . . PxKNP White
sacrifices the Exchange : 23 RxN (forced) RxR 24 PxP B-B6 . White
must try to defend against the threat 25 . . . QR- K l and 26 . . . R
K8ch . The best way is 25 P-R7 QR-K l (threatening mate) 26 P
R8 = Q (26 Q-Q2 fails against 26 . . . B-R3) 26 . . . BxQ 27 RxB
RxR 28 KxP , and Black has the better endgame , but White still has
some play .
22 • • • RxQ
23 KRxR B-QRl
24 PxP
If White does not capture the Pawn now , Black will continue
24 . . . PxP, which will make matters worse , for Black will have a
strong protected passed Pawn .
24 • • • NxPch
25 K-Bl BxP
40 Game 2
White ' s weakened QBP finally succumbs .
26 QR-Bl
White has no compensation for his material disadvantage . His

passed Pawn does not mean much.
26 • • • N-Q7ch
Black could have played 26 . . . B -R4 at once, but the text is a

device for gaining time on the clock . From here through his 39th move
Black will give a number of needless checks which will not advance
his position but will gain him time .
27 K-Nl B-R4
28 P-N4
Hoping for 28 . . . BxP 29 RxP, which would increase White ' s

drawing chances , since all the Black Q-side Pawns would have
disappeared .
28 • • • N-B6ch
29 K-Bl N-R7ch
30 K-Nl N-B6ch
31 K-Bl B-N3
32 R-B2
On its 2d rank White's R/2 can neutralize the force of the Black
Rook by moving to e2 ; from c2 it can also offer additional protection
to e2 in case White wishes to bring his Knight to that square .
32 • • • N-R7ch
33 K-Nl N-B6ch
34 K-Bl K-Bl
Partly to bring the King nearer the center of the board-a good idea
in most endgames-partly to give protection to the Rook , for in case
Black later played . . . B-K5 his Bishop could otherwise be pinned by
R-K2 .
35 N-K2
To bring the Knight via f4 to a square where it will have greater

activity .
35 • • • N-R7ch
36 K-Nl N-B6ch
37 K-Bl B-KS
At e4 the Bishop attacks the White R/2 and has the possibility of
going to f5 , threatening to win White' s KRP and perhaps even to give
mate .
38 R-R2
If 38 R-B4, Black could play 38 . . . B-KB4 (threatening mate) 39

N-B4 P-N4, and if 40 R-QS B-B l , capturing White ' s passed Pawn ,
since 4 1 N-Q3 fails against 4 1 . . . BxRP mate .
38 • • • N-R7ch
These repetitions are becoming monotonous , but Spassky is eager

to reach the 40th move , when the game can be adjourned and he will
have all the time in the world to look for a sure win .
39 K-Nl N-B6ch
40 K-B l N-RS
Threatening to win a Pawn by 4 1 . . . B-N7ch.
41 N-B4
42 Game l
At this point the game was adjourned .
41 • • • B-B6
Strengthens the pressure . After 42 R-B 1 Black would continue

42 . . . P-N4 43 N-Q3 B-N7ch , winning the KRP . If Black had
played 4 1 . . . P-N4 immediately, the Knight could have gone to d5 ,
where it would have been well placed and would have served as a
support for White ' s passed Pawn .
42 R-Q3
Black would also answer 42 R-B l by 42 . . . P-N4 and then be able

to win White' s KRP .
42 • • • P-N4
This is an important offensive move , for it drives the Knight from

its powerful position at f4 .
43 N-K2
This inactive move is forced , for if 43 N-Q5 , Black quickly wins by

43 . . . B-N7ch 44 K-N l R-K8ch 45 K-R2 R-R8ch 46 K-N3 RxPch
47 K-N4 RxR , etc .
43 • • • B-N7ch
Black is now playing to attack the White King and White's pieces so
asto get them into such a position that at a given moment White will no
longer be able to protect his KRP .
44 K-Kl
If 44 K-N l N-B6ch 45 KxB N-K8ch , winning the Exchange .
44 • • • N-B6ch
45 K-Ql N-K4
This move brings the Knight to the center , where it is offensive in

that it attacks White' s R/3 and eventually defensive in helping to
guard against the advance of White ' s QRP .
White must continually make forced moves . For instance , if now
46 R/3-Q2 BxRP, White cannot take advantage of the fact that
Black ' s QB has left the a8/h l diagonal , for 47 P-R7? is answered by
47 . . R-R l followed by the capture of White ' s RP. This is because
.
White' s Rooks cannot be doubled on the QR-file immediately , and yet

White ' s QRP cannot be protected unless the Rooks are doubled .
46 R-QB3 B-Q4
Black maneuvers very cleverly to eliminate White ' s QRP . Some

possibilities :
1 ) 47 R/2-R3 B-B5 (indirect attack against the White Knight) 48

N-N3 R-R 1 , winning the QRP , since White cannot double Rooks;
2) 47 R-R l B-B5 48 N-N3 B-Q5 , etc . ;
3) 47 R-R4 B-B5 48 N-N3 R-R l 49 R/ � -R3 B-N4 , etc .
47 R-Q2
Now Black goes after White' s QRP directly , and it can no longer be
defended .
47 • • • B-BS
48 R-R3 R-Rl
49 P-B4
44 Game l
Since there is no possibility for White to defend his QRP, he avails

himself of the opportunity of improving the position of his Knight .
49 • • • PxP
SO NxP RxP
S I RxR BxR
S2 N-QS B-BS
Now that the QRP has been eliminated , Black can afford to let
White exchange his Knight for Black ' s KB .
S3 NxB
White exchanges his Knight for the Black Bishop because Two
Bishops are very strong . They can control all the squares on the board
and make things very difficult for an opponent .
S3 • . . PxN
S4 R-Q6 P-N4
SS K-Q2 N-N3
Black transfers his Knight to a protected square from which it can

cooperate in maneuvers to win the White RP .
S6 K-K3 P-R4
S7 Resigns
There is no point in continuing the game . Black can play in his own
good time for the advance of his KBP , and in most cases he will be
able to capture White' s RP or NP without any compensation for
White .
Just to give one possible line : 57 K-Q4 N-B5 58 P-R4 (if 58 R-KR6
K-N2) 58 . . . N-N3 59 K-K4 NxP 60 R-KR6 B-K7 , and after 6 1
K-K3 N-B4ch White wins the Bishop but loses his Rook on h6 . With
two passed Pawns and two pieces against a Rook Black can simply
advance his King and Pawns , and at a given time White will have to
sacrifice his Rook . The point is that White has no counterplay
whatever .
Black won the game because (a) his pieces were more effectively
posted for maximum usefulness ; (b) through an imaginative Queen
sacrifice Black was able to get into a very effective attacking position ;
and (c) White had several weaknesses which Black was able to
exploit .
Game 3
Lively play resulting from the Petroff Defense

Black's attempts to maintain his Knight on e4 and White's efforts to
undermine it
The surprise proffered sacrifice
Development with tempo
Exact calculation of the many complicated consequences of a sacrifice
Reducing to an advantageous endgame position
Outmaneuvering the opponent in a R + P vs. R + P endgame
The Sacrifice
Many chess games advance very quietly, each side developing
pieces with clocklike regularity , sometimes protecting an attacked
piece at the same time . In such games , both players often strive for a
slight positional advantage which in the long run may be increased
enough to lead to a win .
But sometimes a position offers other and more dramatic resources
-at times a surprising sacrifice of a piece may be compensated in
other ways , such as faster development to take advantage of the fact
that the opponent has not yet castled , an overwhelming attack, or a
chance to regain the sacrificed piece while emerging with material
equality but with a superior position .
The proffered sacrifice is frequently much more exciting and much
more interesting than the plodding attempt to win by slow stages . It
requires great powers of imagination and a considerable analytical
ability .
Once the sacrifice has been accepted, the player who offered it must
have at his command sufficient counteradvantages to justify his gam
ble . Otherwise he will find himself down materially and with a losing
position .
Certain types of weaknesses in the opponent ' s position may justify
the sacrifice . The problem is how to recognize the weaknesses and
then design and evaluate a sacrificial combination based on these
indications . Among the typical weaknesses are a loose piece, a vul-
46
Petroff Defense 47
nerable K-position , and several of the opponent' s pieces on a diagonal

or vertical line .
Petroff Defense
US Championship - Chicago - 1 974
Walter Browne - USA Arthur Bisguier - USA

1 P-K4 P-K4
2 N-KB3 N-KB3
The Petroff Defense-in reality a counterattack, since instead of

defending , as Black did in Games 1 and 2, against the White KN' s
attack on his KP, Black attacks White' s KP. This leads to a game with
entirely different ideas from those prevalent in the Two Knights '
Defense and the Ruy Lopez Opening .
Formerly it was thought that the Petroff Defense would give White
a slight advantage , but in practice this advantage has proved unimpor
tant , and in recent years the Petroff has become a popular weapon for
players who are looking for something more than mere equality .
It is difficult to show exactly how Black often gets such lively play
in this defense , but sometimes it stems from a psychological factor ,
namely that White expects too much from the opening . He feels that it
is his duty to strive for more than equality , and this gives chances to
Black .
3 NxP
The oldest and principal variation . Another important line is
Steinitz' s 3 P-Q4 .
If after 3 NxP Black plays the tempting 3 . . . NxP? , he risks
falling into a trap which could lose him his Queen : 4 Q-K2 N-KB 3 ? ?
5 N-B6 d i s e h (attacking the Queen , giving discovered check , and
covering e7 with the Knight) , etc . Even with a better defense after
3 . . . NxP, Black comes out disadvantageously ; e . g . , 4 Q-K2 Q-K2
5 QxN P-Q3 6 P-Q4 and
1) 6 . . . PxN 7 PxP P-KB3 8 P-B4 N-Q2( ?) 9 P-K6 N-B4 1 0

B-N5ch P-B3 1 1 BxPch , etc . , and White remains a Pawn ahead ;
or
2) 6 . . . N-Q2 7 N-QB3 PxN 8 N-Q5 Q-Q3 9 PxP NxP? 1 0
P-KB4.
48 Game 3
These variations show that in many lines Black succeeds in regain

ing his Pawn , but he remains backward in development , which may
later cost material . So, because of the tactical possibilities at White's
disposal , after 3 NxP Black must drive away the White Knight before
playing . . . NxP himself.
3 . • . P-Q3
4 N-KB3 NxP
S P-Q4
With this move White occupies one of the most important center
squares .
The alternative 5 Q-K2, forcing 5 . . . Q-K2 , is followed by 6
P-Q3 N-KB 3 , which gives a slight advantage to White because after 7
N-QB3 or 7 B-N5 the game usually continues 7 . . . QxQch 8 BxQ ,
and White has won a tempo over and above the one h e had by virtue of
the first move . However, most games with this continuation end in a
draw . In fact , sometimes White deliberately plays this variation
because he has practically no chance to lose the game . This is what
Lasker did when playing against Marshall during the last round at St .
Petersburg , 1 9 1 4 .
s . . . P-Q4
The most enterprising and best move , for it maintains the position
of the Black KN and improves Black' s mobility .
The positions are almost symmetrical , and it is difficult to decide
which of the two sides has won or lost a tempo . One of the following
situations must exist:
(a) If the position of Black' s Knight on e4 is , in fact , an invitation

to an attack which, in collaboration with moves such as . . . B
KN5 , . . . P-KB4, and . . . N-QB 3 , proves to be effective, then
Black has won a tempo.
(b) If , however , White succeeds either in forcing back Black' s
Knight ( 6 B-Q3 B-Q3 7 0-0 0-0 8 R-K l N-KB3) or i n taking
advantage of the vulnerable position of the Black Knight as in the
game, then White has won a tempo over and above the one he had
by playing first .
Petroff Defense 49
Theory has not definitely determined whether (a) or (b) is valid, but it
inclines toward the second option under (b) .
6 B-Q3
White now begins to apply pressure on the Black Knight . If White

can force Black ' s Knight to withdraw or to exchange itself for the
White QN once the latter is developed to c3 , then White usually gets a
slight advantage . If now , for instance , 6 . . . N-KB3 , White is two
tempos ahead .
6 . . . B-Kl
Nowadays this modest development of Black' s Bishop to e7 is

preferred to the more aggressive 6 . . . B-Q3 . In general , 6 . . . B
K2 is followed by . . . 0-0 , . . . B-KN5 , and . . . P-KB4, and
Black sacrifices his QP after White has played P-QB4 .
Although 6 . . . B-Q3 looks ideal , if Black is going to sacrifice his
QP anyway , in some variations it is important for him to control g5 ,
which he does with 6 . . . B-K2 .
Let us consider what might happen after 6 . . . B-Q3 : 7 0-0 0-0
8P-B4 and
1 ) 8 . B-KN5 (sacrificing his QP) 9 PxP P-KB4 1 0 N-B3 , and

. .
White stands better. A wild continuation would be 10 . . . N-Q2

1 1 P-KR3 B-R4 12 NxN PxN 1 3 BxP N-B3 14 B-B 5 ! K-R l 1 5
P-KN4 !
l a) 1 5 . . . NxQP 1 6 B-K6 B-B2 1 7 N-N5 ! ;
lb) 1 5 . . . B-N3 1 6 BxB followed by 1 7 N-N5 or 1 6 B-K6 ,
and Black ' s position has not improved .
so Game 3
2) 8 . . . P-QB3 9 Q-B2
2a) 9 . . . R-K l 10 N-B3 N-B 3 , and White stands better , for
he has superior development and has succeeded in forcing
back Black' s Knight ;
2b) 9 . . N-R3 , and the pawn sacrifice does not work after
.
1 0 BxN PxB 1 1 QxP , for White stands better in view of his

superior development .
7 0-0
It would not be advantageous at this point to exchange by 7 BxN

PxB 8 N-KS unless Black' s KP could then be captured, which is not
the case .
If Black now answered 7 . . 0-0 , he would not have many coun
.
terchances because 8 R-K l P-KB4 9 P-B4 P-B3 10 Q-N3 ! practically

forces the Black Knight to withdraw , which was White's objective all
the time , for White threatens 1 1 PxP PxP 1 2 BxN PxB 1 3 RxP ,
winning a Pawn ; and if Black parries the threat by 1 0 . .K-R 1 , then
.
after 1 1 N-B 3 , White has an excellent position . Therefore, it appears

that Black gets a stronger position by postponing castling .
So instead Black plays the somewhat aggressive
7 • • • N-QB3
Today this is considered the best system of defense , for after

8 . . B-KN5 Black has an attack on White ' s QP . Moreover , Black
.
might eventually play . . . N-NS , which could also put problems to

White . If the threat of . . . N-NS should force White to play P-B 3 ,
then the aggressive and undermining P-B4 b y White would be out of
the question, and Black would have a satisfactory position . But White
is not intimidated and does not play 8 P-B3 , which would be too
passive , but chooses rather the active
8 P-B4
This is to undermine the position of the Black KN by taking away its

protection . White will be left with an isolated QP, but this will be
compensated for by his advance in development .
Also good here is 8 R-Kl .
8 • • . N-NS
Petroff Defense Sl
In order to eliminate White 's KB . The move looks good, for in

addition to exchanging a Knight for a Bishop Black succeeds within a
few moves in isolating White ' s QP . But judging from the outcome of
this game, its value is dubious. The text also violates the rule that each
piece should be played only once during the opening . This rule is
important only in sharp positions, but since the position becomes
sharp later in the game , the principle is applicable here .
Probably best would have been 8 . . . B-KNS , the other line
suggested under Black' s 7th move , after which the game might have
continued 9 PxP QxP 1 0 R-K l P-B4 ( 1 0 . . . N-B3 1 1 N-B3 with
advantage to White) . Also to be considered is 8 . B-K3 .
. .
9 Px:P
If now 9 . QxP, then after 1 0 BxN QxB 1 1 R-K l White gets

. .
superiority somewhat as in the game .
9 • • • NxB
lO QxN QxP
1 1 R-Kl B-KB4
The appropriate move , for Black continues to try to maintain his

Knight at e4 .
If instead 1 1 . . . N-B 3 , White must not continue with the obvious
1 2 N-B 3 , since after 1 2 . . . Q-Q l White can no longer prevent Black
from castling . Better is 1 2 B-NS , threatening 1 3 BxN, after which
Black' s K-side Pawns are mutilated . So now 1 2 . . . B-K3 is practi
cally forced, and there follows 13 N-B 3 Q-Q2 ( 1 3 . . . Q-Q3 or
1 3 . . . Q-Q l can be answered by 1 4 Q-N5ch , winning Black ' s QNP)
14 N-KS Q-B l 1 5 BxN BxB ? 1 6 P-QS and wins .
If 1 1 . . . N-B4 1 2 Q-NSch, winning a piece after 1 2 . . . P-B3 1 3
QxN.
Black has succeeded in giving White an isolated Pawn, and he has
the Bishop pair, but he has not yet castled, and this is an important
point to consider in evaluating the relative strength of the two sides .
12 N-B3 NxN
The only move .
13 QxN P-QB3
52 Game 3
Black's QBP must be protected .

If 1 3 . . . Q-Q3 , White maintains the initiative by 1 4 B-N5 P-KB3
1 5 B-R4, threatening to win a Pawn by 1 6 B-N3 .
After 1 3 . . . Q-Q l 1 4 B-N5 P-KB3 1 5 B -B4 P-B3 1 6 Q-N3 things
grow worse, for Black will have difficulty in castling and his QNP is
attacked .
To be considered is the pawn sacrifice 1 3 . . . B-K3 . After 1 4 QxP
B-Q3 1 5 Q-B3 0-0 Black has some-but probably not sufficient
compensation for his lost P�wn because of his better development .
14 B-R6!
A surpnsmg move-not at all obvious . Most masters would

perhaps not even have considered it . After having seen its conse
quences we can state that it serves two purposes : (a) it wins a tempo
which brings White' s QR into the game; and (b) it helps to open the
c3/h8 diagonal by removing Pg7 , after which White will be able to
attack Black' s KR with his Queen . It is worth noting that these two
factors are worth a piece and that White wins back the piece because of
them . The fact that Black has not yet castled certainly is the deciding
factor. Moreover , the text is the only move which will maintain
White ' s advantage and more .
14 • • • R-KNl
Black declines the sacrifice, for after 1 4 . . . PxB 1 5 R-K5 White

wins back his piece with positional advantage : 1 5 . . . Q-Q2 1 6
QR-K l and
1 ) 1 6 . . . B-K3 1 7 P-Q5 ! (The point ! Now the c3/h8 diagonal is

Petroff Defense 53
completely open and the indirect attack of White's Queen against

Black' s KR becomes a reality .) 1 7 . . . PxP 1 8 RxB PxR 1 9
QxRch B-B l 2 0 Q-B6 B-K2 2 1 RxP and wins ;
2) 1 6 . . . K-Q l 1 7 RxB/7 QxR 1 8 RxQ KxR 1 9 Q-B5ch K-B3
20 Q-K5ch K-N3 21 N-R4ch, etc .
Interesting is the variation given by Browne himself : 1 4 . . . B-K5

15 BxP R-KN l 1 6 B-B6 ! BxB ( 1 6 . . . BxN 1 7 RxBch K-B l 1 8
P-KN3 Q-KB4 1 9 Q-B5 and White stands much better) 1 7 RxBch
QxR 18 R-K l QxRch 1 9 QxQch B-K2 20 Q-K5 , and White's position
is superior .
15 R-K5
This represents an important gain of tempo which enables White to

double his Rooks along the K-file .
15 • • • Q-Q2 (forced)
16 QR-Kl B-K3
To protect his KB . Now the obvious 1 7 B-N5 is answered by

1 7 . . . B-Q3 , and after White retires his KR , Black can complete his
development by . . . P-KR3 , . . . P-KN4, and . . 0-0-0 .
.
17 N-N5!
Another very peculiar move , which gives Black new problems . Let
us study its consequences:
c
54 Game 3
I ) 1 7 . . . PxB 1 8 NxB PxN 1 9 RxP R-N2 (perhaps it would be

better to give back the Bishop by 1 9 . . . K-Q l or by 1 9 . . . R
N3 20 RxBch QxR 2 1 RxQch KxR 22 Q-N4ch, and White
captures a number of Pawns , but the struggle between a Queen and
two Rooks is never easy) 20 P-Q5 , another tricky move, the
recurring theme , for now Black' s Rook is en prise ;
l a) 20 . . . R-B2 2 1 P-Q6 , etc . ;
l b) 20 . . . K-B 1 2 1 QxRch ! KxQ 22 RxBch QxR 23 RxQch
K-B3 24 P-Q6 R-Ql 25 RxNP RxP, and White wins easily.
2) 17 . . . B-B3 (or l 7 . . . B-Q3) 1 8 NxB BxR 1 9 NxPch , etc .
3) 1 7 . . . BxN 1 8 BxB P-KR3 1 9 B-R4 P-KN4 20 B-N3 0-0-0
2 1 P-Q5 ! BxP 22 R-K7 and wins . If Black does not castle in this
last variation , his King stays in the middle of the board , and ,
despite the fact that there are Bishops of opposite colors , this will
lead to a certain win for White .
17 • • • 0-0-0
By far the best reply ! Black hopes for 1 8 NxB PxN 1 9 RxP B-B3 ! ,
after which he is certainly not bad off . As a matter of fact , he has a
slight advantage because he has a centralized KB and will win the QP .
Besides , White' s Bishop is still en prise .
18 NxBP!
Another surprising move .
18 • • • BxN
What else can he do?
I ) If 1 8 . . . B-B3 1 9 RxB QxN 20 B-B4 (threatening 2 1 RxPch

followed by mate) and now
l a) 20 . . . Q-Q2 2 1 R-Q6 Q-QB2 22 RxB ; or
l b) 20 . . . RxP 2 1 RxPch PxR 22 QxPch K-Q l 23 Q-R8ch
K-Q2 24 Q-N7ch K-Q l , and White has the choice between
winning his opponent ' s Queen and mating in two by 25 Q
N8ch K-Q2 26 Q-B7 mate .
Petroff Defense SS
2) 1 8 . . . PxB 1 9 RxB QR-K l 20 Q-K3 and wins .
19 RxB QxP
20 RxB
Better than first 20 QxQ RxQ, which would improve the position of
the Black QR . The fact that White now gets two isolated Pawns on the
Q-wing does not mean anything . White's Rook, which has penetrated
into the Black position , can more easily capture Black ' s QRP and
QNP than Black can capture White' s Pawns on a2 and c3 .
20 • • • QxQ
If 20 . . . PxB 2 1 Q-QN3 , and White has a greater advantage than

in the game , since he has the attack , and it is advantageous for him to
maintain the Queens on the board.
21 PxQ PxB
Now what is White going to do in the endgame? For the moment,

his QR cannot leave the l st rank . If he had already played P-KR3 , then
22 QR-K7 would be immediately decisive. In general , two Rooks on
one's 7th rank constitute an important trump. If White now plays 22
P-KR3 to threaten to double the Rooks on the 7th rank, Black simply
answers 22 . . . R-Q2 , and White' s advantage is considerably de
creased . Therefore , he must find a more active move.
22 R-Nl(!)
This poses new problems for Black , since advancing his QNP is out
56 Game 3
of the question, for then 23 RxQRP would demolish the entire Black
Q-wing .
Also possible would have been 22 RxRP, but then perhaps Black
would have obtained some counterchances by 22 . . . R-Q7 23 P
KR3 RxRP 24 QR-K7 R-N7 , and then Black's QRP could become
dangerous .
22 • • • R-N4
A good idea. Black hopes for 23 R/7xNP R-Q8ch ! 24 RxR KxR 25

R-Q7ch K-N3 26 RxKRP R-QR4 with some counterchances . Black' s
only hope i s to win White' s QRP to obtain a passed Pawn of his own ;
that would put White on the defensive and allow Black to cross
White' s plans with his own .
23 P-KR4!
This illustrates the slight disadvantage of Black' s last move . It is a

very strong reply, for it attacks the Black Rook and furnishes a
flight-square for the White King , so that R/ 1 xP becomes a real threat .
23 • • • R-N4
Forced; otherwise 24 R/ l xP follows.
24 RxR PxR
25 RxRP R-Q8ch
26 K-Rl R-Q7
27 RxRP
It's ' 'catch as catch can , ' ' which is often the case in R + P endings
when the Rook of each side has free access to the opponent ' s Pawns .
27 • • • RxRP
Black has finally attained what he wished: a passed Pawn far from
the field, which may distract White from his own plans .
The following moves show that White must play carefully to
promote the advance of his own passed Pawns and to prevent the too
rapid advance of the hostile passed Pawn .
Petroff Defense 57
28 P-RS
White relies on the force of his passed RP.
28 • • • RxP
29 R-R8ch K-B2
30 P-R6
White now threatens to queen by 3 1 P-R7 R-B2 32 R-B8ch.
30 • • •
Black removes his King from a square where it can be checked by

the Rook on c8 . This enables him to answer 3 1 P-R7 by 3 1 . . . R-B2.
Now it looks as if White could have won simply by 3 1 P-R7 R-B2
32 P-N4 P-R4 33 P-N5 ? , but in that case Black could draw :
33 . . . R-N2 ! 34 K-R3 RxP 35 K-R4 (if 35 R-R8 ? R-R4ch, winning
White' s RP) and either 35 . . . R-N2 36 K-R5 P-N5 37 PxP PxP 3 8
K-R6 RxPch 39 RxR P-N6 40 K-N5 , and White must be satisfied with
a draw , or 35 . . . R-N8 36 K-R5 P-N5 31 PxP PxP 38 R-KN8
R-R8ch 39 K-N6 P-N6 40 P-R8 = Q RxQ 4 1 RxR K-B4, and the game
is also a draw .
If after 3 1 P-R7 R-B2 32 P-N4 P-R4 White plays 33 K-R3 , the
game continues 33 . . . P-N5 34 PxP PxP 35 P-N5 R-N2 36 K-R4 P-N6
37 K-R5 P-N7 38 K-R6 P-N8 = Q , and White is lost .
31 K-R3
White unpins his NP so that it can advance and support the RP if

necessary . If Black should now reply 3 1 . . . R-B8 with the idea of
58 Game 3
32 . . . R-KR8 in order to tie down White 's KR to the protection of

his RP, then 32 K-N4 so that the King itself can go to the support of its
RP. The White Rook may be needed to stop the Black Pawns .
31 • • • P-R4
32 P-N4
Because of 32 . . . R-B2, 32 P-R7 is still insufficient.
32 • • • P-N5
33 Px:P Px:P
34 R-K8
In time ! The White Pawns can now take care of themselves , and the
White Rook is needed to stop the Black Pawn .
34 • • • R-B8
To get behind White' s passed Pawns .
35 K-N2 R-B2
36 P-N5 R-B4
If 36 . . . P-N6 , then 37 R-K3 decides .
37 P-R7
White can afford to sacrifice his NP .
37 • • • RxPch
38 K-B3 R-KR4
39 P-R8 = Q RxQ
40 RxR Resigns
Black's Pawn gets there too late . For instance , 40 . . . P-N6 4 1

K-K3 K-B4 4 2 K-Q3 K-N5 4 3 R-R8 , etc .
Petroff Defense 59
Black wa.s defeated because , having lost time in the 8 . .N-N5

.
line , he had to postpone castling . White took advantage of this in an

imaginative way ( 1 4 B-R6) and chose the right lines in the ensuing
complications .
In the instructive Rook endgame White did very well by advancing
his own Pawns without , however , losing sight of Black' s ever
advancing passed Pawn .
Game 4
The gambit
The King's Gambit and the Falkbeer Countergambit
The power of the White Knight on eS
Too passive a development
The importance of good defense when threatened by attack
The pawn storm against the unweakened King castled K-side
Getting the opponent's King into a mating net
The Attack against the Castled King

behind an Unweakened Pawn Structure
In games in which the opposing sides castle on different wings , it is
common for both sides to play for an attack against the opponent' s
castled King . The side that can launch a successful attack first has a
considerable advantage .
One of the most effective ways of attacking the King castled on the
K-side is to advance one's Pawns toward it . The purpose of this pawn
storm is to open a file along which to attack the defender's King . Since
the attacker' s King is castled on the Q-side , the pawn advance does not
weaken his K-position .
If one of the Pawns in front of the defender' s castled King has
advanced, it is much easier for the attacker to make contact and to
open the desired file . But if the defender' s Pawns are still on his KB2 ,
KN2 , and KR2 squares , then the problem i s much more difficult, for
as the attacker' s Pawns draw near the defender' s Pawns , the latter can
advance his Pawns in such a way as to close the position rather than
allow it to be opened .
Once the defender has closed the position , the only opportunity the
attacker has to open the file is by a piece sacrifice, with all the risks
that this entails . The attacker must then consider the various pos
sibilities at his disposal , and the defender must also take these pos
sibilities into account .
If the attacker cannot force the situation , the advanced Pawns may
60
Falkbeer Countergambit 61
become weak in the endgame . On the other hand , these Pawns may
restrict the movements of the defender' s King and lead to threats along
the attacker's 7th or Sth rank.
Fal kbeer Countergambit

Budapest 1 971-
Josef Farkas - Hungary Lajos Szell - Hungary

1 P-K4 P-K4
2 P-KB4
The King's Gambit .

A gambit is the offer of one or more Pawns in return for a more rapid
development . If the opponent accepts the gambit by taking the Pawn ,
the game becomes a struggle of time versus material . The player
offering the gambit gets a lead in development ; his opponent captures
one or more Pawns .
B y 2 P-KB4 White hopes through an exchange of Pawns to open his
KB-file . If he succeeds , the possibilities of developing a strong attack
against f7 are great . White will try to put his KB on c4 , his KN on e5 or
g5 , his Queen on f3 , and his KR on f1 . With normal resistance from
his opponent White will never be able to attain this position complete
ly , but he will strive for it .
If Black accepts the gambit by 2 . . PxP, White will also have the
.
possibility of eventually building a strong center by moves such as

P-Q4 .
2 • . • P-Q4
The Falkbeer Countergambit .

Instead of opening the KB-file by acceptipg the King 's Gambit or
by allowing White to open it later by PxKP, Black poses a problem for
White by this bold answer . If White replies 3 PxQP, as he usually
does , Black's 3 . . . P-K5 acts as a deterrent to White 's development,
and Black can win back his QP later . Moreover, White will not yet
have been able to accomplish his design of opening the KB-file .
For some time the Falkbeer Countergambit seemed so strong that it
was considered a kind of refutation of the King ' s Gambit. Nowadays
opinion has changed . In most cases the Falkbeer Countergambit leads
to equality . One of its main variations continues 3 PxQP P-K5 4 P-Q3
N-KB3 5 N-Q2 PxP 6 BxP NxP 7 Q-K2ch B-K2 with an even game .
62 Game 4
3 N-KB3
Instead of the usual 3 PxQP, White chooses another system in

which Black will still get a Pawn on e4 , but White then gets his KN on
the powerful outpost e5 .
3 • . . PxKP
4 N:xP
White now has a powerful Knight on e5 ; Black has a Pawn on e4

which restricts White's development but which has not prevented
White from developing his KN freely , as is the case in the 3 PxQP
P-K5 line .
4 . • • N-Q2
Black wants to eliminate White ' s strongly posted Knight as soon as

possible , even if he has to open the KB-file to do so .
Other possibilities :
1) 4 . . . P-KB3? 5 Q-R5ch P-N3 6 NxP, etc . ;

2) 4 . . . N-KB3 5 B-B4
2a) 5 . . N-Q4 ? 6 NxP KxN 7 Q-R5ch K-K3 8 Q-K5ch ,
.
etc . ;
2b) 5 . B-K3 6 BxB PxB 7 P-Q4 , and White has a good
. .
game ;
2c) 5 . . B-QB4 [see 4)] ;
.
3) 4 . . . B-Q3 5 Q-K2 Q-K2 6 QxP (a promising sacrifice) 6 . . .

P-KB3 7 P-Q4 PxN 8 BPxP with a strong attack for White ;
4) 4 . . . B-QB4 (an interesting gambit) 5 B-B4 N-KB3, and

now after both 6 BxPch K-K2 and 6 NxP Q-Q5 the situation is
very complicated (material against time) .
S P-Q4
White strengthens his center and his KN . But Black cannot allow
White this strong center , so he plays
s . . . PxP e.p.
Now
l) 6 BxP NxN 7 PxN Q-R5ch 8 P-N3 Q-N5 is favorable for

Black ;
2) 6 QxP NxN 7 QxQch KxQ 8 PxN B-K3 is also favorable for

Black, for White's KP must become weak .
So
6 NxQP
The game is now about equal .
6 . • • KN-B3
7 Q-B3
White 's Queen is rather active here . The disadvantage of playing

the Queen out early is , in general , that it can then be attacked by the
hostile Knights and Bishops , but here such attacks do not come into
the picture .
The Knight , although well placed at d3 irrthat it controls b4 and c5 ,
does hamper the development of the White KB .
White 's KBP could be the cause of a weakness in a positional game ,
for e4 is not adequately protected , and the KBP at f4 prevents White's
QB from attacking at once . Here, however, that KBP proves to be a
powerful first step in the pawn storm which will follow .
7 • • • B-K2
The best way for Black to build up a solid position would be by

64 Game 4
7 . . . N-N3 followed by 8 . . B-Q3 . This setup would also delay

.
White's castling long because of a possible . . . B-KN5 .
8 N-BJ 0-0
9 B-Q2
Both sides have developed pieces , Black has castled, and White is
about to castle . However , the White pieces are a little more actively
placed, and White's KB P will prove to be the good beginning of a
K-side attack .
9 • • • P-BJ(?)
A solid move played to deny White access to d5 . However, the

move loses a tempo , and that Black should not be careless with his
tempos in this position will be evident from what follows.
Black could have made a move with a threat and ought to have done
so . Therefore 9 . . . N-N3 , preventing White from castling because
of 10 . . B-KN5 , would have been preferable . White would then
.
have had to lose a tempo with 10 P-KR3 , and in this opening position a
tempo does count .
10 0-0-0
White is now almost ready for his K-side attack .
10 • • • Q-B2(?)
Black is playing too passively and thereby facilitates White's at

tacking chances . Even now 10 . . N-N3 would have been prefer
.
able , for among other things it threatens 1 1 . . . B-KN5 .

1 1 P-KN4!
The beginning of a remarkable and powerful pawn storm , unusual

because Black's K-wing has not been weakened by a pawn advance .
11 • • • P-QN4(?)
Black wants to counterattack against White' s castled King, but he

would do better to look to his own defense . The right move is still
1 1 . . . N-N3 , for then if 12 P-N5 KN-Q4, where that Knight would
be supported by the QN . Black should not answer 1 2 P-N5 by
1 2 . . . B-KN5 , for then 1 3 Q-N3 BxR 14 PxN, and White gets two
pieces for R + P .
1 2 P-NS
Not 1 2 NxP? PxN 1 3 QxR B-N2 1 4 QxP R-R l , and Black regains
the sacrificed material with advantage : 1 5 Q-N l BxR 1 6 QxB RxP 17
P-B 3 (forced) 1 7 . . . NxP .
12 • • • N-Q4
13 R-Nl
To support the KNP so as to be able to advance the KBP.

Not 1 3 NxN PxN 14 QxP because of 14 . . . B-N2 .
13 • • • N/2-N3
This frees Black's QB and strengthens his N/4 .
14 P-BS
The pawn storm continues . Now 1 5 P-B6 would be deadly . If , for

instance , 14 . . . B-Q3 1 5 P-B6 and 1) 1 5 . . . P-N3 , White could
continue either with 1 6 P-KR4 or 1 6 Q-B2 and 1 7 Q-R4; and 2) if
Black played anything else on his 1 5th move , then White could
continue with 1 6 PxP or 1 6 N-K4 followed by 1 7 PxP , etc .
Therefore, practically forced is
14 • • • P-B3
With 1 5 PxP White could open the KN-file for himself, but that
66 Game 4
would not accomplish much after 1 5 . . . BxP, for Black would be

able to defend, and the White pieces would not be well placed for a
vertical attack against the well-defended Black KNP .
Instead, White now gives Black the opportunity to close the posi
tion, since his own position is so strong that he can afford to break
open a Black closed position with a sacrifice .
15 P-N6
White is now threatening 1 6 PxPch KxP 1 7 Q-R5ch K-N l 1 8

RxPch KxR 1 9 B-R6ch and wins . Therefore , Black cannot allow
White to open his KR-file and plays
15 . . . P-KR3
Now White's attack seems to be stopped, but Black has to take into
consideration the sacrifice BxP PxB ; P-N7 ! followed by placing the
Queen on the KR-file , as happens later . White cannot afford to
sacrifice his Bishop immediately , for if 1 6 BxP PxB 1 7 P-N7 R-B2 1 8
Q-R5 B-Q3 1 9 QxP RxP 20 B-K2, and Black can defend himself with
20 . . . B-B l .
16 N-K4
Before attacking , one must put one's pieces on the best squares .
Moreover, White did not like the possibility of . . . NxN ; BxN,
which would deflect his QB from its proper diagonal .
16 . . . R-Ql?
Falk.beer Countergambit 67
Now White 's sacrifice will be decisive , since after the sacrifice 1 7
BxP and 1 8 P-N7 , Black' s Rook can no longer go t o f7 . Black should
have played 1 6 . . . B-Ql , giving added protection to Black' s 2d
rank .
17 BxP
White must not delay the sacrifice , for after a possible . . . B-B 1
the combination may be unsound . It will be unsound as soon as it is
impossible for White to play P-N7 and if Black's KRP is protected by
his Bishop .
17 • • • PxB
18 P-N7
White now threatens 1 9 Q-R5 , 20 QxRP, 2 1 Q-R8ch, and Black

has little possibility of defense .
18 • • • N-QBS
Hoping in two more moves to bring his Knight to f7 .
19 Q-RS N-Q3
20 NxN
Not 20 QxP because of 20 . . . N-B2, which defends against mate

68 Game 4
so th!lt the attack is momentarily stopped. Notice that the Knight

White brought to e4 on the 1 6th move has prevented Black 's N/3 from
going to the rescue on f7 .
20 • • • BxN
21 QxP
Note that because Black has a Rook on d8 , the simplifying 2 1

. . . B-B5ch does not work on account of 2 2 NxB QxNch 2 3 QxQ NxQ
24 Rx.Reh.
21 • . • BxBP
This threatens to simplify by 22 . . . B-B5ch, for now the Black

KR is protected by his QR and g8 is protected by both Black Rooks .
As long as it was protected by only one Rook , White could queen
successfully . Now he cannot .
But White still has the initiative and a number of open lines at his
disposal . He must find the right moves to get the Black King into a
mating net . With all his resources this should not be difficult .
22 Q-R8ch K-B2
23 Q·RSch
Notice how White takes advantage of the presence of Black ' s loose
Bishop. For that reason the Black King cannot return to g8 , for after 24
QxB White has a plus Pawn and a powerful position .
23 • • • K-K3
The only way to prevent the loss of the B/4 , for if Black lost it ,
White would have a won game .
24 R-Klch B-K4
The only move . If 24 . . . K-Q2 25 QxB mate .

25 QxBch! !
25 • • • K-Q3
If 25 . . KxQ , then 26 B-R3 mate .

.
26 Rx8 PxR
27 QxPch K-Ql
28 B-R3 mate
Black lost this game partly because he played too passively at the
beginning of the middle game . As a result , White ' s attack-a pawn
storm against an unweakened King's position-developed very rapid
ly and met with complete success when Black , at a certain point ,
failed to make the proper defense .
Game 5
General ideas behind the French Defense

The 3 • . • N-KB3 line of the Tarrasch Variation
Pawn chain technique
Advantage and dangers of the extended pawn chain
Demolishing the pawn chain
Playing against the uncastled King without Queens on the board
The Pawn Chain

As opposed to the opening and the endgame, the middle game is the
phase of chess about which it is most difficult to generalize or to give
specific rules because its positions are so numerous and so varied .
There are , however, certain types of middle game positions which
have been studied and which may often be handled by a standard type
of procedure .
One of these is the interlocking pawn chain , in which two or more

White and Black Pawns are in diagonal formation on adjacent
squares . The most advanced Pawn of the chain is known as its head or
spearhead; the least advanced is called the base of the pawn chain .
The usual way of trying to undermine the opponent's part of the
pawn chain is to attack the base of his chain with a Pawn . If the latter
wishes to maintain his pawn chain-as he usually does-he is forced
70
French Defense: Tarrasch Variation 71
to reinforce it by protecting its base with an adjacent Pawn . This gives

the attacker the option either of extending the pawn chain by pushing
his own Pawn forward or of exchanging Pawns at the base , in which
case that base may become weak and subject to attack .
Since it is usually desirable to break up an opponent ' s pawn chain, it
is sometimes also effective to attack the head of his pawn chain . In
such cases , the pawn chain will either be broken up if the other side
exchanges Pawns or if he reinforces it with one of his own Pawns , a
file may be opened which could lead to attacking possibilities .
Referring to the above diagram in which the interlocking pawn
chain consists of the White Pd4 + Pe5 and the Black Pd5 + Pe6 , what
follows illustrates the various types of moves which can be made
under pawn chain circumstances :
(a) 1 . . . P-QB4 attack on White's base d4

(b) 2 P-QB3 • . . strengthening of White's pawn
center
(c) 3 . . . P-BS extension of Black's pawn chain
(d) 3 • • • P-KB3 attack on White's spearhead eS
(e) 4 P-KB4 . . . strengthening of White's pawn
chain
(f) 4 PxKBP • . • breaking up the pawn chain
If , after White has strengthened his pawn chain by 4 P-KB4, it is

possible for Black to attack both the head at e5 by 4 . . . P-KB3 and
the adjacent base of the pawn chain at f4 by 5 . . . P-N4 , the whole
pawn chain may be broken up with good prospects for the attacker .
Pawn chains are normally found i n openings such as the French
Defense and the King's Indian , and in such openings the pawn-chain
technique described above is regularly employed .
French Defense - Tarrasch Variation

Team Match, Poland vs. EasJ Germany
Zacopaane, Poland 1 9 74 -
Jezzy Kostro Wolfgang Uhlmann

Poland East Germany
1 P-K4 P-K3
72 Game s
Instead of occupying the center by 1 . . P-K4 , Black p1ans to

.
al1ow White to build up his center by 2 P-Q4 and then to undermine it

by such moves as 2 . . . P-Q4 and , after preparation , by . . . P-QB4.
He also leaves to White the question of whether to advance his KP to
KS , to exchange it by PxP, or to retain tension in the center by N-QB3.
Each of these lines leads to a different type of game .
The French Defense is in reality a preparation for an attack against
White ' s center . Sometimes it can lead to a strong counterattack
against the White position , but often it results in a cramped position
for Black and especial1y in an inadequately protected K-side .
2 P-Q4 P-Q4
Now White could reply 3 N-QB3 (the Classical Line) , 3 PxP (the
Exchange Variation) , or 3 P-K5 pushing his Pawn , but instead he
replies
3 N-Q2
The Tarrasch Variation . This move has become more usual than the
Classical 3 N-QB3 because when the latter is answered by 3 . . . B
N5 (the Winawer Variation), White does not have sufficient pos
sibilities to play for a win . On the other hand, White has more
opportunities after 3 N-QB3 N-KB3 4 B-KN5 B-K2 5 P-K5 .
White ' s advantage in the Tarrasch Variation is that although his QN
is still directed toward the center as far as White' s KP is concerned , the
possibility of Black ' s pinning the White Knight by 3 . . . B-N5 is
avoided . One of its disadvantages is that his QN is not directed against
Black' s QP, which makes it possible for Black to play 3 . . . P-QB4
advantageously at once .
Usual1y Black now answers 3 . . . P-QB4, and for a long time this
was considered the strongest reply . But this reply simplifies after 4
PxQP KPxP 5 KN-B3 N-QB3 6 B-N5 B-Q3 7 PxP BxP 8 N-N3 B-Q3
9 0-0 KN-K2 , and although Black has an isolated QP , his develop
ment is quite an right , and many games , especial1y in the Karpov
Korchnoi match in 1974, have proved that it is difficult , if not
impossible , for White to get an advantage in it .
On the other hand , Black also has only drawing chances . Therefore
3 . . . N-KB3
This variation is not inferior and affords Black more opportunities

to struggle. It immediately poses a problem for White , whose KP is
attacked. On the other hand, it is a more difficult variation for Black to
handle .
The game could now continue 4 B-Q3 P-B4 and
1) 5 KPxP, which is doubtful because of 5 . . . QxP, attacking

White's QP and KNP simultaneously ; or
2) 5 P-K5 KN-Q2 6 P-QB 3 , which results in almost the same
position as in the game.
Or White could play 4 PxP, which leads to the Exchange Variation

of the French (usually arising after 1 P-K4 P-K3 2 P-Q4 P-Q4 3 PxP
PxP) , which often results in an early draw .
But this game continues
4 P-KS KN-Q2
5 P-KB4
,.
White wishes to give additional support to his advanced KP, and he

is apparently very eager to maintain his advanced pawn chain . In
many variations of the French Defense White ' s advanced KP is
attacked by . . P-KB3 and in most cases the White KP disappears , a
consequence of which may be that Black will get good
counterchances .
White seems to consider having an advanced pawn chain very
important , and, in this game , consistent with his idea , he tries to
maintain his spearhead on e5 . Whether this is good or bad is difficult
to say . Eventual attack on e5 , the spearhead of White' s pawn chain ,
74 Game s
by . . . P-KB3 does not accomplish anything if Black cannot follow

up with . . . P-KN4 , thus trying to demolish the whole White pawn
chain . This will be illustrated later in the game .
The normal continuation at this point is 5 B-Q3 P-QB4 6 P-QB3
N-QB 3 7 N-K2 .
5 • . . P-QB4
The usual way to attack the base of an interlocking pawn chain . By

continuing . . . PxP , Black now has the possibility of opening the
QB-file as an avenue of attack whenever he · wishes .
Attacking not only the base of a pawn chain but also attacking its
head (in this case e5) is often useful for breaking up the opponent' s
pawn chain . But in this game Black should not attack White' s
spearhead a t e5 too early because then after a move like 6 B-Q3 White
threatens 7 Q-R5ch .
It is interesting to note that long before the hypermoderns the idea of
first allowing White to build up a center and then undermining it was
developed in the French Defense . However , in the French the idea of
bringing pressure against the center from afar by fianchettoed Bishops
is not normally found, and therein the French Defense differs from the
Indian defenses .
6 P-B3
White supports his QP, and so Black could now play 6 . . P-B5 ,
.
extending the pawn chain and making c 3 White ' s new base . However,
then the center is completely closed , which may give White an
opportunity to intensify his play on the K-side .
Or Black could open the QB-file by 6 . . PxP , but there is nothing
.
in particular to be gained by it. So instead he increases the pressure on

d4 by
6 . . . N-QB3
Black develops his QN to its most effective square and is now

attacking White' s QP twice , so that the Pawn must be defended once
more or be exchanged .
The normal way to defend it would be by 7 KN-B3 , but experience
has shown that developing the Knights in this way does not contribute
most effectively to White' s mobility . Rather , the KN should be
developed to e2 so that the QN has the choice of going to b3 or f3 now
or later . However, for attacking purposes QN-B3 is preferable . In

order to protect his QP without shutting in his KB , White plays in
accordance with the general strategy .
7 QN-B3 B-K2
According to current opinion , 7 . . . Q-R4 (which Black will play

on his next move) should be played at this point . In accordance with
White ' s concept, the White King would have to go to f2 after
7 . . . Q-R4 . But Black postpones . . . Q-R4 until his 8th move , and
at that point the White King need not go to f2 but should instead go to
f 1 , which the White KB will have vacated in the meantime . Explana
tions follow Black' s 1 0 . . . P-B3 .
8 B-Q3
The normal attack square for White' s KB . From here it is directed

against Black' s K-side and in particular against h7 . In due time White
can develop his KN to e2 , where it will furnish additional support to
his QP .
8 • • • Q-R4
Threatening 8 . . . PxP and even 8 . . . NxQP.

If White now protects his QP by 9 N-K2 , there may follow 9 . . .
PxP 1 0 KNxP, when the idea behind Black' s 8th move becomes clear
and the p�wn chain has been weakened . Black can , for instance ,
continue by 1 0 . . . NxN 1 1 NxN N-B4 1 2 B-B2 Q-R3 .
9 K-B2(?)
76 Game s
White gets his King off the a5/e I diagonal just to maintain his pawn
chain at its full strength . So far this is consistent , but 9 K-B l would
have been better , for the King is more exposed on f2, as we shall see .
According to Uhlmann' s notes Black would then have followed a
completely different line : 9 . . . P-QN4 followed by 1 0 . . . P-N5 ,
attacking the pawn chain from the other end .
On the other hand, 9 B-Q2 to break the indirect diagonal attack on
the White King is not good because of 9 . . . Q-N3 , attacking White' s
Pawns a t b2 and d4 simultaneously .
The reader may wonder why White does not mind giving · up
castling . The function of castling is to put the King in a safe spot and to
develop the Rook . If the King can go to a safe square without castling ,
this may be just as good as castling . We'll see that on the KB-file the
White King is eventually exposed to some dangers . They are not too
serious , and by continuing properly White could have avoided them .
9 • . . Q-N3
Black attacks White' s QP a third time .
10 N-K2 P-B3
Black attacks the spearhead of the pawn chain , which is the more
appropriate now because the White King is on the KB-file . Another
disadvantage of the position of the White King is that White's QP is
pinned , so that Black threatens I I . . . PxQP, and if 1 2 BPxP PxP 1 3
PxP KNxP 1 4 NxN NxN, winning a Pawn ; if 1 2 N/2xP PxP, etc . , and
the White KP is also lost .
We now see the difference between the King's being on f2 or f l . If
White had played 9 K-B l instead of 9 K-B2, the threat of
I I . . . PxQP followed by 12 . . . PxKP, winning a Pawn , would
not exist , and White could continue by 1 1 P-KN3 and 1 2 K-N2 .
1 1 Q-N3
This is perhaps the only move which will parry Black ' s threat . After
the exchange of Queens the direct attack against White' s KP is over .
White could not have played 1 1 PxKBP, for after 1 1 . . . BxP the
pressure against White 's QP is increased ; in addition, with 1 1 PxKBP
White would have given up his original idea of maintaining the
advanced pawn chain .
For the same reason White does not play 1 1 Q-B2 with the continua
tion 1 1 . . . PxQP 1 2 N/2xP ( 1 2 PxQP does not work because of
1 2 . . . N-N5) 1 2 . . . PxP 1 3 PxP N/2xP 1 4 BxP NxN/6 1 5 PxN
NxN , and White can keep Black from castling by giving a check on
g6 . Nonetheless, Black' s chances in this wild variation are best, for
the White King is more vulnerable than the Black one .
11 • . • QxQ
Black has confidence in his possibilities in the endgame .
12 PxQ PxQP
13 PxQP
White now has a doubled isolated Pawn, but practical play indicates
that in many cases the open R-file is adequate compensation .
Also, after 1 3 N/2xP (attacking Black 's KP) 1 3 . . . N-B4 1 4
B-B2 PxP 1 5 PxP O-O (threatening both 1 6 . . . NxKP and 1 6 . . . N
K5ch) 1 6 R-K1 NxN 1 7 PxN N-R3 Black has somewhat the best of it .
13 • • • 0-0
Before going into action Black first mobilizes his KR .
14 B-Q2?
To develop his Bishop and to be prepared for defense . Correct was

1 4 P-R4 in order not to allow Black ' s next move , which really breaks
up the �awn chain and throws White' s position into disarray .
14 • • . P-KN4!
78 Game s
An optimal attack against what is left of White' s pawn chain .

After 1 5 PxNP there would follow 1 5 . . . PxKP with clear
superiority for Black . We see here how the unfavorable position of
White' s King has promoted the success of Black ' s maneuvers .
Black also attains superiority if White should try to maintain his
pawn chain by 1 5 P-N3 . Black answers 1 5 . . . P-N5 , and now 1 ) 1 6
N-R4 PxP 1 7 PxP N/2xP, winning a Pawn ; 2 ) 1 6 PxP BxP 1 7 N-R4
( 1 7 N-K5 BxN 1 8 PxB N/2xP) 1 7 . . . NxP, also winning a Pawn .
The text involves an eventual pawn sacrifice .
15 .PxBP BxP
16 PxP B-N2
Black could . have recaptured the Pawn immediately by

1 6 . . . BxPch 1 7 NxB NxN , but he rightly preferred to keep his
Bishop since he was convinced that he would recapture his Pawn
under better circumstances in the long run because of the possibility of
advancing in the center . Again we see how unfavorably situated the
White King is on a semiopen file . Moreover , according to Uhlmann' s
analysis White stands better after ( 1 6 . . . BxPch 1 7 NxB NxN) 1 8
B -N4 R-B2 1 9 P-N6 PxP 20 BxP R-B3 2 1 B-B3 P-K4 22 BxN PxB 23
B-B2 N-B4 24 KR-Q l .
17 B-B3
Directed against the advance of Black ' s center Pawns, but his
gesture is futile .
17 • . • P-K4
This is in accordance with Black 's strategic plan to open up the

center in order to take maximum advantage of the badly placed White
King .
18 PxP
Forced , for otherwise 1 8 . . . P-K5 wins a piece for Black both by

the Bishop-Knight fork and by the Knight pin .
18 . • • N/2xP
If now 1 9 B-B2 , then 1 9 . . . B-N5 , and in order to protect his KN

White must play 20 N-N l , shutting in his KR .
19 KR-Ql
At the same time protecting his Bishop and getting his KR into play
before N/2-N l becomes necessary .
19 • • • B-NS
The beginning of the attack on the Knight , which is a buffer for the
White King .
20 N-Nl P-QS.
With White' s Knight pinned by both Bishop and Rook , Black can
now advance his center Pawn to restrict White ' s activity even more .
21 B-Kl
It does not matter whether the Bishop first goes to R5 , after which
2 1 . . . P-N3 would drive it back to K l .
21 • • • NxBch
22 RxN N-K4
Notice how Black has strengthened his attack by this exchange .

White' s Rook cannot remain on its 3d rank . Neither can White answer
23 RxP , for then 23 . . . NxN, attacking the Rook with both Knight
and Bishop, wins either the Exchange or a piece .
23 R-Q2 R-84
80 Game s
This move serves two purposes : to enable Black to double the

Rooks and to capture White's advanced KNP, each at the proper time .
24 P-R3?
To force Black ' s QB to a decision . It also keeps the Black Knight

from going to g4 , but this is only incidental .
After 24 P-R4 ! QR-KB 1 25 RxRP B xN 26 NxB NxN 27 PxN
RxPch 28 K-N2 RxP Black will probably win due to the greater
activity of his Rooks and the possession of a passed Pawn . But he
would have had more trouble in winning than after the text .
After 24 P-R3 ? things go more easily for Black .
24 • • • BxN
25 NxB P-QR3
Black is not in a hurry . Before continuing the attack he protects his

QRP .
26 K-K2
It is understandable that White wishes to get out from under the

annoying pin . He moves his King to e2 because his Knight must be
protected by two pieces . It would have been a little better to play 26
K-N3 , but after 26 . . . NxN 27 PxN RxNPch Black also stands
better .
26 • • . NxN
To win back his Pawn and to give White a still less favorable pawn
configuration .
27 PxN R-Klch
28 K-Ql
After 28 K-B2 Black has the choice between capturing the KNP and
playing 28 . . . R-K6.
28 • • • RxBP
29 P-R4
Now 29 . . . RxNP would be too meager a reward for all of Black's

activities . After 30 K-B2 R-KR6 31 R-Q3 White can stop Black's
further advance .
29 • • • P-Q6
With the text Black threatens to win immediately by 30 . . . R-B8.
30 R-KR2
To make room for the King on the 2d rank . But 30 R-KB2 would not
do because of 30 . . . RxR 3 1 BxR R-K7 .
30 • • • R-B8
31 K-Q2 BxP
32 R-R2
82 Game s
If 32 R-N l B-R6 (threatening 33 . . . B-N5ch) 33 P-N4 R/8xB ! 34

RxR BxPch .
32 • • • B-K4
33 R-KB2 B-BSch
34 Resigns
For if 34 RxB (giving up the Exchange) 34 . . . RxR, and if 34 KxP

R/ l xB . In both cases Black' s material advantage is amply sufficient
for the win .
White set for himself an ambitious goal of maintaining a strong but

vulnerable advanced pawn chain; this gave him on the one hand a
promising development , on the other the obligation to fight against
Black' s attempts to break up his pawn structure . When White failed to
prevent the most dangerous Black move aimed at destroying his pawn
formation , Black emerged with an advantageous endgame position
which, thanks to his ingenious moves , he turned into a won ending .
Game 6
The ideas behind the Alekhine Defense

The pawn salient
A Knight sacrifice to take advantage of the weakness of the diagonal
The problem of a safe retreat for the Knight
The King exposed to the combined attack of the Queen and the Rook
Maintaining the balance through exchanges
The Pawn Salient
Another pawn formation which requires a special type of play is the

pawn salient . This formation is in reality an interlocking pawn chain in
which one side (White in the diagram) has two spearheads (Pc5 , Pe5)
and one base (Pd4) and the other (Black in t'he diagram) two bases
(Pc6, Pe6) and one spearhead (Pd5) .
The side whose salient has two spearheads will try to advance the
Pawns adjacent to his spearheads (in the diagram White will try to
advance his QNP and his KBP) in order to attack the bases of his
opponent' s salient. The side whose salient has two bases will attempt
to attack the spearheads of his opponent' s salient (in the diagram
Black will try to attack with his QNP and his KBP) since the base of
White's salient cannot be attacked .
Sometimes the side with the salient having two spearheads has
83
84 Game 6
doubled Pawns in a file adjacent to the opposing spearhead; in this

situation , too, the salient can be attacked . For example, if White in the
diagram had a second and less advanced Pawn on either his QB- or
K-file , he could advance it in such a way as to attack the spearhead of
Black's salient at d5 .
In still other cases , where neither the base nor the spearhead of the
salient can be attacked by Pawns , the player can sometimes try to
break up his opponent' s pawn salient by tactical means , that is , by the
timely and adequately compensated sacrifice of a piece.
Alekhine Defense
World Championship Match, Game 1 9
Reykjavik, Iceland 1 972 -
Boris Spassky - USSR Robert Fischer - USA

1 P-K4 N-KB3
As in the French and Caro-Kann defenses , Black does not occupy

his K4-square with a Pawn in the Alekhine Defense ; rather he leaves
White the option of deciding what to do about the center , that is ,
whether or not to continue 2 P-KS . In the Alekhine Defense the Black
KN attacks the White KP directly , but by 2 P-KS White can drive
away the Black Knight and build up a strong center .
Alekhine first played this defense at a time when the occupation of
the center with Pawns was considered all important , and the fact that
with 2 P-KS White could drive the Black Knight away caused other
masters of that time to take this defense very lightly and not to consider
it seriously . Later these masters began to realize that the resultant
White pawn center can often become vulnerable and can constitute a
welcome target of attack for Black . This is also the case in certain
other modern openings , especially in some variations of the Griinfeld
Defense and of the King's Indian , which begin with a QP open
ing .
2 P-KS
The usual continuation , which will lead to the type of center

described above . If White plays 2 N-QB3 instead , Black has the
choice of returning to classical lines by playing 2 . . P-K4 (the
.
Vienna Opening) or he can play 2 . P-Q4 .

. .
Alekhine Defense 85
2 • • . N-Q4
3 P-Q4
White occupies the center and opens lines for piece development .
3 . . . P-Q3
Black develops an immediate attack against White ' s center-and in

this defense the sooner he does so the better . His further plans will
depend on White ' s reaction to the text.
If Black should fail to do this and play , for instance , 3 . . . N-QB 3 ,
then Black would get into difficulties after 4 P-QB4 N-N3(?) 5 P-Q5
NxKP 6 P-B5 N/3-B5 7 Q-Q4 P-QN4 8 PxP e . p . B -R3 9 P-QN3 and
wins one of the Knights . If 3 . . . P-K3 4 P-QB4 N-N3 5 P-B4 P-Q3 6
N-QB 3 , Black has shut out his QB , which is often very effective on f5 .
Thus White has been able to build up a broader and stronger center
with P-KB4 soon to be followed by N-KB 3 , against which Black will
scarcely be able to play successfully . Compare this comment to the
second paragraph under White 's next move .
4 N-KB3
White strengthens his center to support the attacked KP so that if the

game continued 4 . . . PxP 5 NxP, White' s Knight would have an
excellent outpost at e5 . The Knight cannot be driven back by 5 . . . P
KB3 because of 6 Q-R5ch; Black cannot answer 5 . . . N-Q2 because
of 6 NxP KxN 7 Q-R5ch K-K3 8 P-QB4, and Black has nothing better
than to return the piece , for after 8 . . . N/4-B3 9 P-Q5ch K-Q3 1 0
B-B4ch K-B4 1 1 P-N4ch KxP 1 2 Q-B 3 , etc .
D
86 Game 6
The game could also continue 4 P-QB4 N-N3 5 P-B4 PxP 6 BPxP
N-B3 7 B-K3 (not 7 N-KB3 because of 7 . . . B-N5) 7 . . . B-B4 8
N-QB3 P-K3 . This variation has advantages and disadvantages which
counterbalance each other . Again , compare with the last paragraph of
the comment on Black 's previous move .
4 • • • B-NS
The normal reply. Black prepares to play . . . PxP after which

White will have to retake with his Pawn , which may then become
weak . This move constitutes a second unit of pressure against White ' s
KP .
In Game 1 3 of the same match , Fischer played 4 . . . P-KN3 . But
after 5 B-QB4 N-N3 6 B-N3 B-N2 . White can launch a promising
initiative by 7 N-N5 , and if 7 . . . 0-0 8 P-K6 . In that game Spassky
replied 7 QN-Q2 and did not get any special advantage out of the
opening .
5 B-Kl
In order to be able to answer 5 . . . PxP by 6 NxP .
5 • • • P-K3
All according to the theoretical line .

Black could have tried to saddle his opponent with a vulnerable
Pawn on e5 by 5 . . . BxN 6 BxB PxP. However, in this position
White can continue with 7 P-B4, winning the Exchange (7 . . . N-N3
8 BxP) . In general , it is doubtful whether Black' s exchange of a
Bishop for a Knight would give him concrete results . He loses the
minor exchange and brings White ' s Bishop to a better square .
6 0-0 B-Kl
Sometimes Black develops his QN at this move or soon after. With

6 . . . N-QB3 Black threatens 7 . . . BxN, winning a Pawn . Be
cause this Knight move is postponed , White is not obliged to exchange
Pawns at d6 at this time ; that this makes some difference in the
continuation becomes clear after Black ' s l Oth move and is explained
there .
With 6 . . . N-QB3 Black can force his opponent to simplify more
Alekhine Defense 87
rapidly in the center , but this is not to his advantage ; e . g . , 7 P-B4

N-N3 8 PxP PxP 9 N-B 3 B-K2 10 P-Q5 ! PxP 1 1 NxP, which will lead
to a better game for White . It would be risky for Black to play for the
win of a Pawn by 1 1 . . . BxN 1 2 BxB NxP, for White recaptures the
sacrificed Pawn with a better position by 1 3 R-K l 0-0 1 4 NxBch NxN
1 5 BxP R-N l 1 6 B-B3 and Black has a weak Pawn , whereas White
has the Bishop pair. At this point Black cannot continue
1 6 . . . NxP ? , for he loses a piece after 1 7 Q-K2 , attacking both
Knights .
7 P-KR3
Usually this move is played at a later stage of the game , but it seems
to be quite playable here also , since 7 . . . BxN 8 BxB N-QB3 (again
not 8 . . . PxP because of 9 P-B4 N-N3 10 BxP, etc . ) leads to an
excellent position for White after 9 P-B4 N-N3 1 0 PxP PxP 1 1 P-QN3 .
This move is made now because in such positions if Black does not
exchange , in general White will later have the possibility of eliminat
ing the pin by P-KN4 .
7 • • • B-R4
8 P-B4
This move has to be played sooner or later in order to extend the

center and to make it more useful . But now White' s QBP may become
more vulnerable .
8 • . . N-N3
9 N-B3
White maintains the tension in the cente�. but by so doing he

enables Black to win a Pawn .
At this point most games continue 9 PxP PxP 1 0 N-B 3 , for it is
easier for White not to be faced with the continual possibility
of . . . PxP; PxP QxQ or . . . PxP; NxP BxB ; QxB QxP.
9 . . • 0-0
The plausible alternative 9 . . . BxN 1 0 BxB NxP fails against

both 1 1 Q-R4ch and 1 1 BxP . Furthermore , it should be noted that
9 . . PxP I 0 NxP BxB I I QxB QxP is very risky on account of I 2
.
88 Game 6
R-Q l Q-B4 1 3 P-QN4 QxNP 1 4 N-N5 N-R3 (if 1 4 . . . B-Ql then 1 5

RxBch , etc . ) 1 5 B-R3 Q-R4 1 6 BxB KxB 1 7 Q-N4 with all sorts of
threats . White has ample compensation for the sacrificed material .
10 B-K3
A developing move which centralizes and at the same time prevents

the above-mentioned 9 . . . PxP combination because now White ' s
Q P i s protected .
10 • • • P-Q4
If instead 1 0 . . . N-B3 , then after l l PxP PxP 1 2 P-Q5 positions
similar to those in the comments under Black' s 6th move would come
about. Some possibilities :
1 ) 1 2 . . . PxP 1 3 NxP BxN (playing for the win of a Pawn , but

this is not correct) 1 4 BxN ! BxB ? (after 1 4 . . . PxB 1 5 BxB
White also stands better) 1 5 BxQ BxQ 1 6 BxB ! , and White wins
the Exchange : 1 6 . . . B -K7 1 7 KR-K l or 16 . . . KR-K l 1 7
QRxB NxB 1 8 N-B7 .
2) 1 2 . . . BxN 1 3 BxB
2a) 1 3 . . . PxP 1 4 BxP NxB 1 5 NxN with some advantage
to White ;
2b) 1 3 . . . N-K4 1 4 PxP PxP 1 5 B-N4 ! (much better than l 5
BxP , after which 1 5 . . . R-N l recaptures the Pawn with a
satisfactory position) . In the final position , White stands a
little better .
Alekhine Defense 89
Our conclusion is that with 10 . . . N-B3 Black could not have

obtained complete equality . The same is the case after 10 . . . QN
Q2 1 1 PxP PxP 1 2 P-QN3 with a clear preponderance in space for
White . Fischer' s continuation , also possible , leads to great
complications.
However the text is not without risk , as is shown by what follows .
1 1 P-BS
To gain terrain and to put Black' s Knight into a bad position . If

White had prepared this advance by first playing l l P-KN4 B-N3 1 2
P-B5 N-B5 1 3 BxN PxB , the advanced and separated B P would have
gotten help from its QB .
To be considered was 1 1 P-QN3 , but apparently White was of the
opinion that Black could not afford . . . N-B5 .
After 1 1 P-B5 an immediate 1 1 . . . N-B5 would lose a Pawn after
1 2 BxN PxB 1 3 Q-K2. Black therefore inserts
11 • • • BxN
To make 1 2 . . . N-B5 possible . If now 1 2 PxN BxB 1 3 PxBP QxP

14 QxB , chances are equal .
It is always necessary to calculate all possible moves in advance,
especially when there is a series of take and retake moves and many
pieces en prise . One has to continue the analysis to the point where no
more pieces can be exchanged .
12 BxB N-BS
It is better to play the Knight here where it commands greater space

than to retire it to c8 which would cramp the Black position .
13 P-QN3
White does not wish to leave the Black Knight in this commanding
position, and he does not mind if Black answers 1 3 . . . NxB , for
then after 14 PxN he gets the open KB-file.
After 1 3 B-B 1 Black gets a good game with 1 3 . . . P-QN3 , for if
14 P-QN4 P-QR4, and White has no time to take advantage of the
vulnerable position of Black' s Knight . To be considered is 1 3 P-QN4
90 Game 6
P-QN3 1 4 R-B l with the pretty threat 1 5 NxP ! PxN 1 6 RxN, which
Black parries however by 14 . . . P-QB3 and maintains equality .
13 • • • NxB
14 PxN
A pawn salient (Pc5-Pd4-Pe5) has arisen on the board, and Black

has to consider how to deal with it . It has two spearheads , one at c5 ,
the other at e5 . These spearheads give White a considerable prepon
derance in space , and Black should therefore attack one of them
immediately . The question is : Should he attack c5 or e5 ?
14 . • • P-QN3
The disadvantage of this move for Black is that the a8/h 1 diagonal is
partially opened , but the continuation of the game will show that
despite the inconveniences this will cause him , he can hold his own in
practically all variations .
It would be safer to attack the e5 spearhead, perhaps by first
preparing the attack with 14 . . . N-B3 . For instance :
1 ) 1 4 . . . P-KB3
l a) 1 5 P-K4 PxP/5 1 6 BxP N-B3 1 7 BxN (practically forced
because White cannot protect d4---if 1 7 N-K2? NxQP! , etc . )
17 . . . PxB 1 8 Q-N4 P-B4, and i n spite o f Black's doubled
Pawns his chances are certainly as good as White' s , for the
latter' s QP is weak and his Knight has no good way of
becoming active;
lb) 15 B-N4 Q-Q2 (after 15 . . . P-B4 16 B-K2 White has a
freer game) 1 6 PxP BxP 1 7 P-N4 with slight superiority for
White .
2) 1 4 . . . N-B 3 ! (to prevent the 1 5 P-K4 defense) 1 5 R-N l (so
as to be able to play P-QN4) 15 . . . P-B3 16 PxP BxP 17 P-QN4,
and White ' s advantage , if any , is minimal . If after 17 . . . P-QR3
1 8 P-QR4, White should succeed in driving away Black's QN by
19 P-N5 , this Knight will find a good square on c4 after . . . Px
NP; PxNP N-R4.
15 P-K4!
Alekhine Defense 91
A very strong reply which accentuates the weakness of Black' s

14 . . . P-QN3 b y pressing along the diagonal a t the end of which
Black' s QR is stationed .
15 . • . P-QB3
Black must protect his QP , and with this move Black creates an
interlocking pair of pawn chains.
Not 15 . . . PxBP because of 1 6 PxQP BPxP 17 PxP (stronger than
1 7 P-Q6 PxP 1 8 BxR PxN , and the situation is unclear) 1 7 . . . P
QB3 ( 1 7 . . . PxN? 1 8 BxR) 1 8 PxPch RxP 19 N-K4 with clear
superiority for White .
16 P-QN4
The logical move to support White's QBP. White also plans to

follow up with P-N5 , undermining Black ' s pawn formation and taking
away the protection from Black' s QP . There is an attack against both
the base and the head of Black' s pawn chain .
16 • . . PxBP
Black makes this exchange to avoid a possible P-N5 and to open up

the possibility of . . . Q-R4 .
If 1 6 . . . P-QR4 , which is more consistent with the type of play
recommended by the pawn chain theory, White would simply answer
1 7 P-R3 , and the situation would not have changed .
17 NPxP Q-R4
Black now counterattacks because he feels that if he fails to do so ,

White will develop a strong pressure position which would inhibit
Black from developing freely . The disadvantage of the text is that
White can now make a very promising sacrifice .
Another possibility is 1 7 . . B-N4 1 8 Q-R4 Q-B2 19 K-Rl , but
.
then it is White who determines the course of affairs .
18 NxP!
92 Game 6
A brilliant sacrifice which Black cannot afford to accept :
1 ) 1 8 . . . KPxN 1 9 PxP and White gets at least the Exchange or

a third Pawn for the sacrificed Knight, and so one must conclude
that acceptance would have led to Black' s defeat ;
l a) 1 9 . . . PxP 20 BxP N-Q2 2 1 BxR RxB 22 RxP! KxR 23
Q-B3ch , and White has material superiority ;
l b) 1 9 . . . N-R3 20 P-Q6 B-N4 2 1 BxP, and the connected
passed Pawns will soon prove their force .
2) 1 8 . . . BPxN 1 9 PxP N-Q2 20 P-Q6 B-N4 2 1 BxR RxB 22
RxP, etc .
Since Black cannot accept the sacrifice , White would seem to win a
Pawn by the combination . However , a new element enters into the
picture : Can the Knight return safely? If White had a Pawn at a3
instead of a2 , there would be no problem in this regard .
18 . . . B-N4!
Black refuses the sacrifice but now controls e3 and f4 and thus
eliminates the possibility of the Knight' s returning safely . This may
enable him to accept White's proffered sacrifice at a more favorable
time .
If White ' s Pawn were on a3 (a seemingly unimportant detail) , his
Alekhine Defense 93
Knight could go to b4, and with his sound plus Pawn White would
have practically a winning position . As the situation now stands ,
White has to seek other ways of providing a safe retreat for his Knight ;
and although even after the text Black cannot afford to accept the
sacrifice of a piece, White' s task is not very simple here . Some
possibilities :
1 ) 1 9 Q-Q3(?) (attempting to save the Knight by 20 N-K3 , after

which White has a sound plus Pawn) 19 . . . N-R3 !
( 1 9 . . . BPxN 20 PxP still does not work out satisfactorily for
Black , but after the Knight makes room for the QR by 1 9
. . . N-R3 , Black threatens t o accept the sacrifice) 2 0 N-K3 QR-Q 1
(threatening both White' s QP and QBP) 2 1 N-B4 QxBP
22 N-Q6 N-N5 , and Black stands better after 23 Q-Q l B-K6ch .
2) 1 9 Q-K2(?) N-R3 20 N-K3 Q-B6 2 1 N-B2 N-N5 22 NxN
QxQPch, and Black stands better .
3) 1 9 Q-K l ( ?) Q-Q l (threatening to win the Knight) 20 N moves
away, and Black wins the QP.
4) 1 9 P-KR4 BxP 20 N-B4 followed by 2 1 N-K2 , and at the cost of
one Pawn White can withdraw his Knight safely . This variation
seems to lead to equality .
5) 1 9 P-R3 (in order to withdraw the Knight via b4) 19 . . . N
R3 ! 20 N-N4 (the only move) 20 . . . NxN 2 1 PxN QxNP, and
Black stands better for White's QP is very weak .
6) 1 9 P-N3 N-R3 20 N-B4 QR-Q l (threatening to titke White's
QBP with his Knight) 2 1 R-B l Q-N5 (less risky and better than
2 1 . . . QxRP) , and Black regains the Pawn with an overwhelm
ing position .
From all this , White concludes that he cannot safely retreat his
Knight (or cannot be sure of being able to retreat his Knight safely) , so
he must continue his attack at any cost. He does find a very strong
attacking continuation .
19 B-RS!
Now White has new threats , beginning with the sacrifice on f7 :

94 Game 6
20 BxPch RxB 2 1 RxR KxR 22 Q-R5ch, with an irresistible attack.

This threatened sacrifice is possible because Black ' s Bishop is loose .
The situation has now become very complicated. Since White has
taken his Bishop from the h l /a8 diagonal , Black is able to accept the
sacrifice of the White Knight and is, in fact, forced to do so , because
then he has e3 at his disposal .
19 • • • BPxN
Black cannot play 19 . . . P-N3 because of 20 N-B6ch , and if

Black accepts the sacrifice , White will have an all-out attack :
I ) 20 . . . BxN 2 1 PxB PxB 22 QxP K-R l 23 R-B4, with a

mating attack ;
2) 20 . . . K-R 1 2 1 B-K2 (in this way White has temporarily
maintained his plus Pawn) 21 . . . B-K6ch 22 K-R l Q-N5 23
P-Q5 ! QxBP 24 PxKP QxP 25 N-N4 and wins . This last variation
is not forced on the part of either side but shows how White can
under some circumstances use his attacking chances .
After the text a new situation has arisen , and it is very important to
keep the material relationships in mind . White has a plus Pawn , but he
is a piece down .
20 BxPch
Alekhine Defense 95
It is tempting to precede this sacrifice by 20 Px.P, for after

20 . . . PxP, the sacrifice is much more effective than in the game :
after 2 1 BxPch RxB 22 RxR Q-Q7 23 Q-N4 protects the QP and then
after 23 . . . KxR 24 R-B l ch K-K2 25 Q-B5 is decisive . However ,
after 20 PxP Black is not forced to answer 20 . . . Px.P. He can better
reply 20 . . . N-R3 , and after 2 1 PxP PxP 22 Q-N4 B-K6ch 23 K-R l
N-B2, Black can hold the position .
20 . . • RxB
After 20 . . . K-R l White continues 21 PxP, and 21 . . . N-R3 is

answered by 22 PxP , giving White too many Pawns for the sacrificed
piece .
21 RxR
Black cannot now afford to retake White' s Rook , for
1 ) 2 1 . . . KxR 22 Q-R5ch , winning the Bishop, after which

White with two Pawns for a piece and with a strong attack by Q +
R against a vulnerable King has by far the better of it (we omit the
detailed analysis , which might be confusing) ;
2) 2 1 . . . B-K6ch 22 K-R l KxR (now the situation is quite
different-White is two pieces down , so he must win in the attack)
23 Q-R5ch K-K2 ! (the only move) 24 R-KB I !
2a) 24 . . . N-Q2 25 Q-B7ch K-Q l 26 P-B6 and wins ;
2b) 24 . . . K-Q2 25 Q-B7ch K-B3 26 Q-K8ch K-N2 27
R-N l ch K-B2 28 Q-K7ch N-Q2 29 P-B6! and wins .
Against a Queen and a Rook a King is very much at their mercy in

open positions and rarely escapes an eventual mate .
Given that Black cannot afford to retake the Rook , we must again
consider the material situation : White has R + 2 P ' s ; Black has B +
N. Also , White still has attacking chances , but Black has the possibili
ty of recapturing some White Pawns , for White's QP is weak and his
KP may become weak .
21 • • • Q-Q7?!
This continuation was considered the saving move . It is difficult to

96 Game 6
say whether 2 1 . . . Q-B6 would have been stiJJ better. Both Pach
man and Robert Byrne considered this move . One variation is 22 PxP
PxP 23 R-N l N-B3 24 QR-N7 B-R3 25 Q-N4 QxPch 26 QxQ NxQ 27
RxRP, and the outcome is doubtful . However one thing is sure: White
wiJJ either win or draw .
The same is the case after the text . The struggle between R + 2 P' s
against B + N is not easy for Black . According to the comment after
White's 24th move White could even have gotten better chances for a
win . Whether 23 . . . Q-Q7 or 23 . . . Q-B6 was better or not as
good remains an open question .
22 QxQ
White must exchange , for after 22 Q-KB 1 QxQPch 23 K-R l N-8 3 ,

he has no continuation to his attack .
22 • • • BxQ
23 QR-KBl
White protects his KR and threatens mate .
23 • • • N-B3
24 PxP
Fine is of the opinion that 24 R-B7 would have given winning

chances . One example : 24 . . . NxQP 25 R/ 1 -B 7 B-R3 26 P-N4
(threatening 27 P-N5 , etc . ) 26 . . . P-N3 (if 26 . . . PxP 27 P-N5
N-B6ch 28 RxN PxR 29 PxB PxP 30 P-B6 R-N l 3 1 R-Q7 , and the
White passed Pawn can no longer be stopped) 27 RxKRP B-B l 28
Alekhine Defense 97
PxP PxP 29 K-N2, and White should win with a Rook and two Pawns
for two pieces , considering that he has command of the 7th rank .
24 • • • PxP
Now 25 R-B7 would be inferior to the 24 R-B7 line (analyzed under

24 PxP) for Black' s K3 is now free for the Knight ; e . g . , 25 R-B7
NxQP 26 R/ 1 -B7 N-K3 !
25 R-Q7 B-K6ch
26 K-Rl B:xP
27 P-K6
Doubling Rooks on the 7th rank would not be very effective

because of 27 . . . BxKP, protecting the critical point g7 .
27 • • • B-K4
It would not do for Black to take White' s QBP because of

28 R-QB7 .
28 RxQP R-Kl
Black thus prepares to win White ' s KP.
29 R-Kl RxP
30 R-Q6
A last try .
30 • • • K-B2
Not 30 . . . . RxR 3 1 PxR BxP? 32 R-K6 . Instead of 3 1 . . . BxP?

Black can better play 3 1 . . . K-B 2 , but then White answers
32 R-QB I and maintains winning chances. In most variations he will
be able to capture Black' s QRP .
31 RxN RxR
32 RxB
98 Game 6
White has a plus Pawn, but it does not mean much . Black will soon
be able to regain his Pawn .
32 • • • K-B3
33 R-QS K-K3
34 R-RS P-KR3
35 K-R2 R-R3
With this move , Black is assured of winning back his Pawn .
36 P-B6 RxBP
Not 36 . . . RxRP ? , for then 37 R-QB5 wins . With the text a draw
is assured .
37 R-RS P-R3
38 K-N3 K-B3
39 K-B3 R-B6ch
40 K-B2 R-B7ch
41 Draw
The inventive play of both sides kept the game in balance . For a
long time it looked as if White had the best of ic , but in view of Black' s
stubborn defense, White could never reach a position in which he had
a forced win .
Game 7
Ideas behind the Pirc Defense

Black's efforts to break up the White center formation
Pawn sacrifices to realize a strategic goal
Indirectly preventing the opponent from castling by making threaten-
ing moves
The indirect attack
Exchange of a piece in order to facilitate carrying out a special plan
Driving the King into the open field in order to force mate
Castling
Steinitz said , "Don ' t castle too early in the game , for you will give
your opponent a hint as to where he can attack . ' ' Nonetheless , castling
is a very important move in chess . It places the King in a safer
position , and it brings one of the Rooks into active play . The uncastled
King in the center of the board can easily become a target for an enemy
attack , and one of the Rooks of the player who has not castled is
usually out of play .
So important is it to bring the King into safety by castling that the
opposite side can often afford to sacrifice material in order to prevent
his opponent from doing so and in order to get an attack ;Jgainst the
King in the center of the board.
But the player who has sacrificed a Pawn or more to prevent his
opponent from castling must make sure to follow up the sacrifice with
very active play so that he gets full value for the material sacrificed .
He must make moves which develop his own pieces and at the same
time threaten his opponent . An opponent who is kept busy making
defensive moves has no opportunity to assume the initiative , which
would eventually make his own material advantage count .
The uncastled King is in a precarious position, especially when the
Queens are still on the board , for the opponent' s Queen is a powerful
agent in harassing the King in the center of the board .
Once the Queens are exchanged , the situation is less dangerous ,
and the greater the number of pieces exchanged , the less important it
100 Game 7
becomes to castle . As a matter of fact, when a sufficient number of

pieces have been exchanged , the King begins to assume an active role
in the struggle , and it can enter the play more directly from the center
of the board than from its castled position .
Pirc Defense
USSR Championship Semifinals
Tscheljabinsk -1 972
Genna Timoshenko Vladimir Karasev

USSR USSR
1 P-K4 P-Q3
The Pirc (also called Yugoslav) Defense .

This defense is brought about after 1 P-K4 P-Q3 2 P-Q4 N-KB 3 3
N-QB 3 , after which Black prepares to fianchetto his KB with
3 . . . P-KN3 . Black ' s strategic aim is to press against the White
center from his N2-squares . One of its thematic ideas is to strike at the
White center by means of . . . P-QB4 .
One of the great advantages of the Pirc Defense is that Black can
adjust his center policy to whatever method of development White
chooses . This is at the same time its most serious drawback, for White
has much greater freedom in the center all the way through . As a
result, if White plays aggressively, Black must spend so much time
opposing White ' s schemes that he is afforded but little opportunity to
further his own .
Practice has indicated that in refuting White' s attack Black often
attains a positional advantage . Furthermore , it should be noted that in
view of Black ' s solid build-up , it is not easy for White to attack
successfully .
2 P-Q4
In the Pirc Defense , Black allows White a strong center in order to

strike back at it. Black 's 1 . . P-Q3 already discourages White ' s
.
P-K5 , as i t does in the King ' s Indian .
2 • • • N-KB3
The Black attack against the White center has already started .
Pirc Defense 101
White ' s KP must now be protected . This setup is similar to that in the
Alekhine Defense except that White does not have the possibility of
playing P-K5 successfully .
3 N-QB3
In thus protecting his KP , White gives up the possibility of convert
ing to a King's Indian , in which he would have played P-QB4 before
bringing out his QN .
The alternatives to the text , 3 B-Q3 and 3 QN-Q2 , are both slightly
disadvantageous because to a certain extent they restrict the mobility
of White ' s pieces .
3 . . . P-KN3
Black develops along lines described under his l st move .

The opening now has some similarity to the King ' s Indian except
that White has brought out his QN without advancing his QBP. In so
doing , he has gained a tempo in development ; however, under certain
circumstances, a broad center consisting of Pc4-Pd4-Pe4 could be
preferable to the more restricted one here with Pd4-Pe4 .
4 P-B4
A very energetic continuation by which White indicates hi� inten

tion of playing P-K5 at the earliest possible moment-but this entails
certain risks . More solid would have been 4 N-B3 or 4 B-KN5 .
4 • • • B-N2
S N-BJ 0-0
102 Game 7
Here 5 . . . P-B4 is tempting in order to answer 6 PxP with

6 . . . Q-R4 , threatening 7 . . . NxP . However the game could in
stead continue 6 B-N5ch B-Q2 7 P-K5 N-N5 (7 . . . BxB ? 8 PxN,
winning a piece , since both Black Bishops are en prise) 8 P-K6 BxB
(8 . . . PxKP 9 N-N5 , threatening both 10 QxN and 10 NxKP) 9
PxPch K-Q2 (9 . . . KxP 1 0 N-N5ch) 1 0 NxB Q-R4ch 1 1 N-B 3 , and
White stands best , for Black has lost a Pawn and the right to castle .
6 P-KS
Consistent with intentions expressed under 4 P-B4 but probably not

the best . The postponement of castling will eventually weigh heavily .
Better is 6 B-K2 , after which 6 . . . P-B4 7 PxP Q-R4 8 0-0 leads to
equality .
6 • • . N-KI
The text is very sharp ; that is, it leads to complications and acceler
ates the crisis . It should be considered as an attempt to refute White' s
domination o f the center by his Pd4 , Pe5 , Nc3 , and Nf3 . White ' s
center looks fine here , but i t is vulnerable , a s the continuation shows.
Also possible is 6 . . . PxP 7 BPxP N-Q4 , and after 8 N-K4 B-B4
9N-N3 B-N5 10 B-K2 P-QB4, Black has an acceptable game .
7 B-K3
Directed against the attack that follows . But Black continues his
strategy despite White 's countermeasures.
7 . . . P-QB4
A strong pawn sacrifice made to break open White ' s center, a

follow-up of Black ' s 6 . . . N-K l . The sharpness of that move is
demonstrated only by this one .
If White were now to ignore Black ' s attack on his center and play 8
B-B4 in order to be able to castle , then 8 . . . PxQP 9 BxP N-QB3 ,
and the White center is destroyed and Black' s strategy has won out .
8 PxBP N-QB3
Pirc Defense 103
Black is interested only in bringing out his pieces as quickly as

possible and in pressing against what is left of White' s center . He does
not mind losing a Pawn if he can realize his strategic aim of annihilat
ing the White center and opening the diagonal for his own KB .
9 KPxP
A safer way was 9 B-K2 . White need not fear 9 . . . PxKP 1 0 QxQ
NxQ 1 1 NxP, for then it will not be easy for Black to regain the
sacrificed Pawn . The continuation 1 1 . . . N-QB3 1 2 NxN BxNch 1 3
PxB PxN 1 4 B-B3 is certainly favorable to White in spite of the ugly
appearance of the tripled Pawns . But Black would do better to answer
9 B-K2 by 9 . . . Q-R4, and after 10 BPxP PxP, White cannot afford
to continue 1 1 PxP because of 1 1 . . . BxNch 1 2 PxB QxPch 1 3 K-B2
N-B3 with advantage to Black . In this line White has to play 1 1 Q-Q5 ,
and after 1 1 . . . QxQ 1 2 NxQ PxP chances are about equal .
9 • . . PxP
10 Q-Q2(?)
After this move White's position becomes inferior . White made the
move, however, to avoid the ugly doubled Pawns along the QB-file .
Best still would have been 10 B -K2 followed immediately by
castling .
Certainly White could also play l O PxP, but then after 10 . . . NxP
Black maintains a powerful initiative in return for the sacrificed Pawn .
For instance , 1 1 B-B5 R-K l ch 1 2 B -K2 BxNch 1 3 PxB N-K5 1 4 QxQ
RxQ 1 5 B-Q4 B-N5 , and Black either saddles his opponent with two
104 Game 7
doubled isolated Pawns or he regains the Pawn with a good position;

e. g . , 1 6 0-0 BxN 1 7 BxB N-Q7 1 8 R-B2 ( 1 8 KR-Q l NxBch 1 9 PxN
and White can keep the plus Pawn if he is willing to put up with two
sets of doubled isolated Pawns) 1 8 . . . NxBch 1 9 RxN NxB .
After the text, not 1 0 . . PxP because of 1 1 QxQ NxQ 1 2 BxP,
.
winning the Exchange .
10 • • • Q-R4
This is the key move in all the complications that follow . Although
the White Knight is no longer pinned , through the combined action of
his Queen and his KB Black is threatening to attain his strategic aim
simply by playing 1 1 . . . PxP . After that move Black's situation is
certainly superior. He has the open diagonal for his fianchettoed
Bishop , and , in general , his pieces have better possibilities than
White' s pieces .
1 1 PxP
Practically forced unless White is willing to allow Black to attain

his strategic aim.
If 1 1 B-K2 PxP , Black stands definitely better .
11 • • • NxP
White will not answer 12 QxN because of 12 . . . BxNch, etc .
12 B-Q3
Hoping to castle in time . Now White has a plus Pawn, and it looks
as if he can meet Black's subsequent attempts to obtain compensation
for his sacrificed Pawn .
12 • • • R-Ql
Now the threat 13 . . . N-BS practically prevents White from castl

ing . After 1 3 0-0 N-BS 14 Q-K2 and
1) 14 . . . NxB 1 5 QxN BxN 1 6 PxB QxP , and Black has regained

his Pawn with a good position ;
Pirc Defense 105
2) 1 4 . . . NxP 1 5 N-K4 NxB 1 6 PxN BxR is certainly still

stronger , for it wins back the Pawn and wins the Exchange in the
bargain .
1 3 N-Ql
Defending his QNP and threatening to exchange Queens . How

ever, the move looks better than it is, as Black will soon prove . But
there was no longer any really satisfactory defense which would give
White complete equality .
13 . . . N-N5
This prevents the exchange of Queens , which would not be in

Black' s interest at this point , and presses against White' s KB . Black is
still threatening . . . N-BS and the capture of White ' s QNP, which
would then be attacked by Black ' s Knight and Bishop .
14 P-B3
This parries the immediate threat, but White gets into one problem
after the other .
The alternative 1 4 P-QR3 is not sufficient either, for with
14 . . . NxBch 1 5 PxN Q-R3 Black would soon regain the Pawn with
an overwhelming position, as will become clear from the following
analysis:
1 ) 1 6 N-B3 N-B5 17 Q-KB2 NxB 1 8 QxN B-B4, regaining the

QP, since Black also threatens 1 9 . . . R-K 1 ;
106 Game 7
2) 1 6 N-B2 N-B5 1 7 Q-K2 NxNP , etc . ;

3) 1 6 0-0 N-K5 1 7 Q-K2 QxP, with superiority for Black ;
4) 1 6 P-Q4 B-N5
4a) 17 Q-KB2 BxN 18 QxB N-B4, etc . ;
4b) 1 7 N-K5 BxN/8 1 8 QxB ! ( 1 8 RxB P-B3 followed by 1 9
. . . N-B5 wins) 1 8 . . . P-B3 1 9 N-B3 N-B4 20 B-B l (20
B-B2 R-K l ch) 20 . . . Q-B5 21 P-QN3 Q-B6ch 22 B-Q2
Q-Q6 , and Black at least regains his Pawn .
14 • . • NxBch
lS QxN N-B4
16 Q-K2
Not 16 Q-B2 because of 16 . . . RxNch, followed by

17 . . . NxB .
For one Pawn Black has succeeded in getting a much more active
attacking position and has kept White so busy that he has not had time
to castle . Notice how active Black 's combined Queen , KR , and
Knight are and how cramped White' s position is . Black now continues
his attack in form of a threat .
16 • . . P-N3
Threatening 1 7 . . . B-QR3 , which would definitely prevent White

from castling .
17 K-B2
White takes care of his King in another way , but this does not
prevent Black from developing his Bishop with a threat .
17 • • • B-QR3
18 Q-B2 QR-Bl
An important move , the purpose of which will become very clear at

Black ' s 2 l st move . The point is that Black' s Rook indirectly attacks
the White Queen , therefore pinning White ' s QBP.
Pirc Defense 107
19 R-Kl B-N2
Black's QB has performed its work at a6 . It now has a job to do at

b7 , since in the combination that follows it is important that White' s
KN be removed from the board .
20 R-K2(?)
Not the best , but White is in a difficult situation .

Relatively best is probably 20 Q-N3 , which is answered by 20 . . .
B-Q4 2 1 Q-N4 Q-R3 , threatening among other things 22 . . . B-B l ,
trapping the Queen . White must therefore play 22 P-QR4 , and after
22 . . . Q-N2 Black maintains his advantage .
With the text White hopes to continue by 2 1 R-Q2 and get some air .
20 • • • BxN
21 KxB
Objectively 2 1 PxB would be better, alth�ugh White would not be

able to save the game .with such a mutilated K-side . For instance , 2 1
PxB B-Q5 2 2 R-Q2 BxBch 2 3 NxB NxN 24 KxN Q-B4ch 25 K-K2
Q-KR4, winning at least a Pawn and maintaining the attack against the
naked White King .
21 • • • B-QS!
The deciding move ! White cannot answer 22 BxB because of

22 . . . NxBch , winning the Queen . Black now threatens 22 . . . BxB
and after 23 NxB N-Q5ch .
108 Game 7
22 P-KN4
Other possibilities are not sufficient either:
1 ) 22 R-Q2
l a) 22 . . . NxB ! 23 NxN Q-R4ch 24 K-B2 (the only move)
24 . . . QxP 25 K-B3 BxN 26 KxB Q-N6ch .
l b) 22 . . . NxB 23 NxN Q-R4ch 24 K-B2 (24 P-N4 Q-R6ch
is killing !) 24 . . . QxRP, with an easy win for Black ;
2) 22 Q-N3 BxB 23 NxB R-Q6, threatening 24 . . . N-Q5ch ,
against which White has no sufficient defense ; e . g . , 24 Q-N4
QxQ 25 PxQ R-K l 26 QR-K l N-Q5ch .
22 • . • Q-Q4ch
Notice how this move contributes to Black' s combination by bring

ing the Queen into it very actively .
23 K-B2
The only move , for 23 Q-K4 loses the Queen because of 23 . . .

N-R5ch .
23 . . . N-RS
Threatens 24 . . . Q-N7ch and mate on the following move .

Pirc Defense 109
24 K-N3
White has no choice : 24 BxB Q-N7ch 25 K-K3 (25 K-K l N-B6

mate) 25 . . . Q-B6ch 26 K-Q2 RxBch , etc .
24 • • • Q-B6ch
25 KxN B-B3ch
26 P-NS BxPch
When a hostile King is driven into the open , one can often (as here)
sacrifice more than one piece in order to force mate . But everything
must be calculated exactly-the combination must be correct; other
wise one is lost materially .
27 KxB
If 27 PxB R-B5ch 28 B-Q4 R/ l xBch is decisive .
27 • • • Q-R4ch
28 K-B6 Q-RSch
29 Resigns
For if 29 K-K5 Q-K2 mate .
Black won because the position he obtained by sacrificing a Pawn in

the opening allowed him to maneuver with all kinds of threats against
which White , in the long run , was not able to defend himself.
Game 8
General ideas behind the Sicilian Defense

Postponing the development of the Black QN
Advantages and disadvantages of the Dragon Variation of the Sicilian
The 13 Line-a dangerous weapon agaimt the Dragon Variation
The White attack agaimt the Black King castled K-side
Black's slight weakness, • • • P-KN3, favors the White pawn storm
The pawn sacrifice to open up further attacking possibilities
Attempt to drive away Black's Nf6 in order to complete the mating net
The overworked piece
The closing and opening of files and ranks in order to bring the final
combination to a successful conclusion
Attack against the Opponent's King Castled K-slde

One of the most spectacular feats in a game of chess is the success
ful attack against the opponent ' s King castled K-side . Such an attack
is usually made when some weakness exists on the defender' s K-side,
and this often occurs when the latter has played either P-KN3 or
P-KR3 or when the defender has no protecting pieces in the vicinity of
his K-side .
In order to carry out such an attack successfully , the attacker must
have a number of his pieces directed against his opponent' s K-side ,
and he must strive to open files on that side either by a pawn storm or
by rapidly bringing his pieces to that area of the board and making
advantageous exchanges . If he is confident that his attack will suc
ceed, he can afford to sacrifice material--especially a Pawn-in order
to carry out the attack more rapidly and effectively.
In such attacks , before sacrificing material the attacker must be
absolutely sure that the attack will end in mate or that he will emerge
with some other advantage which will compensate for the material
sacrificed . He must also calculate carefully when making exchanges
so that in the end those of his pieces which will pose the most serious
problems to the enemy King will be posted on the squares where they
will be most effective .
1 10
Sicilian Defense: Dragon Variation 111
On the other hand, the attacker must not delay his plans either. If the
attack moves too slowly , the opponent has time to bring up reinforce
ments which may enable him to stop it. Even if no material sacrifices
are made, the all-out attack often leads to an advantage for the
defender because after the smoke has cleared the forces of the attacker
may be directed toward the wrong part of the board .
Variations of certain defenses, the Dragon Variation of the Sicilian
and the Simisch Variation of the King ' s Indian Defense among
others , lend themselves especially well to an attack against the oppo
nent' s King castled K-side .
Slclllan Defense - Dragon Variation

Candidates' Match - Moscow - 1 974
Anatoly Karpov • USSR Viktor Korchnoi • USSR

1 P-K4 P-QB4
The Sicilian Defense--one of the most intriguing replies to 1 P-K4.
It develops in such a way that it is impossible for White to attain the
type of play he normally gets in the KP openings .
Instead of meeting White's occupation of the center with counter
play for possession of the center, Black attempts to secure play on the
Q-side. In the Sicilian Black tends to control the center from afar as in
the Indian defenses , thus forcing White into a type of play that he may
neither be familiar with nor want to play .
By 1 . . P-QB4 Black exercises control over d4 and hopes to open
.
the QB-file for counterplay on the Q-side after White has played
P-Q4, which he normally does.
2 N-KB3
The most common reply in the Sicilian . White exerts pressure on d4

and threatens to gain control of it by 3 P-Q4 .
2 • • • P-Q3
One of the principal replies at this point . On the one hand, it guards
against a possible P-K5 by White ; on the other, it allows Black to
decide later whether he wishes to develop his QN to c6 or d7 .
The other common replies are 2 . . N-QB 3 , which gives Black
.
1 12 Game s
more pressure on d4, and 2 . . . P-K3 , which is more flexible in that it

postpones the decision of exactly which line of the Sicilian Black will
choose .
3 P-Q4
White usually answers in this way , taking possession of the center ,

but by so doing he gives Black the opportunity to exchange Pawns , to
open his QB-file, and subsequently to get play along that file .
3 . . . PxP
4 NxP N-KB3
Black develops his KN , attacking White' s KP.
5 N-QB3
White protects his Pawn in the most economical way ; but as a result
he is prevented from later playing P-QB4, which would give him a
very strong grip on the center square d5 and on b5 ; this could be
important if Black should later consider playing . . . P-QR3 followed
by . . . P-QN4 .
s . . . P-KN3
The Dragon Variation of the Sicilian . Black will develop his KB to

g7 , from which point it will exert strong pressure all along the
diagonal on the White center and directly or indirectly on White 's
Q-side .
The disadvantage of the text is that it slightly weakens Black's
K-side, which enables White to attack later by P-KR4-R5 . In view of
the course of this game, one may get the impression that this weakness
has a great significance . However, this is not the case . With good
counterplay Black should not have lost .
6 B-K3
To prepare 0-0-0 and to support White ' s Knight on d4 . This support

may become especially necessary after Black has played . . . N-B 3 ,
attacking that Knight directly , and . . . B-N2 , attacking i t indirectly .
Normally, White would hesitate to place his Bishop on e3 because
Sicilian Defense: Dragon Variation 1 13
of 6 . . . N-N5 , but here that move would be answered by 7 B-N5ch .

If 7 . . . B-Q2 8 QxN ; if 7 . . . N-B3 8 NxN , and Black must lose
material .
6 • • • B-N2
In the course of the game White must be sure to neutralize the

pressure of the Black KB along the diagonal . He must also look to the
safety of his QR which, although now separated from the Black KB by
a number of pieces , will never be entirely safe as long as it remains on
its QR I .
7 P-83
This move has several functions : (a) like its counterpart in the
King' s Indian, the Samisch Variation, it solidifies the center: (b) it
prepares for an attack on Black' s K-side by an advance of White's
KNP and KRP; and (c) it prevents . . . N-N5 (which is possible at
this point) since B-N5ch , mentioned under White's 6th move , could
now be answered by . . . K-B l , and Black would not lose any
material .
7 • • • N-B3
The QN is now more effective on c6 than it would be on d7 for (a) it

helps Black' s KB bring pressure on the White center, and (b) if White
should play B-QB4, it could threaten to exchange that Bishop
by . . . N-QR4.
8 Q-Q2
"
This makes it possible for White to castle Q-side and strengthens his
attack against Black's fianchettoed Bishop by enabling him to play
B-R6 .
8 • • • 0-0
This game shows that the Dragon Variation poses more serious
problems for Black than was formerly supposed .
9 B-QB4
1 14 Game s
On c4 White ' s KB is now directed against Black 's K-side .
9 • • . B-Q2
The Bishop must be developed , and this is the square to which it is

normally developed by Black in this system .
To be considered is 9 . . . NxN 1 0 BxN B-K3 . Practice has shown
that Black need not fear the exchange on e6 despite the somewhat
strange pawn formation that would result from 1 1 BxB PxB .
10 P-KR4
White now starts his pawn advance against Black' s castled and
fianchettoed K-side . He can castle long later. This early attack is
possible because Black has somewhat weakened his K-side by
5 . . . P-KN3 , which usually leads to an open file for the attack. Such
a wing attack is in general most successful if Black has no way to
counterattack in the center .
10 • • • R-Bl
Indirectly attacking White ' s loose KB , Black treats this game in

harmony with the usual concept of the Sicilian . In some modem
games, 1 0 . . . Q-N l followed by an advance of the Q-side Pawns
has been tried . It is difficult to evaluate this line, but up to now Black
has always managed to keep the game in balance.
Leading to the same position as the game continuation is 1 0 . . . N
K4 1 1 B-N3 R-B 1 .
11 B-N3
White brings his KB to a safer square, from which it still exercises

pressure against Black's K-side .
11 • • • N-K4
In order to continue with 1 2 . . . N-B5 , which practically forces

White to exchange his KB for Black' s Knight . This situation also
occurs in many other variations of the Sicilian . Black could have
attained the same result by 1 1 . . . N-QR4.
12 0-0-0
White calmly castles into Black' s attack . He needs his QR for his
own attack and is convinced that he can parry the Black counterattack .
12 • • • N-85
A powerful position for the Knight .
13 BxN
White exchanges partly in order not to lose a tempo, partly because

he does not want to leave the Black Knight in such a powerful
position , and partly because he needs his QB for his K-side attack .
13 • • • RxB
14 P-RS!
1 16 Game s
Contrary to his usual style, Karpov goes in for a sharp attack .

Contrast this with his technique against Spassky in Game 1 0 .
White sacrifices his KRP i n order to open the KR-file and advance
his attack . The side with the better developed attack often finds that it
is worthwhile to give up a Pawn in order to open up additional
attacking possibilities .
14 • • • NxRP
After 14 . . . PxP the attack would continue more rapidly, for

1 5 B-R6 threatens 1 6 Q-N5 , etc .
15 P-KN4 N-B3
We can now see the net results of White's pawn sacrifice on his l 4th
move : (a) he has opened up the KR-file for attack , and (b) he has
gained a few tempos, among others the advance of his KNP.
16 N/4-Kl!
To render ineffective an eventual . . . RxQN after the sacrifice of

the Exchange has been prepared by . . . Q-R4 and . . . KR-B l . Al-
so, the text makes it possible for the Knight to go to g3 or f4 to
participate in the attack.
An immediate 16 B-R6 is not favorable because of 1 6 . . . NxKP
(threatening 17 . . . RxKN) , and after 1 7 Q-K3 Black can continue
with 17 . . . RxQN (the sacrifice of the Exchange at which Black was
aiming) or simply with 1 7 . . . N-B3, and in either case he is two
Pawns up.
16 • • • Q-R4
Black brings support to his 4th rank and a piece to attack White's
Q-side .
The standard move 1 6 . . . R-K l , in order to answer 17 B-R6 by
17 . . . B-R l , is refuted here by 1 7 P-K5 ! PxP? 1 8 P-KN5 , winning a
piece.
17 B-R6
�ite's plan is to eliminate Black' s defensive KB and then to bring

Sicilian Defense: Dragon Variation 1 17
pressure to bear on h7 . Moreover, he threatens 1 8 BxB KxB 1 9

Q-R6ch K-N l 2 0 P-N5 N-R4 2 1 N-B4.
White can play B-R6 at his 1 7th move (although it was not good at
his 1 6th move) because now White's KN is no longer indirectly
attacked by Black's fianchettoed Bishop .
17 • • • BxB
Whether Black exchanges Bishops himself or allows White to

exchange , the same position will result , with the White Queen going
to h6 ; e . g . , if 1 7 . . . KR-B l 1 8 BxB KxB 1 9 Q-R6ch K-N l .
18 QxB KR-Bl
Black hopes eventually for . . . RxN; NxR RxN; PxR, which

might give him the opportunity to take advantage of White's
weakened Q-side . The two exchanges would be made to open up
White's position and give Black the possibility of perpetual check .
Notice that in the present position White 's QN is also tied down in
order to keep Black from playing . . . RxPch, so that White cannot
now answer 1 9 N-Q5 , undermining Black's protection of his KRP.
Nor can White play 1 9 P-N5 followed by 1 9 . . . N-R4 20 N-B4
because of 20 . . RxN .
.
19 R-Q3!!
This affords added protection to White's QN . White now threatens

to continue the attack by 20 P-N5 and , after. 20 . . . N-R4 , by 2 1
N-B4.
E
118 Game 8
19 • • • R/5-B4
Black protects his 4th rank once more for the purpose of preventing
White' s threat of 20 P-N5 .
With other lines Black cannot reach equ�ity either:
1 ) 19 . . . Q-Q l 20 P-N5 N-R4 2 1 N-B4 Q-B l 22 QxQch KxQ 23

NxN PxN 24 RxP with advantage to White . This line is relatively
best for Black .
2) 19 . . . B-K3 20 P-N5 N-R4 2 1 N-B4 RxN 22 PxR RxP 23
NxN Q-R6ch 24 K-Q2 RxRch 25 PxR PxN 26 QxP/5 K-B 1 27
QxRP, etc .
In all lines White maintains some superiority . but the text is certain
ly inferior and leads to a very rapid denouement.
20 P-NS!
Nevertheless White pushes his KNP, which can now be captured .

The reason for this sacrifice becomes apparent at White's next move .
20 • • • RxP
If 20 . . . N-R4 21 N-B4 RxP 22 QN-Q5 , etc .
21 R-QS
By attacking both the Black Queen and Rook , Karpov forces

exchanges which will further his own K-side attack. The simplicity of
it is astounding ! He takes advantage of the fact that the Black Knight is
overworked since it has both to protect its KRP and to guard its
Q4-square .
21 • • • RxR
If 21 . . . NxR , mate in two . The Black Knight is needed to protect

Black' s KRP .
22 NxR
White is now two Pawns down , but he has the initiative , the attack ,
and threats . He threatens both 23 NxNch and 23 NxPch, the latter
being the more formidable because it will win the Exchange .
22 • • • R-Kl
To ward off the threatened 23 NxPch.

At the present time , 23 NxNch doesn't offer too much . After
23 . . . PxN 24 QxPch K-B l , the King escapes via e7 .
23 N/2-B4
With the text White threatens 24 NxNch , and there follows

24 . . . PxN 25 QxRPch K-B l 26 N-Q5 ! and mate on h8 .
23 • • • B-B3
Black hopes to eliminate one of the Knights.

If 23 . . . B-K3 , then 24 NxB PxN 25 NxNch PxN 26 QxRPch
K-B 1 27 QxQNP R-K2 28 Q-N8ch R-K l 29 QxPch wins a Pawn for
White . If now 1 ) 29 . . . K-N2 30 Q-Q7ch ; 2) 29 . . . K-B2 30
Q-Q7ch R-K2 3 1 R-R7ch K-N l 32 RxR, and there is no mate for
Black; 3) 29 . . . R-K2 30 R-R8ch K-N2 3 1 QxRch KxR 32
120 Game s
QxBPch, etc . ; 4) 29 . . . K-N l (relatively best) 30 Q-Q7 , and White

wins a few more Pawns .
24 P-KS! !
To open the K-file and close White' s 5th rank .

If instead 24 NxNch PxN 25 N-R5 Q-N4ch (White ' s 5th rank is not
closed) 26 QxQ PxQ 27 N-B6ch K-N2 28 NxRch BxN , and Black has
two Pawns for the Exchange and can still fight .
24 • • • BxN
If 24 . . . PxP 25 NxNch PxN 26 N-R5 PxN 27 R-N l ch followed

by mate .
2S PxN PxP
Now that the K-file is open, the Black King can no longer escape .
26 QxRPch K-Bl
27 Q-R8ch Resigns
For if 27 . . . K-K2 28 NxBch and 1 ) 28 . . . QxN 29 R-K l ch,

etc . , 2) 28 . . . K-Q l 29 QxPch , and White is a piece up .
Notice that Black also had mating threats , but he did not have the
chance to make use of them; e . g . , if 27 NxB ? (instead of 27 Q-R8ch !)
27 . . . R-K8ch 28 RxR QxR mate .
White won because he made a straightforward attack against the

opponent' s K-position, which was just slightly weakened by the
fianchetto .
At his 9th or I Oth move Black could have presumably gotten into a
less dangerous position . Several times later he could have put up
stiffer resistance and by so doing could have reduced his disadvan
taged to a minimum .
Game 9
The Paulsen Variation of the Sicilian

Advantages in the Sicilian of • • • QN-Q2 over • • • QN-B3
The purpose of • • • P-QR3 in the Sicilian
The importance of getting to play • • • P-Q4 in the Sicilian
The sacrifice of the Exchange to improve the position of a passed Pawn
and to stop the opponent's assault
The strong pressure exerted by an advanced Pawn
The inadvisability of exchanging Queens when one has the attack
Attack and counterattack
Attack and Counterattack

In the Sicilian Defense White tries to develop a K-side attack and
Black a Q-side attack. White usually directs Pawns and pieces against
the Black King castled K-side ; Black ' s attack normally develops
along the QB-file (the QR on c8 and the Queen on c7) , accompanied
by an advance of the QRP and QNP (P-QR3 , P-QN4, and possibly
P-QN5) , while the QN (either QN-B3-R4-B5 or QN-Q2-N3-B5) and
the fianchettoed QB (B-N2) also play their part .
When each side succeeds in developing a strong attacking initia
tive , the respective players must analyze more carefully and more
deeply than they do in quieter games to ascertain that each move is
accurate , and they must make the very best use of each piece . A single
miscalculation can turn a very promising position into a catastrophe .
The application of the old adage , "First come , first served , " is
especially appropriate in these circumstances .
In case of attack and counterattack it is desirable for each player to
try to get his opponent' s King into as open and unprotected a position
as possible . Other things being equal , it will be more difficult for the
King in the open field to withstand an attack than the King which is
somewhat protected and therefore less subject to attack .
122
Sicilian Defense: Paulsen Variation 123
Sicilian Defense - Pau lsen Variation

Second Annual World Open Championship
New York - 1 974
John Peters - USA Bent Larsen - Denmark

1 P-K4 P-QB4
2 N-KB3 P-K3
3 P-Q4 PxP
4 NxP N-KB3
S N-QB3 P-Q3
In the preceding game Black played . . . P-KN3 , in this

game . . . P-K3, which from both the White and the Black side
implies two different strategic plans .
In the present game White occupies four ranks, Black three .
White' s 5th rank may be considered a demarcation line . White must
try to convert his greater mobility into attack , and the basic point of
attack may be considered White' s KP, eventually supported by his
KBP when pushed to its 4th square .
Black's plan is much clearer than White ' s . He will operate on the
Q-wing with his semi-open file as a base and c4 as the point of
penetration . It will give him good chances , especially if White fails to
combine his attacking moves on the K-side with defensive moves on
the Q-side .
6 B-K2
This position has three traits which are characteristic of many

variations of the Sicilian at this point : (a) superior freedom of move
ment for White ; (b) numerical , if somewhat backward, pawn
superiority in the center for Black ; and (c) the semi-open QB-file for
Black .
6 • • • QN-Q2
The strategic basis for Black' s formation is not new . Already some
one hundred years ago the Paulsen brothers made a successful attempt
to work out a system which would enable Black to take advantage of
the QB-file and his center majority . Their system was characterized
124 Game 9
by . . . P-QR3 , . . . Q-B2, . . . QN-Q2 , and the Black pawn for

mation Pd6-Pe6 .
With the text this original Paulsen Variation is in the process of
being reached . The development of the QN to d7 (rather than to c6)
has several advantages : (a) the QB-file is open for Black ; (b) if Black
should fianchetto his QB , its diagonal would remain free ; (c) if White
should play B-KN5 followed by BxN, Black could recapture with. his
QN .
However, if White should develop his Bishop to c4 instead of to e2 ,
then . . . QN-Q2 might lead to a quick catastrophe because of the
possibility of a sacrifice on e6 . For example , 6 B-QB4 (instead of 6
B-K2) 6 . . . QN-Q2 7 B -KN5 P-QR3 8 0-0 Q-B2? 9 BxKP ! PxB 1 0
NxP Q-B5 1 1 N-Q5 , and White gets a n overwhelming attack (Keres
Sajtar , Amsterdam 1954) .
7 P-B4
If White wants to attack-and this is what he must do in the Sicilian

to compensate for Black' s Q-side attack-then he needs to secure
more freedom by putting his KBP on f4 and his KB on f3 and to play
P-K5 as soon as Black plays . . . P-Q4 . There may then arise pos
sibilities of P-KB5 such as occur in this game .
7 • • • P-QR3
Also a very common Black move in other variations of the Sicilian .

It is usually played on the 4th move in the Paulsen Variation and on the
5th move in the Najdorf Variation (Games 1 1 and 1 2) . It prevents
White from bringing his Knight or Bishop to b5 , and it forwards
Black' s characteristic Sicilian Q-side development by preparing for-
. . . P-QN4 followed by . . . B-N2 .
8 P-QR4
To prevent Black from successfully continuing with . . .

P-QN4 .
8 • • . Q-B2
Black nonetheless takes command of his open QB-file and exerts

indirect pressure on c2 . The original Paulsen build-up has now been

realized .
9 0-0 P-QN3
Since Black ' s QNP cannot safely go to b5 , Black must play the text
in order to develop his QB .
10 B-B3
The White Bishop now presses indirectly against d5 and against

Black ' s QR , and the mobility of the White Queen is increased .
10 • • • B-N2
1 1 K-Rl
On g 1 the White King could be exposed to an attack from the Black

Queen (e.g . , . . . Q-B4; . . . P-K4) which would win the White N/4
if the latter did not take countermeasures . Also , the KN-file is White' s
attacking avenue against Black ' s K-side , So that White ' s King is
usually more advantageously placed on hl than on g l .
11 • • . B-K2
12 Q-Kl
The attacking move in this variation . White 's general plan will be
P-KN4 followed by Q-N3 , bringing the White pieces to the vicinity of
the hostile King , although there are as yet no direct threats . If at any
time Black should play . . . P-Q4, White could then answer P-K5 , and
the attack would be intensified and possibly followed by P-B5 .
126 Game 9
12 . . . 0-0
13 P-KN4
The beginning of the above-mentioned pawn storm .
13 . . . Q-B5
The Black counteraction . His Queen is now attacking White's loose

Knight , and he is preparing to play . . . P-Q4 , one of Black ' s aims in
almost all variations of the Sicilian .
14 B-K3 P-Q4
Black thus gets to play the important . . . P-Q4 , for which Black
strives in almost all variations of the Sicilian . It is made (a) to gain
more influence in the center and (b) to increase the mobility of the
Black pieces .
Black usually tries to make this move in such a way as not to allow
White to reply P-KS , which would give him a real preponderance on
the K-wing and much pressure . In this game Black does not care
whether White plays P-KS , for then his KN can go to e4 .
White must now play with a keen understanding of the strategy
involved . If , for instance , he should now answer 15 PxP , his attack
would lose force and he would be left with weaknesses on his K-side .
He therefore continues his attack by
15 P-K5
9
This gives White a greater command of space and drives Black 's
defenders away from the K-side .
If 1 5 PxP NxP 1 6 NxN BxN 1 7 BxB QxBch , the White King would
be left in a naked position . and White' s KNP would no longer have
any attack and would simply constitute a weakness .
15 • . • N-KS
Quite superior to 1 5 . . . N-Kl , his only other option .
16 NxN
White does not want the Black Knight posted in such a commanding
position nor does he wish to permit . . . NxN , which would leave him
with a pair of doubled isolated Pawns .
16 • • . PxN
As a result of the exchange , Black gets a Pawn on e4 . This Pawn is

strong and weak at the same time-strong because it presses against
the White position , weak because it is temporarily isolated .
17 B-N2 QR-BI
Black now controls the QB-file , one of Black ' s principal aims in the
Sicilian .
18 Q-N3
White continues with his attacking maneuver .
18 • • • Q-NS
Black, for his part , becomes aggressive on the Q-side .
19 P-BS
White does not try to save his QNP by 1 8 P-N3 , which would create
128 Game 9
a hole in his position at c3 . This hole could be occupied by Black ' s

Queen or , after preparation , by his QR .
White , leaving his QNP en prise , tries to attack . His pieces are well
directed against the Black King , and he can regain his Pawn
immediately.
19 . . . QxNP
The exchange I 9 . . . PxP 20 PxP would be too dangerous for

Black , since White would then be threatening 2 1 P-B6.
20 PxP
White does not get sufficient compensation after 20 P-B6 PxP

2 1 PxP BxP.
20 . . . PxP
21 KR-QNl
An important in-between move , for both materially and positional

ly 2 1 NxP RxRch 22 RxR QxP looks very good for Black .
21 . . . Q-B6
This move has several implications and purposes : (a) it is the only
square to which the Queen can go without being captured ; (b) it ties
down White ' s KR to the protection of his QR, which is being
threatened by the Black Queen ; (c) White' s B/3 cannot move now
without giving Black the option of exchanging Queens ; and (d) from
its present diagonal , after preparation , the Black Queen may eventual
ly get some play against the White KP.
22 NxP
Suddenly the position becomes electrified ! White' s KP and Black ' s

K R are en prise , and other dynamic situations will become evident in
the moves that follow .
22 • • • R-B6!
Black offers the sacrifice of the Exchange, relying on the force of

his advanced KP, which is supported by his QB .
23 BxR PxB
24 B-B2
For if 24 Q-B2 QxB ! ! 25 QxQ P-B7 dis eh followed by mate . This

shows how dynamic the position is for both sides and how dangerous it
is for White .
24 • • • NxP
Not 24 . . . QxP 25 QxQ NxQ 26 RxP . Black has to play for the
attack-not for the exchange of Queens , which would now be good
for White , who is the Exchange up .
25 K-Nl
To remove the King from the dangerous .diagonal so as to continue

with threats . Both 25 RxP? QxRch and 25 BxP? P-B7 dis eh are
unsatisfactory .
25 • • • N-N3!
Threatening both 26 . . . B-R5 and 26 . . . QxP. Black could not

play . . . QxP earlier , for his Knight would have then been en prise .
If now 26 BxP B-R5 27 Q-Q6 P-B7ch 28 BxP Q-B6, and White
cannot parry both 29 . . . Q-N7 mate and 29 . . . QxB mate .
130 Game 9
26 P-NS
This move not only prevents . . . B-RS but also enables White to
play Q-N4, which may be important in some variations . On g4 the
White Queen protects its Knight and prepares for Q-Q4, forcing the
exchange of Queens . This does not happen in the game but it could
happen .
26 • • • P-QR4
To obtain a firm bold on b4 so as to be able to play . . . B-NS .
27 Q-N4
As suggested above, this gives protection to the White Knight and

prepares for 28 Q-Q4 and the exchange of Queens .
If 2 7 BxP, then 2 7 . . . Q-B3 , threatening both 2 8 . . . P-B7ch and
28 . . . QxN . This variation illustrates how White can never move his
Bishop on account of possibilities arising from . . . Q-B 3 .
27 • • •
Black foresees the possibility of 28 Q-Q4 and makes the best of it by

indirectly threatening the White Knight . With the text , Black frees c8
for his Bishop , which can then pin the White Knight .
28 N-Q4(?)
White hesitates to offer an exchange of Queens and protects his

QBP instead , but 28 Q-Q4 was relatively better . Then the game might
have continued 28 . . . B-N5 ! (showing the importance of 26 . . .

P-QR4) and e . g . ,
1 ) 29 QxQ BxQ 30 R-R3 (30 RxP BxR) 30 . . . B-K4 3 1 RxNP
B-Q4 32 N-Q4 BxN 33 BxB N-B5 with a strong attack (34 R-K3
N-R6ch 35 K-B l B-B5ch) ;
2) 29 QxNP B-QB 1
2a) 30 N-Q4 N-B5 (threatening both 3 1 . . . N-R6ch and
3 1 . . . N-K7ch) ;
2b) 30 N-B7 Q-K4
2b l ) 3 1 NxR QxPch 32 B-N3 (the only move) 32 . . .
B -B4ch, etc . ;
2b2) 3 1 RxB (to eliminate the Black KB) 3 1 . . . PxR ,
after which White' s QR is hanging , and 32 R-K l is refuted
by 32 . . . QxPch . The game might continue 32 R-Q l
QxNPch 33 B-N3 R-K7 , and Black stands best .
28 • • • B-B4
This more or less holds the White Knight on d4 (e . g . , 29 N-N5 ?

BxBch 30 KxB Q-K6ch, etc . ) .
29 R-Kl
White wishes to exchange Rooks , partly to reduce the attack, partly

to bring his QR into play .
29 • . • R-KBl
Black has no desire to exchange. He protects his BP once more and

prepares for 30 . . . N-B 5 . It is not a good idea for the aggressor to
exchange pieces during the attack unless he has a special reason for
doing so .
30 QR-Ql N-BS
Depriving White's Knight of the protection of its Queen and also

threatening 3 1 . . . N-K7ch 32 NxN (32 K-B l B-R3 or 32 K-R l
NxN) 32 . . . BxBch 33 KxB PxN dis eh 34 KxP B-R3ch , etc .
Not as good is 30 . . . R-B5 because of 3 1 Q-K6ch .
31 K-Rl ?
132 Game 9
With this move, the White King goes into "the comer of death, "
but the game i s lost in any case , for if 3 1 R-K3 Q-B5 , how can White
parry threats such as 32 . . . N-K7ch and 32 . . . BxN?
31 • • • BxN!
The decisive blow ! White cannot answer 32 RxB because of

32 . . . QxRch 33 BxQ P-B7 dis eh , and mate follows.
32 Q-N3 N-K7
33 Q-R4 R-BS
The White Queen is being chased from pillar to post ! In addition to a

strong attack B lack has a decisive material advantage . There followed
34 Q-RS P-N3
35 Q-R3 R-Bl
So as to be able to attack the White Queen by . . . B-B l .
36 R-KBl B-Bl
37 Q·R4 BxB
38 QxB QxP
39 QxNP B-R6
Now mate can no longer be avoided : 40 R-B2 QxRch, etc .
40 R-QNl
Desperation-and he may have been short of time .
40 . . . B-N7 mate
Black won by esthetic play and by making good use of the attacking
chances at his disposal . White managed to maintain the balance for a
long time , but his opponent's dynamic play on both wings with the
great complications resulting from it posed problems which were , in
the long run , too much for White . A single misjudgment brought him
rapidly to a hopeless position .
Game JO
The modified Paulsen System of the Sicilian

The Scheveningen System of the Sicilian
The meaning of White's N-QN3 in the Sicilian
A move with more than one goal in general a more successful move
The struggle for c4
Penetrating the opponent's position
Using all pieces near the opponent's King with maximum efficiency
Strategy vs. Tactics

In each chess game the player's thought must be concentrated on
two entirely different areas of endeavor : (a) strategy , the general plan
to be followed for a certain number of moves to attain a specified end,
and (b) tactics , the handling of the needs of the immediate position .
With strategy the player defines his general aims and gives himself an
objective toward which to work ; with tactics he tries to make the most
of the opportunities offered by each successive move of his opponent.
Although the characteristics of the position which arises from a
given opening may indicate a general overall strategy , a chess game
can usually be divided into various sections , each one of which has its
own strategic aim . The more clearly the player can define his chang
ing aim, the more likely he is to attain it.
In each succeeding position and especially in positions with certain
types of indications, such as the loose piece, the double threat , or an
unsafe position of the hostile King, the player must ask himself what
tactical opportunities and what tactical pitfalls are offered to him and
to his opponent . He must consider to some extent not only the result of
each plausible reply, but in wild positions he would also profit by
looking into implausible moves--for such a position sometimes offers
hidden tactical resources.
Annotated master games contain analyses of numerous lines which
could have been chosen by the players at various points in the game
but which were not . Such analyses could have been the consequence
of prescribed strategy or tactics and might help one understand why
134
Sicilian Defense: Scheveningen Variation 135
certain lines were rejected and why certain lines would have been
preferable to the one chosen .
Sicilian Defense - Schevenlngen Variation

Candidates' Match - Leningrad - 1 974
Anatoly Karpov - USSR Boris Spassky - USSR

1 P-K4 P-QB4
2 N-KB3 P-Q3
3 P-Q4 PxP
4 NxP N-KB3
5 N-QB3 P-K3
The position is now identical with that of the Peters-Larsen game

and remains so through White ' s next move .
6 B-K2
Another possibility is the aggressive 6 P-KN4 , the idea of which is

to continue with P-N5 in order to disturb the normal position of the
Black K-side pieces and to bring them into disorder at the cost of
weakening the White K-side . But Karpov is a positional player who
does not like this type of aggressive continuation in the opening . He
prefers the strategic approach by White , which consists of a K-side
attack prepared systematically, the defense of the White Q-side , and
tJ:ie prevention of Black ' s center attack by . . . P-Q4 and . . . P-K4.
6 • • . B-K2
7 0-0 0-0
8 P-B4
As in the Peters-Larsen game , this is essential to White 's strategy of

building up a K-side attack . Usually it is preceded by the preparatory
moves K-R l and/or B-K3 , but in this game those moves are not
necessary at this point since the Black QN has not yet been developed
to c6.
8 . . • N-B3
From the classical Paulsen Variation, described in Game 9, the

136 Game 10
modified Paulsen Variation has developed. The main difference be

tween them is that in the classical Paulsen Black ' s QN is developed to
d7 , whereas in the modified Paulsen it is played to c6.
On c6 the Black QN now presses against d4, which is the more
significant because of the open diagonal from b6 to f2 .
When in 1 923 Maroczy developed a promising White system to
combat the modified Paulsen system , it was called the Scheveningen
Variation because it was first played at the Scheveningen tournament
held that year . The Maroczy system is characterized by moving the
White King to h I and by pushing the White KBP to its 4th square
before developing White' s QB .
9 B-K3
Rather than move his King to h I , Karpov protects his KN a second

time and closes the b6/f2 diagonal to a certain extent .
9 • • • B-Q2
Also playable at this point is 9 . . P-K4 with the idea of obtaining

.
more influence in the center , but after 10 PxP PxP 1 1 N-B5 White still
maintains some initiative . Or White can safely answer 9 . . . P-K4
with 1 0 N-N3 . But 1 0 N-B3 would cost a Pawn after 1 0 . . . PxP 1 1
BxP Q-N3ch 1 2 K-R l QxP.
10 N-N3
In many variations of the Sicilian this is an important move by

which White accomplishes several objectives : (a) he anticipates a
possible . . . P-K4 by moving away his KN ; (b) he softens Black's

pressure on d4 , for although this pressure is not so important right
now , it could be increased with a move such as . . . Q-N3 , made after
careful preparation ; and (c) he takes the force out of the maneuver
. . . N-QR4-B5 , which can be very disagreeable for White in the
classical variations of the Sicilian .
A more aggressive way to proceed at this point is 1 0 Q-K l in order
to bring the Queen to the K-side . That variation might continue
1 0 . . . R-B l 1 1 P-N4 N-QR4 1 2 R-Ql N-B5 1 3 B-B l followed by
14 Q-N3 . But Karpov prefers not to be aggressive in the opening .
10 . • • P-QR4
This move , frequently played under such circumstances , threatens

to advance Black' s QRP to a3 in order to weaken White' s Q-side pawn
structure .
1 1 P-QR4
Black is thus prevented from carrying out the above plan . But to
prevent this White had to permit the creation of a weakness on b4, on
which square Black will immediately install a Knight .
11 • • • N-QNS
From b4 the Black Knight exerts pressure on White 's QBP and on
the vital 45-square with the result that White now has somewhat less
freedom of movement.
12 B-B3
As was also the case in the Peters-Larsen game , the White Bishop
now presses against d5 and increases the mobility of the White Queen .
True , this Bishop no longer controls c4, but that is not so important
now . Since Black's QN is already on b5 , the sometimes common
Black maneuver . . . QN-R4-B5 is now out of the question .
12 • • • B-B3
This is inconsistent. Black invites the White Knight to return to d4 ,

138 Game 10
but because he wants to play . . . P-K4, Black must then play . . . g6

in order to keep the Knight from going to f5 .
Correct here was 1 2 . . . P-K4 so as to be able to continue with
. . . P-Q4 without giving White the opportunity of answering P-K5 ,
in which case his KP is still supported by his KBP. Black' s plan , after
preparation , would be . . . P-K4 ; . . . PxP ; . . . P-Q4 .
After 1 2 . . . P-K4, with the possible continuation 1 3 K-R l ( to
avoid an eventual . . Q-N3) 1 3 . . . B-B3 1 4 PxP (after 1 4 Q-K2
.
PxP 15 BxP P-Q4 could follow, and Black' s position is satisfactory ,

for another function of Black ' s QN is to support the advance of
Black's QP to d5) 14 . . . PxP 1 5 Q-K2 , eventually to be followed by
QR-Q I and N-Q5 .
13 N-Q4
White '§ QN now returns to d4 to attack Black's QB and to discour

age Black from playing . . . P-K4 , which could now be answered by
N-B5 .
13 • • • P-KN3?
To prevent White 's Knight from going to f5 after a possible . . .

P-K4 . However , the text results in a weakening of Black' s K-position
which may later become important. Therefore, 1 3 . . . Q-Q2 fol
lowed by 14 . . . KR-B l would have been preferable .
14 R-Bl!
A good move with several ideas behind it : (a) it affords the QBP
additional protection; (b) it offers the possibility of Q-KB l or of

doubling the Rooks along the KB-file; and (c) it also creates the
possibility of the White KR's going to d2 and exerting additional
pressure along the Q-file and , after preparation the possibility of
doubling Rooks on the Q-file .
14 • • • P-K4
The realization of Black's strategic idea of playing . . . P-K4 in

order to exert more influence in the center and to have a greater
opportunity of defending against a K-side attack.
In general , in all modern strategic concepts of the Scheveningen
Black cannot sufficiently deploy his forces without this key move .
15 NxB
Without permitting this exchange Black could not realize his much
desired . . . P-Q4-and Black is very eager for the chance to make
this move-because the Pawn in the center will give him greater
freedom .
15 • • • PxN
After 1 5 . . . NxN the reply 1 6 P-B5 is very strong, for then

Black's QP and his Q4-square are both incurably weak , and White
gets attacking chances on the K-wing .
16 PxP
This opens the KB-file for White and saddles Black with two
isolated Pawns . For the moment this is not too important , but as soon
as White gets a grip on either c4 or c5 , Black will be in a difficult
situation , as will be seen later .
16 • • • PxP
Black does not get to play his . . . P-Q4 after all , but he has
obtained equality in the center in another way , for his KP now controls
the center just as much as does White' s KP.
140 Game 10
17 Q-KBl
This move (a) clears the Q-file so that White can station his Rooks
on it , (b) doubles on the KB-file with all the implications that such a
move has , and (c) could lead to an eventual Q-B4. We have already
noted that c4 could be very important in exploiting the Black Q-side
weaknesses .
Black is already in a difficult position . His situation is bad for (a) his
QRP and his QBP are vulnerable ; (b) White ' s attack on f7 could be
very difficult to parry , given the possibility of B-KR6 (driving away
the Rook) and the support White 's KB or Queen would afford if either
should come to c4 ; and ( c) White action along the Q-file as well as the
KB-file could become awkward for Black.
At this point White has several promising possibilities, and Black
must keep all of them in mind.
17 • • • Q-Bl
A good move , for it removes the Queen from the Q-file and enables
Black to answer a possible 1 8 Q-B4 with 1 8 . . . Q-R3 , thus negating
White' s control of c4.
18 P-R3
To prevent Black from playing . . . N-N5 , although this would not

be effective immediately , for if Black answers some White move
other than the text by 1 8 . . . N-N5 , then 19 BxN QxB 20 B-R6 .
18 • • • N-Q2?
A positional error, for it leads directly to White ' s occupation of c4

by his Queen .
1 ) Better is 1 8 . . K-N2 , to prevent an eventual B-R6, and 1 9

.
. . . P-R4 , to be able to follow u p with 20 . . . N-R2 without

giving White control over g4 . If pressure against f7 should be
come too strong, Black could continue with . . . P-KB4, although
such a risky move on Black' s K-side should be very carefully
planned .
'
2) Another possible try for Black is 1 8 . . . Q-K3 , making use of
the fact that White cannot play 1 9 B-K2 at once because of
1 9 . . . NxBP. Black could make an interesting sacrifice of the
Exchange with . . . KR-Q l -Q5 , as proposed by Tai .
3) Still another idea is 1 8 . . . R-N l , to answer 1 9 Q-B4 with
1 9 . . . N-K I and 20 . . . N-Q3 .
19 B-N4!
This opens the KB-file for White . It is curious to note how strong
this move is . Its aim is simply to enable White to take possession of c4,
as will become clear from the next few moves . It also prevents
. . . B-B4 by pinning the protecting N/2 . Were 19 . . . B-B4 pos
sible , it would not only stop White 's aggressive plans but also give
Black considerable possibilities for counterattack . For example, if
instead 1 9 . QR-Q l B-B4 20 BxB NxB 21 Q-B4 (but circumstances
have changed so that c4 is no longer so important) 2 1 . . . N-K3
followed by 22 . . . N-Q5 or 22 . . . N-B5 .
White does not play 19 Q-B4 at once , since it would be answered by
1 9 . . . Q-R3 . The creation of a safe harbor Jor his Queen on c4 is a
long-term objective for White .
White is now threatening 20 R-Q l , winning material , for if
20 . . . R-Q l 2 1 RxP .
19 • • • P-R4
Keres terms this a rather risky move in a bad position. The text
certainly represents a weakening of Black' s K-side , and if White' s
Knight could come over to that side , which i t eventually does , Black
would be finished .
142 Game 10
Preferable is 1 9 . . . Q-B2, which at least avoids weakening the

Black K-position .
20 BxN
Tai suggests the interesting sacrifice 20 BxP ! ? PxB 2 1 Q-K2 , but

Karpov prefers to work with positional weapons .
20 • • • QxB
Now an immediate 2 1 B-R6 would be answered by 2 1 . . . B-B4 .

So . . .
21 Q-B4
White's maneuverings are crowned with great strategic success . He

threatens both 22 QR-KB l and 22 B-R6 , and then Black cannot
prevent 23 RxP, which demolishes the entire Black position. This
shows among other things the great importance of having the White
Queen on c4.
21 • • • B-RS
The best way to parry White ' s threats . Black has prevented the
doubling of the White Rooks on the KB-file .
22 R-Q2 Q-K2
Perhaps accepting a further mutilation of his pawn structure by

22 . Q-K3 23 QxQ PxQ would have been Black' s best chance .
. .
But the text is a neat trick . If White now plays the obvious 23 B-B5
then there follows 23 . . . Q-N4 (White' s R/2 is now attacked) 24
R-Q7 NxP 25 R-KB 1 N-K6 26 BxN QxBch 27 K-R l K-R l 28 R/7xP
RxR 29 QxR R-KN l , and while White's position looks very threaten
ing , he cannot do much and will have to be careful on his own K-wing
because of threats such as . . . B-N6 and . . . B-B5 .
23 R-KB I !
Now 24 B-B5 i s a real threat .

23 • • • KR-Ql
This weakens Black 's vulnerable f7 , but 23 . . . QR-Q l would not

have been much better . Then 24 B-B5 would not have won material
because of 24 . . . Q-N2 , but White could have proceeded as in the
game with 24 N-N l ! with the double threat of 25 B-B5 and 25 P-B 3 . It
appears that there is no adequate defense for Black at this point .
24 N-Nl!
This move serves a number of important purposes : (a) it makes

possible P-B 3 , driving the Black Knight from its powerful outpost ; (b)
it supports the R/2 , which frees the Bishop for other play, especially
for B-B5 ; and (c) it is the first step toward bringing the Knight to KB3
via d2 and into the attack.
24 • • • Q-N2
Anticipating a later B-B5 , and perhaps Black still hopes to play

. . . Q-R3 eventually . However, this woulc;J be possible only after
Black' s KBP gets further protection .
25 K-R2!
A mysterious-looking move which shows that White is in no hurry

and will prepare his attack very carefully and in a leisurely manner . It
actually offers White possibilities , none of which need be a part of his
direct plan . It threatens 26 P-KN3 , after which the Black Bishop has
no satisfactory retreat (if 26 . . . B-K2 , then 27 QxPch, and after
144 Game 10
26 . . . RxRch 27 NxR B-Q l 28 N-B3 , and White ' s attack is speeded

up) .
25 • • • K-N2
In order to be able to bring the Bishop back to f6 if necessary .
26 P-B3 N-R3
The Knight has nowhere else to go . From being a mighty restraining

force on White' s actions, it is now relegated to a position where its
only function is to guard c5 .
27 R-K2!
White makes room for his Knight on d2 and prevents the simplify
ing liquidation of Rooks, which might have facilitated the Black
defense .
27 • • • R-KBl
28 N-Q2 B-Ql
Anticipating 29 N-B3 with a simultaneous attack on Black 's KP and

Bishop . As will soon be seen , 28 . . . B-K2 would have saved an
other tempo , but this is no longer of much importance . The battle is
strategically lost , for Black' s Pawns are weak and his pieces are not
very actively posted ; White is pressing against f7 , and with open lines
for his Rooks and Bishop and accessible squares for his Knight he can
steadily increase his hold on the Black position . It is only a matter of
time .
29 N-B3
Attacking Black 's KP, which will have to be defended .
29 • • • P-B3
This not only defends the KP but also prevents the penetration of the
White Knight via g5 .
If 29 . . . B-B 3 , then 30 R/2-KB2 followed by 3 1 N-N5 .
30 R-Q2
Threatening 3 1 Q-K6 and 32 R-Q7ch .
30 . . . B-K2
31 Q-K6
Threatening 32 R-Q7 .
31 • • • QR-Ql
32 RxR
If now 32 . . . RxR 33 NxP decides : 33 . . . Q-B2 (33 . . . PxN 34

R-B7ch , etc . ) 34 Q-B7ch K-R l 35 QxB PxN (35 . . . QxQ 36
NxPch ; w,ith 35 . . . QxNch 36 QxQ PxQ 37 R-B6, Black could have
prolonged the hopeless struggle) 36 R-B 8ch RxR 37 QxRch K-R2 38
Q-R6ch K-N l 39 QxPch, etc ..
32 • . . BxR
33 R-Ql N-Nl
34 B-BS R-Rl
35 RxB Resigns
After 35 . . . RxR, White replies 36 B-K7 and the Black King is

unable to withstand the combined force of White' s Queen , Knight ,
and Bishop : 36 . . . R-K l 37 QxPch, and now
1 ) 37 . . . K-N l 38 QxPch K-R l 39 B-B6ch followed by mate ;

146 Game 10
2) 37 . . . K-R2 38 Q-B7ch K-R3 39 B-N5 mate ;
3) 37 . . . K-R3 38 N-R4 R-N I 39 N-B5ch K-R2 40 Q-B7ch

K-R l 41 B-B6ch, etc .
White won this game because he knew superbly well how to

combine strategy and tactics . His strategy consisted of two important
elements : strengthening the attacking possibilities against the Black
K-position and at the same time keeping Black ' s Q-wing under control
in such a way that Black could never get counterchances . Black's
positional error strongly increased his difficulties and enabled White
to finish the game with several forceful moves .
Game 1 1
The Najdorf Variation of the Sicilian

A White K-side attack vs. Black's plans against the other wing
A temporary pawn sacrifice by White with unfortunate consequences
for the uncastled Black King
The sacrifice to open an important file and to give access to a square
which will lead to a dynamic attack
Luring the opponent's Queen into an apparently strong but in reality
inactive position
A marvelous combined attack and defense by a strongly posted Bishop
Double sacrifice of the Exchange to keep lines open and to bring pieces
into a commanding position
Careful prevention of the consolidation of the defender's position
The Initiative
One of the important advantages one can get in the course of a chess
game is the initiative . A player can often afford to give up some
material to attain it and can sometimes continue to sacrifice to main
tain it .
The target of such initiative is normally the opponent's King , which
is usually continually threatened and given no respite by the attacker' s
various pieces. The player with the initiative �annot allow his oppo
nent to intercept the attacking lines by interposing pieces unless those
pieces can be eliminated through exchange or sacrifice and the enemy
King thus drawn more deeply into the mating net .
The order in which the attacker makes his moves is of paramount
importance . If he has sacrificed to get the initiative, under no circum
stances can he afford to lose it, for he might then find himself in a
position where his opponent' s material superiority would count .
Sicilian Defense - Najdorf Variation

FIDE Zonal Tournament - Sio Paul�� Brazil - 1 972
147
148 Game 1 1
Ernesto Rodriguez - Peru Miguel Quinteros - Argentina

1 P-K4 P-QB4
2 N-KB3 P-Q3
3 P-Q4 PxP
4 NxP N-KB3
S N-QB3
We have already seen this sequence of moves in the Karpov

Korchnoi Dragon Defense in Game 8 . But now the present game
branches off into another system.
s . . . P-QR3
As already remarked, this move prevents the White Bishop and

Knights from going to b5 and prepares for a possible . . . P-QN4 later .
Black postpones the development of his QN which , in the course of
this game, will go to d7 .
6 B-NS
The so-called Najdorf Variation . By the text White brings his QB to

a good square and makes a Black K-side fianchetto positionally
unwise, since 6 . . . P-KN3 7 BxN PxB would give Black an isolated
QP and a doubled Pawn on his K-side .
In many other variations of the Sicilian and particularly in those in
which Black has already fianchettoed his KB , the White QB goes to its
K3 to support the Q4-square . This was the case in the Karpov
Korchnoi Dragon .
6 . . . P-K3
With this move Black avoids a doubled Pawn after a possible BxN
and is now able to develop his KB .
7 P-B4
White endeavors to make full use of his superiority in space to build

Sicilian Defense: Najdorf Variation 149
up a strong center, which may lead in the middle game to a K-side

attack , often begun by P-K5 .
7 • • • QN-Q2
With the text Black prefers the positional struggle in harmony with
the aims of the Sicilian: pressure along the QB-file by . . . Q-B2
and . . . QR-QB 1 and the fianchetto of the QB after . . . .
P-QN4.
Had Black played 7 . . . N-B3 instead, then 8 NxN PxN 9 P-K5 with
advantage to White, for then 9 . . . PxP 10 QxQch KxQ 1 1 PxP ,
and Black loses at least a Pawn after 1 1 . . . P-R3 1 2 BxNch PxB 1 3
PxP .
At this point 7 . . . Q-N3 is sometimes played . This leads to an
interesting gambit after 8 Q-Q2 QxP 9 N-N3 . It is debatable whether
this line is advantageous for White or for Black .
8 Q-K2
The role of the Queen at e2 will become more evident at Black's 9th
and l Oth moves .
More often 8 Q-B3 is played llt this point. It has the advantage over
the text of enabling the Queen to participate in a K-side attack more
rapidly by moving either to g3 or h3 . On the other hand, at f3 the
Queen may come into line with Black 's Bb7 (where it will be posted
after . . . P-QN4) ; also on f3 the Queen does not constitute a direct
threat to Black' s King .
8 • • • Q-B2
Black establishes control over the QB-file, unpins his KN, and
strengthens his control over e5 so that White cannot successfully push
his KP.
Leading to the same position is 8 . . B-K2 9 0-0-0 Q-B2 . In this
.
variation Black could also play 9 . . . 0-0, but in that case White gets
the K-side attack he wants with 10 P-KN4, although it is not certain
that this will decide the game .
F
150 Game 1 1
9 0-0-0
The logical continuation because White wishes to attack on the

K-side . On his Sth move White had already decided to castle on the
Q-side , and this must give best attacking chances . In general , this is
the case when the opposing players castle on different wings. If Black
castles short, he has the half-open QB-file for an attack against
White' s King , but much later .
For 9 P-KN4 , see the following Savon-Mecking game .
9 • • • B-K2
Black could have played 9 . . P-N4, but he probably feared the

.
sacrifice 10 N-Q5 PxN 1 1 PxP dis eh B-K2 12 N-B6, and White gets a
tremendous attack for the sacrificed piece . Whether or not it is correct,
it poses difficult problems for the defender . Here we see the role of the
Queen on e2 . If after the move mentioned Black continues 1 2 . . .
N-QN l , then 1 3 BxN PxB 1 4 P-KN3 NxN 1 5 PxN . True, White has
lost a piece in the process , but his Pc6 is strong and neither of Black's
Bishops can do much , so it is difficult to say which side stands bet
ter .
10 P-KN4
A very aggressive move . Under certain circumstances White could

eventually continue with BxN and P-KN5 .
10 . . . P-R3?
The beginning of a maneuver of dubious value . Black probably had

nothing better than castling , after which White would get exactly what
he wanted-an opportunity to attack the Black castled King .
Because of White' s Q/K2 , 1 0 . . . P-N4 would not be quite suffi
cient in this position because of 1 1 B-N2 B-N2 12 P-K5 ! , and if
1 2 . . . PxP 1 3 PxP NxKP? 14 BxB QxB 15 QxN , winning a piece . If
1 0 . . . P-N4 1 I B-N2 R-QN I I 2 P-K5 PxP I 3 N-B6( ! ) , also with
advantage to White .
1 1 B-R4
Not good is I I BxN, for it simplifies the position and makes things
easier for Black . The exchange can be considered here only if it can be
followed by P-N5 , and that is not possible at this point . The attacker
should not exchange pieces without a definite reason .
11 . . . P-KN4?
Because Black's King is still in the center of the board and not
castled Q-side , the text is not very satisfactory , although it has been
played in similar positions. However, Black has been playing for just
this setup , hoping for a favorable continuation .
At this point, I I . . . 0-0 would not be recommendable either , since
with 1 2 P-N5 White can force the opening of a file for attack . Nor is I I
. . P-QN4 I 2 B-N2 satisfactory for Black for the reasons given under
.
Black ' s l Oth move . No move is satisfactory for Black in this position ,
but the text move turns out to be the worst . "
12 PxP N-R2
This is the point of Black ' s maneuver-with it he wins back his

Pawn . However , White now has a multitude of sacrifices at his
disposal .
After I 2 . . . PxP I 3 BxP Black would simply lose his Pawn .
13 N-BS!
152 Game 1 1
A fine sacrifice , based on the fact that Black' s KP i s overworked

since it must guard d5 and f5 at the same time ; and to a lesser extent
because of the fact that if Black accepts the sacrifice , he opens the
K-file for White .
13 . . . PxN
Practically forced . Let us examine what happens if he does not

accept :
1 ) 1 3 . . . NxP 1 4 NxB KxN 1 5 B-N3 , and White ' s position is

superior, for he is threatening 1 6 BxPch; 1 5 . . . P-K4 does not
work because of 16 N-Q5ch ;
2) 1 3 . . . PxP 1 4 NxB PxB 1 5 NxB RxN , and White stands
better because the Black King cannot find a safe place and Black's
QP is weak ;
3) 1 3 . . . B-B l 1 4 NxRP, and White is two Pawns up and has a
beautiful position;
4) 1 3 . . . BxPch 1 4 BxB NxB 1 5 NxPch , and White is a Pawn
up in a wonderful position .
14 N-QS
In return for the sacrificed Knight White gets dynamic attacking

possibilities by occupying the outpost on d5 and, on the following

move , by opening the K-file .
14 • • • Q-R4
The most active place for the Queen, for he is now attacking
White' s QRP .
However, also to be considered is 14 . . . Q-Q 1 to protect the
Black KB . There could follow 1 5 KPxP PxP ( 1 5 . . . K-B 1 1 6 P-B6)
16 B-N3 N-B4 ( 1 6 . . . K-B l ? 17 NxB QxN 1 8 BxP! or 16 . . . N-K4
17 BxN PxB 1 8 QxP P-B3 19 N-B7ch) 17 P-B6 or 17 NxB QxN
1 8 QxQch followed by 19 BxPch.
15 KPxP
Threatening mate .
15 • • • N-K4
16 NxB KxN
After 16 . . . QxP 17 P-N6 N-N4 1 8 BxN PxB 19 P-N7 the
one-piece sally on the Q-wing is not sufficient to counter White ' s
powerful attack, which leads to material advantage .
17 B-Kl
The obvious 17 P-N6 dis eh would be answered by 17 . . . N-N4,

and White has no way to continue the attack . The variation chosen by
White is a clear combination of attack and def ense. against the intru
sion of the Black Queen .
154 Game 1 1
17 • • • QxP
18 B-B3
With the deadly threat of 1 9 BxN PxB 20 QxPch, etc . It is important

for White to maintain his Pawn on g5 for a few moves to prevent Black
both from consolidating his position and from protecting his Ne5
by . . . P-B 3 , which would completely stop White's attack .
Instead of the text , 1 8 B-N4 is tempting, but after 1 8 . . . Q-R8ch
19 K-Q2 QxP 20 B-B3 Q-N4 White ' s attack comes to an end .
18 • • • R-Ql
Preventing 19 BxN , for if White now answers 19 BxN, then

1 9 . . . Q-R8ch 20 K-Q2 PxB dis eh ! and Black wins .
19 P-N3!
Another very strong move which prevents Black from checking on

a 1 . White again threatens 20 BxN . Here we can clearly see the
function of White's Pg5 . Without it simply 19 . . . P-B 3 would
follow , and Black should be practically out of danger .
19 • • • N/2xP!
A very fine defense. Now after 20 BxN PxB 2 1 QxPch Black saves
himself by 2 1 . . . B-K3 , and if 22 PxB ? , Black wins by 22 . . . Q
R6ch . With the text Black threatens 20 . . . P-B3 with consolidation .
20 R-QS!
The threat of 2 1 R-R5 , winning the Queen , forces Black to play

2 1 . . . P-QR4 , and then 2 1 RxNch comes into the picture .
20 • • • P-QR4
To prevent 2 1 R-R5 , winning the Queen . And 20 . . . Q-R6ch

does not change the situation after 2 1 K-N l .
21 RxNch
Now after 2 1 . . . PxR 22 QxPch
I ) 22 . . . K-Q2 23 B-N5 mate ;

2) 22 . . . K-B I 23 Q-R8ch K-K2 24 B-B6ch is decisive ;
3) 22 . . . B-K3 23 Q-B5ch R-Q3 24 P-B6ch K-Q2 25 B-N5ch
R-B 3 26 R-Q l ch K-B2 27 B-K5ch, etc . ;
4) 22 . . . N-K3 23 B-N5 B-Q2 (Black has hardly anything else)
24 PxN
4a) 24 . . . BxP 25 Q-B5ch R-Q3 26 R-Q l (26 Q-B7ch is
also possible) 26 . . . R-Q I 27 B-K5 , etc . ;
4b) 24 . . . BxB 25 PxP dis eh KxP 26 Q-B6ch K-K I 27
R-K l ch K-Q2 28 Q-K6ch K-B2 29 B-K5ch , etc .
21 • • . K-8 1
22 R-K3
Now White threatens 23 P-R4 , driving the Black Knight to an

inactive post .
22 • • . P-Q4
In order to be able to play . . . N-K5 and thus block the K-file .

If 22 . . . P-R5 23 P-R4 N-R2 is forced , since 23 . . . PxP 24 PxN
does not give Black any real chances . If 23 . . . N-R2 24 B-KN2
(with equal material) , White' s position is overwhelming . His pieces
156 Game 1 1
are active , whereas Black 's pieces are more o r less paralyzed .
Black' s counterattack has come to a dead end .
23 Q-NS
White now threatens 24 Q-B5ch followed by 25 Q-Q4 . So Black

has nothing better than to close the K-file and at the same time prevent
24 Q-B5ch , but this appears to be inadequate .
23• • • N-KS
24 RxN
White does not need his Rook for the mating attack so he sacrifices
the Exchange, eliminating the Black Knight and thus clearing the way
for his Queen .
24• • • Px:R
25 Q-BSch
If now 25 . . . K-K I , then 26 B-N5ch B-Q2 27 B-KB6 wins

immediately .
25 • • • K-Nl
26 Q-KS
And if 26 . . . K-B 1 27 Q-R8ch K-K2 28 B-B6ch wins .
26 • • • P-B3
27 B-B4ch Resigns
For White mates in a few moves : 27 . . . K-R2 28 Q-K7ch, etc .
Black lost the game because of an unfavorable maneuver which

enabled White , at the price of one piece , to make a number of strong
aggressive threats which , interspersed with pretty sacrifices ; brought
Black into a hopeless position . Remarkable is the fact that within a few
moves White was able both to paralyze Black' s attack and to breathe
new life into his own attack .
Game l2
Typical Black development i n the Sicilian

Vigorous play by Black along the QB-file
The indirect attack
The sham sacrifice
The surprising combinative tum
The great value of the Exchange in the endgame
Pawn sacrifice to open a file for activity
Restricting movements of the opponent's pieces
Discovered check and the mating net
Winning a Game through Small Advantages

Some chess games are won by overwhelming attacks which lead to
direct mate in the middle game . But it is not always possible to reach
such a mate , the more so in games between masters , whose defensive
powers are considerable .
An alternate method of procedure is to attain some sort of advan
tage , material or otherwise , during the opening or middle game and
then to reduce through exchange the number of pieces on the board so
that the advantage gained weighs more heavily than it did when most
of the pieces were on the board in order that this advantage can
eventually lead to victory .
There are various types of small advantages . The winning player
may have stronger pieces , a material advantage such as R vs . B + P or
two light pieces vs . R + P; in some cases he has a more active Rook
than his opponent , in others the Bishop pair; he may have a more
advanced Pawn or his Pawns may be posted in such a way that he has
greater chances to queen first ; in an ending where both sides have a
King and the same number of Pawns , his King may be in a better
position ; or one of the players may be able to force his opponent into
Zugzwang .
Given the fact that many games must be decided in the endgame
rather than in the middle game, it is always desirable to keep in mind
158
the endgame that could arise from the middle game, especially with
respect to pawn formation and K-position , and to work toward achiev
ing a favorable endgame through a judicious exchange of pieces .
Sicilian Defense - Najdorf Variation

lnterzonal - Petropolls, Brazil - 1 973
Vladimir Savon - USSR Henrique Mecking - Brazil

1 P-K4 P-QB4
2 N-KB3 P-Q3
3 P-Q4 PxP
4 NxP N-KB3
S N-QB3 P-QR3
6 B-PNS P-K3
7 P-B4 QN-Q2
8 Q-K2 Q-B2
Up to this point the moves are the same as those in Game 1 1 .
9 P-KN4
This is good for a later K-side attack and consistent since White ' s
K B is to b e developed to g2 ; for that purpose 9 P-KN3 would not be
good since it blocks the free movement of White ' s QB .
Another system is 9 0-0-0 , which clears the K-file and prepares for
the sacrifice N-Q5 or N-B5 . In the Bronstein-Gheorghiu game , played
in the same round as this one , there followed 9 . . P-N4 1 0 P-QR3
.
R-QN I ? (this error enabled White to make the sacrifice which fol
lows) 1 1 N-Q5 PxN 1 2 PxP dis eh B-K2 1 3 N-B6 N-N3 14 BxN PxB
1 5 NxR with a bad position for Black .
9 • • • P-N4
Consistent with the Black strategy in the Sicilian . Black ' s QB will
be developed to b7 , his QR to c8, and his QNP will be ready to
advance in order to drive away the White Knight at c3 .
10 P-QR3
160 Game 12
It is customary not to allow . . . P-N5 as long as White ' s QN has no

good square to which to move .
Again after 1 0 0-0-0 P-N5 White could sacrifice with 1 1 N-Q5
Px.N 1 2 PxP dis eh B-K2 1 3 N-B6 N-N3 , but it is not sure that this
compensates for the sacrificed piece .
10 • • • B-K2
1 1 B-N2 B-N2
Regular Sicilian development .
12 0-0-0
An immediate 12 P-K5 does not work, for after 12 . . . Px.P 13 Px.P

NxKP 14 BxB QxB , White' s KR is en prise . But after the text 1 3
P-K5 is a threat .
12 • • •
Continuing the Black strategy of commanding the QB-file in the

Sicilian . This could be particularly effective since White has castled
long.
Black must feel certain that White cannot afford to play 1 3 P-K5 ,
which is, however, not so easy to meet . Some variations :
1 3 P-K5
1) 13 Px.P
. . .
l a) 14 BxB QxB 1 5 PxP N-Q4

l a l ) 16 N-K4 NxP and Black can hold his own , for 1 7 BxB
is answered by 17 . . . QxB ;
l a2) 1 6 B-Q2 NxN 1 7 BxN BxP ! and Black stands best ;
l b) 14 PxP BxB 1 5 PxN PxP ( 1 5 . . . BxR 1 6 PxB is risky
for Black) 1 6 QxB PxB , and as compensation for the Pawn
White has more mobility and the Black King is not safe .
2) 1 3 . . . BxB 1 4 PxN PxP ( 1 4 . . . BxR is risky : 1 5 PxP
R-KN l 1 6 BxB KxB 1 7 RxB) 1 5 QxB PxB 1 6 P-B5, and although
White is a Pawn down he has counterchances .
We may conclude that White should have played 1 3 P-K5 . It does

not lead to any advantage , but especially in variations l b) and 2)
White gets good chances for the sacrificed Pawn .
13 B-R4(?)
With the intention of playing B-N3 and eventually P-K5 . But the
White Bishop is now a loose piece, that is , one which is unprotected
by another White piece , and it is indirectly attacked by Black's KB .
White must continually take into consideration the possibility of a
direct attack by Black's KB if the Black Knight should move in such a
way as to capture some other White piece or Pawn . Then White might
have to deal with that move , and meanwhile his B/4 would be en
prise .
The main theme of the game for the next five moves is governed by
(a) the possibility of P-K5 for White, which we have already explored
under 1 2 . . . R-QB l ; and (b) the possibility for Black of
1 3 . . . NxKP, which can be illustrated by the following variations :
162 Game 12
1 3 . . . NxKP
I ) 1 4 BxB ? NxN (otherwise Black is a piece down) 1 5 PxN BxB

( 1 5 . . . KxB ? 1 6 N-B5ch , etc . ) 1 6 QxB KxB , and Black has won a
Pawn ;
2) 1 4 NxN BxB ? 1 5 NxKP ! PxN 1 6 NxPch , etc . ;
3) 1 4 NxN BxN 1 5 BxQB BxB 1 6 P-N5 ! (threatening to win the
Bishop by 1 7 N-B 3)
3a) 16 . . . Q-B4 (to answer 1 7 N-B 3 by 1 7 . . . B-B7) 1 7
R-Q2 and wins ( 1 7 . . . P-R3 1 8 Q-R5 B-B7 1 9 NxKP or
1 7 . . . P-Q4 1 8 B -N2 P-R3 19 Q-R5 or 1 9 NxKP) ;
3b) 1 6 . . . N-B4 1 7 B-Q3 P-R3 1 8 N-B5 PxP 1 9 NxQPch
QxN 20 BxPch .
The last variation is a bit tricky . If White plays 1 8 Q-R5 ? (instead of

1 8 N-B5) then 1 8 . . . P-K4 ! , and the White Knight cannot afford to
move because of 19 . . . NxBch 20 RxN ? ? QxP mate .
From these variations it can be seen that the time for this sham
sacrifice is not yet ripe .
13 . • . Q-BS!
This is a very strong move . After the exchange of Queens , White 's
KNP is threatened , and the possibility of a successful sham sacrifice
with . . . NxKP increases . We have seen in the analysis under 1 3
B-R4 that the White Queen played an important part in the refutation
of 1 3 . . . NxKP.
14 QxQ(?)
Not the best. Protecting White 's KNP by 1 4 P-R3 or 1 4 B-B3

should be considered ; for example ,
1 ) 1 4 P-R3 QxQ 1 5 N/4xQ

l a) 1 5 . . . NxKP? (Black is not yet ready for this move) 1 6
BxN QBxB 1 7 NxB BxB 1 8 NxPch ;
l b) 1 5 . . . N-B4 1 6 BxN PxB , and although Black has
some initiative the White position is certainly defensible;
2) 1 4 B-B3 offers exactly the same possibilities as 1 4 P-R3 .
14 • • • RxQ
15 B-B3
As far as what happens in the game , 1 5 P-R3 would have accom

plished the same purpose , but White hopes to maintain the threat of
P-N5 in order to displace the Black KN and then his B/3 controls h5 .
The text does not lead to control . Preferable was 1 5 BxN or 1 5 P-N5 .
In either case Black seizes the initiative .
15 • • • N-B4
Attacking White ' s KP a third time .

This position deserves serious analysis . Let us consider 1 ) 1 6
P-K5 ? , 2 ) 1 6 KR-K 1 , and 3 ) 1 6 B-K2 (the continuation of the game
itself) :
1 ) 1 6 P-K5 ? PxP 1 7 PxP ( 1 7 BxB NxB 1 8 PxP NxP winning a

Pawn for Black) 1 7 . . . BxB 1 8 PxN ( 1 8 NxB NxP again win
ning a Pawn for Black) 1 8 . . BxQR ! and wins ( 1 9 RxB PxP or
.
19 PxB RxN/5) ;
2 ) 1 6 KR-K l KNxKP (at last the indirect threat , which u p to now
did not work , comes into play)
2a) 17 BxB NxN 1 8 PxN ( 1 8 BxB NxR) 1 8 . . . BxB 1 9 NxB
KxB , and Black has a plus Pawn ;
2b) 1 7 BxN BxQB , and White loses a Pawn in all variations ;
164 Game 12
2c) 17 NxN BxN 18 BxKB ( 1 8 BxQB ? BxB) 18 . . . BxB

19 NxB KxB with advantage to Black .
16 B-K2 KNxKP
Again the indirect attack on White's QB with its pretty point.

If now 1 7 BxR BxB : 1 ) 1 8 B-K2 N-B7 , winning back the Ex
change ; 2) 1 8 BxPch PxB 19 QNxP K-K2 , and Black has two pieces
and a promising position for a Rook and a Pawn . If 1 7 BxB NxN 1 8
BxR NxR with advantage to Black .
17 NxN BxN
18 BxB
White hopes for 1 8 . . . KxB ( 1 8 . . . BxR results in the same

position) 1 9 BxR BxR 20 BxNP (and if 20 . . . PxB 2 1 RxB) with
equal chances.
18 • • • N-N6ch! !
A fatal surprise by which Black not only avoids the loss of the
Exchange but even wins it . The point is that after 1 9 NxN RxPch 20
K-N l Black has a powerful discovered check: 20 . . . RxB dis eh 2 1-
K-R2 BxR .
19 K-Nl RxN
This is a little stronger than 19 . . . NxN 20 BxR KxB(!) 21 RxN

BxR 22 B-K2 , after which Black is "only " one Pawn ahead .
20 BxQP BxR
21 PxN RxRch
22 BxR K-Q2
After the smoke of the battlefield has lifted Black is the Exchange
up .
23 B-K5 P-B3
24 B-QB3
The Exchange down , but with the Two Bishops White will try to get
a draw .
24 • • • B-K5ch
Black's strategy will be (a) to exchange one of the Bishops ; (b) to

restrict the diagonals of the Bishops (the diagonal of White' s QB is
already restricted) ; and (c) to play for a passed Pawn .
25 K-R2
In general , a2 is a safer place for the King to take refuge than c 1 , but
in this position we' ll see that it is not .
25 • • • K-B3
26 P-QR4
In order to get rid of his doubled Pawn, but the situation is risky if
Black does not take . If White has to play PxPch and Black answers
. . . PxP, mate already threatens .
26 • • • R-Ql
27 B-K2 P-K4
Black sacrifices a Pawn for the final attack.

166 Game 12
28 PxP PxP
29 BxP
If White does not take , Black keeps his passed Pawn .

Perhaps 29 K-R3 is a little better , but after 29 . . . B-Q6 30 BxB
(30 B-B3ch P-K5) 30 . . . RxB 3 1 BxP P-N4 there is no longer any
hope .
White now tries to exchange as many Pawns as possible thus
increasing his drawing chances , but he does not realize how very bad
the position of his King is .
29 • • • R-Q7
30 B-Bl R-Q8
Black is gradually getting White into a mating net . White ' s King
has no place to go . Now 3 1 B-K2 fails against 3 1 . . . R-KS . If 3 1
B-R3 , there are two possible lines, taking into consideration that the
White King is hemmed in and that Black has a discovered check in
reserve :
1 ) 3 1 . . . PxP 32 PxP B-Q4ch 33 P-N3 R-Q6, winning a Pawn ;

2) 3 1 . . . P-N5 ! (stronger because it prevents the White King
from going to a3) 32 BxP P-KR4 (threatening 33 . . . B-N8ch 34
K-R l B-B4 dis eh 35 K-R2 PxP 36 B-N2 B-N8ch, etc . , and if 33
PxP B-N8ch 34 K-R l B-B4 dis eh, etc . , winning the Bishop in
either case) 3 3 B-BS P-R4 (keeping the White King confined) 34
B-K7 R-KN8 , winning the Bishop either by 35 . . . PxP or if 35

PxP by 35 . . B-N8ch 36 K-R l B B4 dis eh , etc .
. -
Line 1 ) goes after small booty-a Pawn ; line 2) goes out for bigger
game-the Bishop .
31 PxPch
This hastens the end , but the game is lost anyway , as we have
shown in the preceding comments .
31 . . . PxP
32 B-R3 P-NS
Black hammers the nail in White ' s coffin .
33 BxP R-Q2
34 Resigns
For Black threatened both 34 . . . R-R2 mate and 34 . . . RxB .
White lost the game because he was put under pressure by Black 's
build-up of powerful initiative along the QB-file and his continual
threat of a sham sacrifice . He then became a victim of his opponent ' s
refined combination accompanied by a sham sacrifice which had been
168 Game 12
in the offing for some time but the execution of which was not possible
sooner . In the endgame the cooperation between the Black Rook and
Bishop was decisive , considering the unfavorable position of the
White King .
Game 13
White's maneuvers to get a superior pawn position in the opening

The isolated Pawn
Working toward the endgame when one has a better pawn position and a
pawn majority on the Q-side
Play against two isolated Pawns
Restricting the movement of an opponent 's pieces by binding him to the
protection of a Pawn
Exchange of pieces in order to gain control of a file
Forcing the opponent to weaken his pawn structure in order to prevent the
enemy King from penetrating the pawn position
The power of two Rooks on the 7th rank
The Isolated Pawn
An isolated Pawn is one which stands " alone" because the Pawns
of the adjacent files are no longer on the board. Consequently , this
isolated Pawn cannot be protected by its own Pawns . In the above
diagram Pd5 is isolated.
An isolated Pawn can constitute a serious weakness for the side that
has it for two reasons : (a) since it cannot be supported by its fellow
Pawns , it must be protected by pieces , and this necessity of protecting
the Pawn restricts the activity of the pieces needed to protect it ; (b) in
169
170 Game 13
addition , the opponent can often place one of his own pieces in front of
the isolat.ed Pawn with the assurance that it cannot be driven away by
his adversary' s Pawns . Thus the square in front of a player' s isolated
Pawn is a strong square for his opponent . In the diagramed position a
White Knight on d4 would be very strong .
A player with two isolated Pawns has an even greater problem ,
since each one of the isolated Pawns can become the target of the
opponent' s attack and must therefore be protected by pieces .
The task of defending two weaknesses at the same time can become
very difficult , for it requires great flexibility on the part of the
defender-at least as much as that of the attacker. If the latter moves
one or more of his attacking pieces from one target to the other , the
defender often has to do the same in the same number of moves .
Because of the difficulty of defending against two weaknesses , the
symbolic statement is sometimes made that two weaknesses in a
player' s position are far more serious than twice one weakness .
Sicilian Defense - Irregular

Candidates' Match - Buenos Aires - 1 971
Robert Fischer - USA Tigran Petrosian - USSR

1 P-K4 P-QB4
2 N-KB3 P-K3
This can lead by transposition to the Paulsen , the Scheveningen , the

Najdorf , or to quite different lines , as will be shown below .
With it Black opens a diagonal for his KB and postpones playing his
QN until it becomes evident whether that Knight will be more useful
on c6 or d7 .
3 P-Q4 PxP
4 NxP
The game can now develop in various directions:
(a) the Paulsen Variation , characterized by . . . P-QR3 ,

QN-Q2 , and . . . Q-B2 (Game 9) .
(b) with 4 . . . N-QB3 , to the Taimanov System , which aims at
developing Black' s KB to c5 instead of to e7 (see the comment in
the last paragraph under Black 's 4th move) .
Sicilian Defense: Irregular 171
(c) 4 . . . N-KB3 5 N-QB3 P-Q3 and

( 1 ) 6 B-K2, the Scheveningen (Game 1 0) ;
(2) 6 B-KN5 P-QR3 , the Najdorf Variation, in which Black
usually plays . . . P-QR3 and . . . P-Q3 before . . . P
K3 (Games 1 1 and 1 2) ;
(3) 6 B-QR4 , the Fischer Variation .
4 . • . P-QR3
Like 5 . . . P-QR3 in the two previous games , this is a good move

in the Sicilian because it prevents White from bringing his Knight or
Bishop to b5 , makes possible a later . . . P-QN4, which allows Black
to fianchetto his QB , and again postpones the decision of whether
Black should play his QN to c6 or to d7 .
On the other hand , White, who in many other variations of the
Sicilian is busy defending his KP (because Black has already played
. . . P-Q3 or . . . N-QB3 followed by . . . N-KB3) , now has much
more freedom and could , for instance , now play 5 P-QB4, which
gives him one extra unit of control over d5 and is also directed against
b5 .
Also playable here is 4 . . . N-QB3 5 N-QB3 P-QR3 6 P-KN3
Q-B2 7 B-N2 N-B3 8 0-0 NxN 9 QxN B-B4, Ieading to the Taimanov
Variation .
5 B-Q3
This reply leads to a kind of irregular line . White develops his KB

and protects his KP, reserving the possibility of advancing his QBP
and developing his QN to either c3 or d2 .
Two other possibilities are
172 Game 13
1) 5 P-QB4 N-KB3 6 N-QB3 B-N5

l a) 7 B-Q3 N-B3 8 N-B2 BxNch 9 PxB P-Q4 ;
l b) 7 B-Q2 0-0 (7 . . . BxN? 8 BxB NxP 9 Q-N4 ! ) 8
P-K5 BxN 9 BxB N-K5 1 0 Q-B2 P-Q4 1 1 PxP e . p . NxB and
1 2 . . . QxP;
l e) 7 P-K5 N-K5 8 Q-N4 NxN 9 P-QR3 B-B J ! 1 0 PxN P-Q3 .
In all these variations (some of them complicated) the
theory of openings concludes that both players emerge with
about equal chances .
2) 5 N-QB3 Q-B2 6 B-Q3 N-QB3 7 B -K3 N-B3 8 0-0 NxN
9 BxN B-B4, again with equal chances.
s . . . N-QB3
If you can force a hostile piece that has already made two moves to
exchange itself for another piece, you win a tempo for development ,
although this does not count very much in closed openings like the
Sicilian .
In this game , 5 . . . N-QB3 turned out to be unfavorable for Black ,
but it need not have been disadvantageous since Black had two or three
satisfactory alternatives before reaching the unsatisfactory position in
which he found himself at his 1 Oth move .
6 NxN
Fischer made this exchange because he had a special setup in mind .

The game could also have continued 6 B-K3 N-B3 7 N-QB3 P-K4
(or 7 . . . Q-B2) 8 KN-K2 P-Q4 . Or White could have played 6 N-N3
or 6 N-K2 . As a matter of fact , these last two lines result in the loss of a
tempo , but , as already remarked , this is not so important in this type of
game .
6 . . . NPxN
Now Black has a pawn majority in the center, but this gives him a
great responsibility , as we shall soon see .
Perhaps Black did not like 6 . . . QPxN because it would make
4 . . . P-QR3 look like a wasted move , since in that case b5 is
protected by both the QRP and the QBP and 4 . . . P-QR3 does
represent a loss of tempo unless Black continues with . . . P-QB4

and . . . P-QN4 . On the other hand , after 6 . . QPxN Black can
.
develop more easily ; e . g . , 7 0-0 P-K4 8 N-Q2 B-Q3 or 8 . . . Q-B2.

This line would have been less risky for Black .
7 0-0 P-Q4
Logical but not definitely best. It gives Black the center majority
but also entails the responsibility of playing in such a way that he will
not end up with an isolated Pawn in the center. Instead, 7 . . P-Q3
.
could have been played, and that certainly would have been safer.
8 P-QB4
The purpose of this move is to give Black an isolated QP. Black will
not answer 8 . . . PxBP or 8 . . . PxKP , for either of these moves
would leave him with a pair of isolated Pawns . If 8 . P-Q5 , Black
. .
would have a passed but blocked Pawn, and then i.f 9 P-K5 White
would probably be better off since his KB is well posted, and it would
be controlling the important center square e4. Still , 8 . . . P-Q5 is
relatively better than what follows in the game itself.
8 • • • N-B3
Better than exchanging Pawns . It develops a piece and supports the

center .
9 BPxP BPxP
lO PxP
174 Game 13
If now
l ) 10 . . . QxP (which may not be as bad as the text) 1 1 N-B3

Q-B3 (or 1 1 . . . Q-Q2) 12 B-K2 (to counter with B-B3 a possible
Black attack along the a8/h l diagonal) 12 . . . B-N2 1 3 B-B3 Q-B2
14 B-N5 , and White has better development and a majority of
Pawns on the Q-side , but Black has more influence in the center.
2) 10 . . . NxP 1 1 B-K4 B-N2 12 N-B3
2a) 12 . . . Q-Q2 ( 1 2 . . . NxN 13 QxQch RxQ 14 BxB is
better for White) 1 3 NxN BxN 14 BxB QxB 1 5 QxQ PxQ 1 6
R-Q l with a clear advantage for White ;
2b) 1 2 . . . B-K2 1 3 Q-R4ch , and Black has the choice be
tween two evils:
2b l ) 13 . . . Q-Q2, which loses a Pawn after 1 4 QxQch
KxQ 1 5 R-Q l , and
2b2) 1 3 . . . K-B l , which loses for Black the possibility
of castling and in addition enables White to maintain
pressure on the Black position by 14 R-Q l .
Conclusion : The text is the second best way to retake .
10 • . • PxP
1 1 N-B3
Now after 1 1 . . . P-Q5 1 2 N-K4 White gets excellent attacking

chances : 1 2 . . . B-K2 ( 1 2 . . . B-N2 1 3 Q-B3 !) 1 3 NxNch BxN 1 4
R-K l ch, and
l ) 14 . . . B-K3 1 5 Q-R5 ( 1 5 B-QB4 wins a Pawn in the long

run , but the text is still better since it threatens 1 6 RxBch and
prevents Black from castling) 1 5 . . . P-N3 1 6 Q-R6 ;
2) 14 . . . B-K2 1 5 Q-R5 , again very strong ,
2a) 1 5 . . . B-N2 1 6 B-KN5 ;
2b) 1 5 . . . P-R3 1 6 B-KN5 ! ! ( 1 6 . . . P-N3 1 7 BxNP or l 7
BxB) .
11 • • • B-K2
12 Q-R4ch
Hoping for an exchange of Queens, for then the advantage of

White' s better position can be more easily realized in the endgame .
This advantage consists in the fact that Black' s Pawns are weaker and
that White has the initiative .
If now 1 2 . . . B-Q2 1 3 Q-B2 0-0( ?) would cost a Pawn after 1 4
B-KN5 (after 1 5 BxN , both Black' s KRP and his QP are en prise) .
12 • • • Q-Q2
White could now win the Exchange by 1 3 B-QN5 , but it is very

doubtful that this would have been profitable : 1 3 . . . PxB 1 4 QxR O-O
1 5 Q-RS P-QS 1 6 NxP B-N2 , and Black has very good attacking
chances as compensation for the Exchange and the Pawn . Note how
helpless the White pieces are at the end of this variation . They have no
coordination at all . Black threatens a direct decision by 1 3 . . . Q-B3
1 4 P-B3 R-R l .
So instead White develops by
13 R-Kl
It makes a difference whether White or Black makes the exchange

of Queens . If White makes it , Black' s development is furthered .
Moreover, the text prevents 1 3 . . . 0-0, for then 14 QxQ and 1 5
RxB .
13 • • • QxQ
If instead 1 3 . . . P-Q5 , 14 QxQch (forced) 14 . . . BxQ 1 5 N-K2

B-N5 1 6 R-Q l B-QB4 1 7 B-KB4 followed by 1 8 B-K5 loses a Pawn
for Black .
"
14 NxQ
If now 14 . . . B-Q2 1 5 N-N6 , Black's QRP becomes weaker

because White is now attacking both Black' s QR and QB and has the
possibility of eliminating the latter.
14 • • • B-K3
To cover the KB , thus enabling Black to castle K-side .

176 Game 13
15 B-K3
It is generally important to prevent the advance of an isolated Pawn,

for by advancing , it increases the opponent 's space control , and its
advance often obliges the other player to regroup his forces . The text
has still another purpose: to control two important squares in the
enemy position-c5 and eventually d6 .
After the text White could occupy d4, the square in front of the
isolated Pawn , but he chooses another system and focuses his atten
tion on Black' s weak QRP, which offers much better prospects .
15 • • • 0-0
Now 1 6 N-N6 would lead to the win of a Pawn, but Black would get
counterchances ; e . g . , 1 6 N-N6 QR-N I 1 7 BxQRP N-N5 ! and 1) 1 8
B-Q4 B-Q l 1 9 N-R4 R-N5 , which is difficult for White ; 2) 1 8 N-R4
R-R l 1 9 B-QN5 KR-N l 20 B-B6 R-R3 , and again White has prob
lems. With 1 6 N-N6 the most White can hope for is a draw .
16 B-QB5
Black cannot now afford to answer 1 6 . . . BxB because after 1 7

NxB White threatens both 1 8 BxQRP and 1 8 NxB PxN 1 9 RxP ; Black
would therefore be forced to play 17 . . . B-B l , after which he would
not have much development .
16 • • • KR-Kl
17 BxB
White's strategy continues to consist in developing an attack on

Black's QRP and in getting an advantage in the center . How he
realizes these aims will become evident in the next few moves .
17 • • • RxB
18 P-QN4!
Instead of playing 1 8 N-B5 at once White first plays 1 8 P-QN4 to

prevent . . . P-QR4 . If now at any time . . . P-QR4, White answers
P-N5 and has a formidible passed Pawn .
18 • • • K-Bl
It is important for Black to protect his KR , as we shall see after

White's 1 9th move .
19 N-BS
To force Black to protect his QRP. Now 19 . . . P-QR4 would be

answered by 20 P-N5 , as remarked above.
19 • • • B-Bl
This move is now possible because Black has protected his KR by

18 . . . K-B l . Now it looks as if White cannot do much .
20 P-B3
To prevent Black from playing his Knight to e4 at some later time

and to allow White to eventually move his King to d4 via f2 and e3 .
20 • • • R/2-Rl(?)
Black wishes to protect his QRP a second time so as to be able to get

some play with his Bishop. This proves to be a false plan which leads
to disaster. The game was difficult to hold in any case , but after the
text things go more easily for White .
The only way to try to hold the game would be 20 . . . RxRch 2 1
RxR N-K l followed by . . . N-B2 , and although Black's position is
absolutely passive, he can still hope to escape from catastrophe . Let us
examine as an illustration what White might have done after these
moves:
178 Game 13
1) 22 P-KR4 N-B2? 23 BxKRP P-N3 24 P-R5 , and now

24 . . . K-N2 does not work on account of 25 PxP PxP 26
R-K7ch;
2) 22 P-KR4 P-R3 23 P-B4 N-B2 24 P-B 5 (White has advanced
his KBP in order to prevent Black from playing . . . N-K3 , which
would considerably facilitate Black 's defense) 24 . . . R-N l 25
P-R3 R-R l (25 . . . N-N4 would cost a Pawn after 26 BxN and 27
R-K5 ; and the counterpush 25 . . . P-QR4 would best be an-
swered by 26 P-N5 , since 26 . . . NxP?? fails against 27 R-N l )
26 K-B2 N-N4 (if 2 6 . . . P-QR4 , then again 2 7 P-N5) 2 7 P-R4
N-B2 (27 . . . N-Q5 or 27 . . . N-Q3 would result in the loss of a
Pawn after 28 R-K5) 28 P-N4 R-N l 29 R-QN I K-K2 30 K-K3
K-Q3 3 1 K-Q4 . In this position Black can do nothing but wait , and
White can push his QNP at the right time .
These variations do not prove that White has a forced win . They only
show how powerless Black is against all kinds of maneuvers.
21 R-KS
Attacking Black's QP in order to force the Black Knight to remain

on f6 to protect it . Once Black can play . . . N-Q2 , he can liberate his
game , for then White' s Knight is forced to exchange or to retreat . If
Black tried to find a way out by playing 2 1 . . . R-K2 , he would not
succeed, for after 22 QR-Kl RxR 23 RxR the relative position would
remain the same , and Black could not play 23 . . . N-Q2 without
losing his QP.
21 • • • B Q2
-
In order to continue with . . . B-N4 .
22 NxBch RxN
Now it looks as if Black has improved his position, since White's

strong Knight has been exchanged for Black' s Bad Bishop . But now
White has another strong trump in his favor, namely , the open QB
file , over which he will have absolute control .
23 R-QBl
Powerful , for in addition to threatening the direct win of a Pawn by

24 BxQRP and if 24 . . . RxB 25 R-B8ch followed by mate, White
also threatens to get a passed Pawn with 24 R-B6 P-QR4 25 P-N5 .
If therefore 23 . . . P-QR4 , White has the choice between two
winning continuations : 1) 24 PxP (and Black cannot retake because of
25 R-B8ch) and 2) 24 P-N5 .
23 • • • R-Q3
The only way to parry both threats.
24 R-B7
White gratefully takes advantage of the opportunity to occupy his

7th rank . He is already threatening R/5-K7 with a quick decision .
24 • • • N-Q2
25 R-K2
White now threatens 1) 26 BxQRP, and l.4lack cannot afford to

answer 26 . . . R/3xB because of 27 RxN nor 26 . . . R/ l xB be
cause of 27 R-B8ch followed by mate; and 2) 26 B-B5 and, after
Black moves his Knight , 27 R/2-K7 . In order to prevent this Black
plays
25 • • • P-N3
26 K-B2
The White King is now ready to participate in the struggle either by

advancing to d4 or by supporting its K-side Pawns .
180 Game 13
Now the exchange of one Rook does not facilitate Blac:k' s game .
For instance, 26 . . . R-K l 27 RxRch KxR 28 R-R7 R-N3 29 P-QR3
N-N l 30 K-K3 , and the loss of a Pawn cannot be prevented . Of
course, White must play 3 1 R-R8 first to hold down the Black Knight
and then 32 K-Q4, since 3 1 K-Q4 fails against 3 1 . . . N-B3ch .
26 • • • P-KR4
Black has no good moves.
27 P-B4
With the intention of playing K-N3-R4-N5 .
27 • • • P-RS
To prevent the above-mentioned maneuver .
28 K-B3
Threatening 29 K-N4. By threatening to penetrate , the White King

is gradually weakening the Black pawn position .
28 • • • P-B4
This prevents the White King' s advance on the K-side, but White 's
threats have done their work , for now the Black position is full of
holes .
29 K-K3
With the intention of bringing his King to d4, which would practi
cally paralyze Black .
29 • • • P-QSch
The cure is worse than the disease . This frees c4 for White' s
Bishop .
30 K-Q2 N-N3
This permits White to double his Rooks on the 7th rank , but Black
no longer had any good moves . For instance, 30 . . . K-B2 would be
answered by 3 1 R-K5 ! K-B3 32 R-R5 , winning Black' s QRP-if
necessary with the help of P-N5 .
31 KR-K7 N-Q4
32 R-B7ch K-K l
33 R-QN7
A fine demonstration of the power o f two Rooks o n their 7th rank .

Among other things White is threatening 34 R-KR7 followed by mate .
If now 33 . . . R-N3 34 RxR NxR 35 R-KN7 K-B l 36 RxP N-Q4 37
B-B4, and White wins as many Pawns as he likes .
33 • • • NxNP
;•
If 33 . . . NxBP, White also plays 34 B-B4 with the same quick

win .
34 B-B4! Resigns
For now there is no way to parry the deadly 35 R-N7 . For instance ,
34 . . . N-B3 35 R-N7 R-B 3 36 R-KN8ch R-B 1 37 B-B7ch followed
by mate .
G
182 Game 13
White won by saddling Black with a pair of isolated Pawns which

he then attacked in such a way that Black was compelled to use all his
forces to defend them. Consequently , White got all the opportunities
to decide the struggle with his own active pieces .
Game 14
Advantages of the Slav Variation of the Queen's Gambit Declined over the
Classical Variation: Black's QB outside the pawn formation
Consequenr.es of the acceptance of the gambit Pawn in the Slav Variation
White's �� ::.�::opts to form a broad center-seductive but possibly bad
A danger of the pin: indirect attack by the pinned side
The Queen sacrifice
Driving the King into the open field
Continuation of the threats by Rooks and light pieces based on the open
position of the King and the vulnerability of the Queen
Emerging from a combination with two plus Pawns
Fixing the opponent's Pawns on the same color as the opponent's Bishop
Bringing the King to the support of a Pawn so as to free the piece which
was protecting it for active play
The Combination
A combination is a series of moves which taken separately do not
perhaps make sense but which taken as a unit accomplish a given end .
The combination normally involves a sacrifice of some kind : a Pawn ,
a piece , the Exchange , sometimes even the Queen . There are combi
nations without sacrifices , but in these the moves of the combination
must involve threats in order to limit the opponent' s possible replies .
The player making the combination can analyze the entire complex of
moves only if the opponent does not have too great a choice of replies .
The starting point of a combination must be a weakness or a
vulnerable spot in the opponent ' s position . A century ago Steinitz
stated that without such a weakness the combin.ation could not lead to
success .
There are four steps to the combination : ( I ) its basic idea ; (2) the
calculation of its steps ; (3) the execution ; and (4) the evaluation of the
results . The details of the combination must be calculated in ad
vance-a player cannot rely on intuition alone . But since the combi
nation usually consists of forced moves , the calculation is not impos
sible for players with imaginative powers .
The result of a successful combination may be mate or some sort of
advantage : the initiative , greater space control , material gain .
There are many types of combinations , but none is more devastat-
183
184 Game 14
ing than the one in which the King is brought into the open field and
becomes the object of all sorts of threats and checks which may
eventually drive it into a mating net .
Queen's Gambit Decllned - Slav Variation
Championship Prelimlnarles - Gomel, USSR - 1 973
Vladas Mikenas - USSR Viktor Kupreichik - USSR

1 P-Q4 P-Q4
2 P-QB4
The Queen 's Gambit .
White immediately contests Black' s bid for center control . This
move has a number of implications :
(a) It invites Black to play 2 . . . PxP (the Queen' s Gambit
Accepted) and after having recaptured Black 's Pc4 to emerge with
a center Pawn as against Black' s side Pawn . (see Game 1 6)
(b) It threatens 3 PxP followed by complete control of the center
for White ; e . g . , 3 . . . QxP 4 N-QB 3 Q-QR4 5 P-K4 .
(c) By 3 PxP PxP it also threatens to open the QB-file for action
by White .
2 • • • P-QB3
The Slav Defense . Since in many variations of the Queen 's Gambit
Declined 2 . . . P-K3 shuts in the Black QB and much energy must be
expended later to develop this Bishop (see Game 1 5) , Black some
times prefers to play 2 . . . P-QB 3 , which supports his QP and leaves
open the possibility of playing out his QB later if he desires.
3 N-KB3 N-B3
4 N-B3 PxP
Black now accepts the gambit Pawn , giving up his center Pawn on
d5 for the side Pawn on c4 . However , he appears to get some
compensation . He now threatens to hold the extra Pawn for a while by
5 . . . P-QN4 so that he can give it back later in exchange for
positional advantage .
S P-QR4
Queen's Gambit Declined: Slav Variation 185
White surrenders b4 to Black in order to prevent him from keeping

the gambit Pawn by . . . P-QN4 . This represents a certain weakening
of the White Q-side .
s . . . B-B4
Black develops his QB , exerting pressure on the center and prevent

ing White from playing P-K4 . This is the basic idea of the Slav
Defense . Inconsistent would have been 5 . . . P-K3 .
6 N-KS
Although this move violates the principle of moving the same piece
only once during the opening , it is a most enterprising play , which
aims both to recapture the gambit Pawn and to prepare P-B3 and
P-K4 , thus building up a powerful center . But this latter aim may be a
bit pretentious , as is shown in this game .
The alternative is 6 P-K3 P-K3 7 BxP B-QN5 , and with this pin
Black exerts pressure on the White center, and White is prevented
from pushing his KP . By this type of center control Black gets freer
movement for his pieces .
6 • • • P-K3
Black simply ignores White's intentions and continues his develop

ment , having in reserve a most energetic reply to White' s build-up in
the center. See the comment after Black 's 7th move.
The most common reply here is 6 . . QN-Q2 , which practically
.
prevents White from carrying out his plan to build up the center, since
Black himself can soon achieve . . . P-K4: 7 NxP/4 Q-B2 8 P-B3
P-K4 ! 9 P-K4 does not mean much , for after 9 .• PxP 1 0 QxP B-B4
. .
1 1 Q-Q3 B-K3 Black has at least equality . Therefore, White usually

continues in another way : 8 P-KN3 (instead of 8 P-B3) 8 . P-K4 9
. .
PxP NxP 10 B-B4 , and White has some initiative .
7 P-B3
Following the plan announced , White starts to build up his center.
7 . . . B-QNS
186 Game 14
By this pin of White' s QN Black exerts some pressure on White 's

center , but he does not prevent White' s P-K4 . However, theory shows
that 8 P-K4 is answered by the sacrifice 8 . . . BxP 9 PxB NxP , with
all kinds of threats for both sides . One possibility would be 10 Q-B3
QxP 1 1 QxPch K-Q 1 1 2 B-N5ch (this move saves White from defeat ,
for after 1 2 QxKNP, for example, 1 2 . . . BxNch 1 3 PxB Q-B7ch 1 4
K-Q l NxP mate !) 1 2 . . . NxB 1 3 QxKNP BxNch and a probable
perpetual check . So White prefers to win back the gambit Pawn by
playing
8 NxP/4 QN-Q2
In order to be able to continue with . . . P-K4 or . . . P-B4, de

pending on the circumstances . Either of these moves would free
Black's position and give him at least equality .
Other possibilities are 8 . . 0-0 9 B-N5 and 8
. . . N-Q4 9 B-Q2 .
.
Chances are about equal in either case .
9 B-NS
By the text White pins Black' s KN in order to make P-K4 possible .

Yet after 9 P-K4 Black should answer 9 . B-N3 , for the sacrifice
. .
9 . .NxP is not correct because of 10 PxN Q-R5ch 1 1 K-Q2 !

.
QxKP? 1 2 N-Q6ch, etc .
9 • . • P-KR3
Now the exchange of the Bishop for Black' s Knight would only
facilitate Black 's game , for after 1 0 BxN NxB 1 1 P-K4 Black has the
choice between 1 1 . . . NxP ( 1 2 PxN Q-R5ch 1 3 K-Q2 0-0-0) and
1 1 . . . B-R2 . In the latter case , Black' s QB is temporarily out of
play , but Black has compensation in his great mobility , whereas
White ' s QP can become weak .
10 B-R4 P-QN4
Black tries to complicate matters , for after the quiet 10 . . . N-N3

1 1 P-K4 ! B-R2 1 2 Q-N3 P-QR4 1 3 R-Q l White is a little better off
since he has the center and Black 's QB is out of the game .
1 1 N-Q2
After 1 1 N-K5 , etc . , Black exchanges Queens and gets a better

game : 1 1 . . . NxN 1 2 PxN QxQch 1 3 RxQ N-Q4 14 P-K4 NxN 1 5
PxN BxPch I 6 K-B2 B-R2 I 7 PxP P-QB4, and Black has practically a
plus Pawn , for although White has five Pawns against four on the
K-side , he has no real majority because of his doubled Pawn .
If 1 1 PxP PxP 1 2 N-K3 B-R2 1 3 N-B2 Bxl')l'ch I 4 PxB BxN 1 5 QxB
0-0 with equal chances . The reply I I N-K3 would not help White to
dominate the center . On the other hand , the text makes l I . . . P-K4
seemingly possible without the sacrifice described above .
11 • • • P-K4
Black wants a countertrump in the center as soon as possible .
12 P-K4
188 Game 14
White cannot resist the temptation to play the move which seems to
assure him center control . Better, however, would have been 1 2 PxKP
NxP 1 3 P-K4 with an even game .
The text seems to give Black an easy way out , for White 's QP is
unprotected; but , as we shall see , the point is that after White ' s 1 3th
move both Black Bishops are attacked .
12 . . . PxQP
13 N-Rl
This is what White was playing for . It looks now as if

1 3 . . . BxNch is forced , and then with 14 QxB White gets a rea
sonable game , for 1 4 . . . NxP is refuted by 1 5 Q-B4 .
13 . . . NxP!!
A most surprising Queen sacrifice based on (a) the indirect attack of

Black' s Queen on White' s QB and (b) the enormous activity of
Black' s light pieces .
14 BxQ
Forced , for if 1 4 NxB QxBch 1 5 P-N3 NxP, etc . , or 1 4 PxN QxBch

1 5 P-N3 QxKPch , and Black gets a clear superiority .
14 . . . BxNch
15 K-Kl
Giving back the Queen at once by 1 5 QxB NxQ 1 6 KxN KxB 1 7

PxP P-B4 would lead to superiority for Black . Besides having slightly
more active pieces Black has a sound plus Pawn .
15 • • • P-Q6ch!!
This drives the King into the open field.
16 KxP
Forced .
16 • • • N/2-B4ch
The same result would be attained by 16 . . . RxB 1 7 K-K2

N/2-B4 .
17 K-K2
If 17 K-B2 N-B7 dis eh, Black gains material advantage ; for

instance , 1 8 B-Q3 BxBch 1 9 KxB/2 NxQ , etc . , or 1 8 KxB RxBch ,
etc .
17 • • • RxB
Black has two light pieces for the Queen , and the White King is still
in an unsafe position since there are no White pieces to defend against
the combined attack of Black' s Rook, Knights , and Bishops .
190 Game 14
18 P-KN4
The alternative 1 8 PxN leads to mate : 1 8 . . . B-N5ch 19 K-B2

NxPch 20 K-N l B-K6 mate . White could play 1 8 R-B l , which would
be answered by 1 8 . . . B-N4, and White has to sacrifice the Queen :
1 9 Q-K l ( 1 9 Q-B2 N-N6ch) 1 9 . . . R-Q7ch 20 QxR BxQ 2 1 R-Q l
B-N4 22 PxN B-N5ch . Black always comes into the endgame one or
two Pawns to the good .
18 • • • B-K3
Threatening 1 9 . . . B-B5 mate .
19 Q-B2
Practically the only defense .
19 • • • B-N6
Also satisfactory for Black is 19 . . . B-B5ch , which forces 20

QxB followed by 20 . . . PxQ 2 1 PxN 0-0 , but the text is still stronger .
20 R-Bl
White has no choice . After 20 Q-N l B-B5ch 21 K-Q l N-B7ch 22

K-B2 B-N6 mate .
20 . . • BxR
Black restrains himself from taking the Queen , but that would have
been just as good . True , after 20 . . . BxQ 2 1 RxB , Black must lose
his extra piece , but he still has some plus Pawns : 2 1 . . . NxP 22 PxN
B-N4 23 RxP R-Q7ch .
21 QxB/ 1 R-Q7ch
22 K-K3
If 22 QxR NxQ , Black remains on� piece ahead , for White ' s Knight
is still hanging . After 22 K-K l there follows 22 . . . R-Q8ch 23 QxR

BxQ 24 PxN BxRP, and Black has two plus Pawns , just as in the
game .
22 • • • R-Q8
23 QxR
Amounting to about the same thing is 23 PxN RxQ 24 NxR BxP.
23 • • • BxQ
24 PxN BxRP
Black has emerged from the maze of combinations with two plus
Pawns , which will give him a sure win .
2S P-N4
A good move which temporarily keeps Black's Q-side pawn major-

ity from advancing . �
25 • • • N-Q2
26 N-B3 B-N6
Black brings his Bishop to a better square .
27 B-K2 K-K2
Black has regrouped his forces .

192 Game 14
28 R-Rl R-Rl
Black has just been able to maintain all his material advantage . For
a master the rest is a question of technique .
29 P-R4 P-N4
This fixes White 's Pawns on the color of his Bishop . It will hamper
the mobility of the White Bishop and will make a later attack against
the White Pawns possible . When the Bishop and Pawns are on squares
of the same color (as White ' s Bishop and Pawns are here) , a hostile
King can penetrate via the squares of the opposite color.
30 K-Q4 P-B3
For 30 . . PxP would be answered by 3 1 R-R l . Also , the White

.
King in the center is now restricted not only by Black' s Knight but also
by his KBP.
3 1 PxP RPxP
Now 32 R-R l would be answered by the strong move 32 . . .
P-R4 . Black is two Pawns up but a little cramped . The move 32 . . .

P-R4 frees his position and improves it .
32 R-R3 B-K3
Black has had some problems in bringing his pieces to the right
squares to break the White blockade , but now his pieces are more
effectively posted.
33 N-Ql
This is a waiting move, but it also clears the 3d rank for the free play
of the White Rook , his only possibility .
33 • • • K-Q3
Queen's Gambit Declined: Slav Variadon 193
Black plans to bring the King to the support of his RP in order to free
his Rook for other action .
34 R-R6
Threatening 35 BxP.
34 • • • K-B2
35 P-K5
A last attempt . He is hoping for 35 . . . NxP 36 BxP PxB 37 RxB .

But an immediate 35 BxP would be refuted by 35 . N-N l ! , and
. .
Black would win at least the Exchange .
35 • • • PxPch
36 K-K4 K-N2
37 R-Rl R-KBl
Now that Black has all his weak points protected , including his
QRP , he sets out to take the initiative .
38 K-K3 R-BS
39 Resigns
Black won because he made a magnificent Queen sacrifice at just

the right time in an answer to White' s attractive-looking occupation of
the center. Although at first Black got only two light pieces for the
194 Game 14
Queen , he managed to force his opponent to give the Queen back

through continuing threats by Rooks, Bishops, and Knights . Finally
an endgame emerged in which Black 's two plus Pawns proved to be
sufficient for a win .
Game 15
The Tartakower Variation of the Queen's Gambit Declined

Hanging Pawns: advantages and disadvantages
The importance of exchanging light pieces
Converting hanging Pawns into another type of pawn structure of which
White can take advantage
Breaking up the opponent's pawn structure
A successful attack against the King guaranteed by a majority of Pawns on
the K-side
Occupation of strong squares
Restricting the movements of the opponent 's pieces
Sacrifice of the Exchange to eliminate the last barrier protecting the
hostile King
Hanging Pawns
Two adjacent Pawns on the same rank and separated from other
Pawns of the same color by at least one file are called "hanging
Pawns . " These hanging Pawns constitute a special formation which
has some advantages and more disadvantages . Hanging Pawns may
pose almost as great a problem to their possessor as isolated Pawns .
�
• •
,
• @,
::9.30' .
" ••
�E'.% ·� • i fk.?"Ei% i
y�
%. .
�. - • • $� �
· �"
� •1• •
•• • . . �.-.-.
- � � � .
-
�� •· n • �
f
lS
W/fffi. - • ,.�ftd.. f W/fffi.
•W!··�
· "•••W!.tif. ••
W,0" ..
fi �� lS v %
�
The strength of hanging Pawns lies in the fact that they control
many important squares and that the light pieces of the possessor of the
195
196 Game 15
hanging Pawns can sometimes be placed diagonally in front of them so

that these Pawns support them .
The weaknesses of hanging Pawns are often greater than their
strengths , especially when there are not many light pieces on the
board. It is therefore in the interest of the attacker to exchange as many
light pieces as possible .
Hanging Pawns are very vulnerable to attack since they cannot be
protected by adjacent Pawns . True , one of the hanging Pawns can
protect the other after the opponent has forced one of them to advance,
thus creating a diagonal or chain structure. However , the opponent
can then post a piece in front of the backward member of the pair, and
he can also attack the backward Pawn . If Black plays 1 . . . c5-c4 in
the above diagram, then d5 becomes a backward Pawn and White can
(a) post one of his pieces on d4 and (b) attack d5 .
Great judgment is required to decide whether or not one can afford
to accept hanging Pawns in a given position . The player in question
has to decide whether he will derive greater profit from the use of
Pawns to support his light pieces or whether his opponent will obtain
greater chances by forcing his hanging Pawns to advance and then
exploiting their weaknesses . A rule of thumb such as "Exchanging
light pieces favors the attacker" facilitates the decision .
Queen's Gambit Declined - Tartakower Variation

World Championship Match, Game 6
Reykjavik, Iceland 1 972 -
Robert Fischer - USA Boris Spassky - USSR

1 P-QB4
From c4 the Pawn now controls the center square d5 . Games are
frequently begun in this way . They can lead by transposition to a
number of different openings , as is the case in several of the later
games in this book . This move was especially notable on the part of
Fischer in this game because with it Bobby departed from his habit of
almost always opening with 1 P-K4 .
1 . . . P-K3
The game can now still develop in a variety of directions, but the
Queen's Gambit Declined: Tartakower Variation 197
text eliminates the possibility of both the King's Indian (Game 1 9) and
the Griinfeld (Game 2 1 ) .
2 N-KB3 P-Q4
3 P-Q4 N-KB3
4 N-B3 B-K2
S B-NS
The Classical Line of the Queen's Gambit Declined by transposi

tion . It is probable that in his preparation for the match Spassky gave
particular attention to the . . . P-QN3 variation of the Queen's Gam
bit Declined he uses in this game .
At this point Black' s QB is still on its original square and cannot be
developed easily . In most variations of the Queen's Gambit Declined
except the Slav , the development of Black's QB poses a difficult
problem . Various methods of bringing it into play have been ex
perimented with . At the tum of the century it used to be fashionable to
try to solve this problem by . . . P-QN3 followed by . . . B-N2 , but
Black often got into trouble in this variation .
Since Spassky announces his intention of developing his QB in that
way in this game by 7 . . . P-QN3 , let us look at some of the problems
which can arise from this move by giving a number of examples from
theory and practice .
First of all , the way White can act against the fianchetto depends on
whether Black's next move is 5 . . . QN-Q2 or 5 . . . 0-0 . There is a
considerable difference in his reply .
Many old games show that . . . P-QN3 in combination with

5 . . . QN-Q2 has great drawbacks . A few examples : 5 . . . QN-Q2
6 P-K3
198 Game IS
1) 6 . . . P-QN3 ? 7 PxP PxP 8 B-N5

l a) 8 . . . B-N2 9 N-K5 0-0 1 0 B-B6 BxB 1 1 NxB Q-K l 1 2
NxBch QxN 1 3 NxP Q-K5 1 4 NxNch PxN 1 5 B-R6 QxNP 1 6
Q-B 3 ! ! and White wins , for Black loses at least the Exchange
since after 1 6 . . . QxQ mate would be forced by 17 R
KN lch (Pillsbury-Lee , London, 1 899) ;
l b) 8 . . 0-0 9 B -B6 R-N l 1 0 N-K5 NxN 1 1 PxN N-N5 1 2
.
B-B4 and White wins the QP , which i s attacked three times

and defended only once .
2) 6 . 0-0 7 R-B 1 P-QN3 8 PxP PxP
. .
2a) 9 B-Q3 B-N2 1 0 N-K5 P-B4 1 1 P-B4 with strong attack

ing chances for White , as was shown in many of the classic
games played by Pillsbury ;
2b) 9 Q-R4
2b l ) 9 . . P-B4 1 0 Q-B6 R-N l 1 1 NxP B-N2 1 2 NxBch
.
QxN 1 3 Q-R4 , and Black could not prove the correctness of

his pawn sacrifice (Capablanca-Lasker, 5th Match Game,
Havana , 1 92 1 ) ;
2b2) 9 . . B-N2 1 0 B-R6 BxB 1 1 QxB , with consid
.
erable pressure on Black' s weakened Q-wing .

In the lines under 2) in general Black can limit his risks
after the exchange on d5 by retaking with the Knight . This
facilitates Black ' s defense by exchanges of Knights and
Bishops .
If Black does not precede the fianchetto by . . . QN-Q2 , then quite

different problems arise . The real handicap , if any , stems from the
difficulties Black may later encounter with the resultant hanging
Pawns-as exemplified a bit later in this game . It is . . . P-QN3
which is responsible for these weaknesses . After White plays PxP ,
opening the QB-file , Black ' s QBP is backward and must advance to
c5 , whereas . . . if P-QN3 had not been played , Black ' s QBP could
advance to c6, and there would be no weakness .
Therefore , unless Black now castles , h e will have still greater
difficulties . So
s . . . 0-0
6 P-K3 P-KR3
This move is advantageous for Black in several ways . If White

attacks Black ' s K-side , Black' s KRP is more secure , more useful , and
more effective on h6 , for it is likely to be attacked on h7 and in that
case could cost Black a tempo . In the second place, the P/KR3
discourages White's Knight from going to g5 . Finally , the move
affords Black an escape square for his King . A slight disadvantage of
the move may be that if the White Knight goes to e5 , Black has to take
into account that by driving it away by . . . P-KB3 , the Knight has
access to g6 .
White now has several options :
1 ) If 7 B-B4, Black can continue 7 . . . P-B4 followed by . . .

N-B3 , . . . P-QN3 , and . . . B-N2 , thus solving the problem of
the undeveloped QB .
2) If 7 BxN , White gives up his Bishop for a Knight , Black' s KB

is then posted on a better square than formerly, and Black has
more freedom than in the regular line .
7 B-R4
Black could now play 7 . . . N-K5 , the Lasker Defense , and White
would have to submit to some simplification whether he answers 8
B-N3 , 8 NxN , or 8 BxB . The Lasker Defense is considered one of
Black' s best means of playing for a draw in the Queen's Gambit
Declined .
Instead, Spassky chooses the so-called Tartakower Variation . He
apparently plans to develop the Black QB to b7 , although after the
exchange of Pawns on d5 (8 PxP) , the c8/h3 diagonal is opened for
Black , who may therefore change his mind anti decide to develop his
QB to e6 .
7 . . . P-QN3
Spassky, who had used this move in previous games , was of the
opinion that Black 's resultant position was not at all bad and that
possible forcing attempts by White to take advantage of it might be
refuted in a convincing way . But this does not seem to be correct .
8 PxP
200 Game 15
White opens the QB-file and insures that the long diagonal will be
obstructed by a Black Pawn on d5 either on Black' s Sth move if he
answers 8 . . . PxP or later (see move 10 . . . PxN) . If 8 . . . PxP,
the diagonal is closed at once and . . . P-QB4 is made a bit more
difficult; e . g . , 9 B-K2 P-B4 (doubtful) 10 PxP PxP 1 1 BxN BxB
1 2 NxP BxP 1 3 R-QN l B-QR6 14 0-0, and Black is in trouble . For
instance , 14 . . . B-K3 1 5 B-B4 N-B3 1 6 Q-R4 BxN 1 7 KR-Q l
N-N5 1 8 BxB NxB 1 9 QxB .
8 . . . NxP
Retaking with the Knight is preferable if White is playing for a

K-side attack , for the simplification that it forces facilitates the de
fense . On the other hand, it is not certain that in the strategic struggle
which follows in this game the exchange of Black' s KN for White' s
Q N and Black's K B for White ' s QB makes things easier for Black.
Exchanging light pieces does not fit into the scheme of the resultant
hanging Pawns, as we shall soon see .
9 BxB
Black must now choose between 9 . . QxB (the text) and

.
9 . . . NxB , which is also deserving of consideration . In the latter

case , (a) White has more Pawns in the center, and (b) Black' s QBP
may become weak as long as it is on c7 or c6 . On the other hand , if
Black plays . . . N-Q2 and . . . P-QB4 and if after QPxQBP Black
can retake with his Knight , then White no longer has an advantage .
The fact that Black threatens to equalize in a few moves makes it
necessary for White to take proper measures promptly .
If now 9 . . . NxB , the most obvious way to proceed is for White to

play P-K4 in order to answer an eventual . . . P-QB4 by P-Q5 . But
this is not advisable , for White ' s QP, which will have become a passed
Pawn , could be lost :
1 ) 1 0 B-B4 B-N2 1 1 0-0 N-Q2 1 2 P-K4 P-QB4 1 3 P-Q5 PxP 1 4

PxP? N-KB3 1 5 P-Q6 N-B4, and the Pawn i s lost o r i t could be
blocked .
2) 1 0 B-B4 B-N2 1 1 Q-K2 N-Q2 1 2 R-Q l Q-B 1 1 3 P-K4 (of
doubtful value) 1 3 . . . P-QB4 1 4 P-Q5 PxP 1 5 PxP N-B4 1 6 0-0
N-Q3 , and the Pawn is blocked , which means that its value is
decreased or even nonexistent .
3) 10 B-B4 B-N2 1 1 0-0 N-Q2 1 2 Q-K2 P-QB4 1 3 KR-Q l
3a) 1 3 . . . Q-B l (the Queen is not very well posted here) 1 4
N-QN5 ( 1 4 QR-B l opposing the Black Queen i s also good)
14 . . . Q-B3 1 5 QR-B l ( 1 5 PxP N-K4 is complicated but
leads to equality) 1 5 . . . P-R3 1 6 PxP ! NxP ( 1 6 . . . N-K4
1 7 QN-Q4 is now favorable for White since Black has weak
Pawns: 1 7 . . . NxNch 1 8 NxN PxP , for White's Rook on c l
prevents 1 8 . . . QxP) 1 7 N-Q6 with advantage to White ;
3b) 1 3 . . . Q-N l 14 B-N5 PxP (Black must avoid the
isolation of his QBP) 1 5 RxP N-KB3 ( 1 5 . . . N-QB4 1 6
P-QN4) 1 6 P-K4 and White stands better , for he controls more
space , has a better center , and an open file-all small advan
tages , but combined they may have some meaning ;
3c) 1 3 . . . PxP 1 4 NxP ! with the deadly threat of 1 5 NxP . The
only way to parry it is 1 4 . . . K-R l , after which White has
the choice between 15 BxP (resulting in a Rook + 2 Pawns vs .
Bishop + Knight) and 1 5 N-N5-Q6 or 1 5 B-N5 with new
threats . White has a great advantage . ''
4) 10 B-K2 B-N2 1 1 0-0 N-Q2 12 Q-R4 P-QB4
4a) 1 3 B-N5 BxN 14 PxB N-KB3 1 5 N-K4 resulting in a wild
position in which White stands better;
4b) 13 R-QB 1 with more space control and better chances for
White .
9 • • • QxB
lO NxN
202 Game 15
White plays for hanging Pawns , as the continuation demonstrates .

For this purpose the QB-file should be open and Black should have a
Pawn on d5 .
10 • • • PxN
1 1 R-Bl
Not knowing at this point at which square his KB will be most

effective , White first strengthens the pressure against Black' s Q-side .
If now 1 1 . . . Q-N5ch 1 2 Q-Q2 QxQch 1 3 KxQ , White has better
development , whereas Black has the problem of his backward QBP .
11 . . . B-K3
Although Black's choosing not to fianchetto his Bishop may be

surprising , this Bishop is certainly no less effective on e6 than on b7 ,
where its action would be blocked by its QP. Moreover, on b7 the
Bishop could interfere with B) ack ' s maneuvering on the Q-side .
12 Q-R4
In this way White permanently prevents . . . Q-N5ch, but basically

the move is made in order to continue with Q-R3 after . . . P-QB4 .
Note that . . . P-QB4 is unavoidabl-e , for at c7 or c6 the QBP will
become weak . At c5 it might also become weak , but there is some
compensation , as we shall see later.
12 • • • P-QB4
So Black advances his QBP, as he must .

Why did Spassky play this variation? Perhaps he thought he could
gain a psychological advantage by playing a doubtful variation which
he was sure he could handle . Sometimes an opponent may try so hard
to secure an advantage in such a line that he becomes very vulnerable .
White could now play 1 3 PxP at once but postpones it because for
the moment Black cannot prevent the exchange .
13 Q-R3
Prevents . . . P-B5 . As soon as the Black Queen is protected ,

Queen's Gambit Declined : Tartakower Variation 203
. . . P-B5 will be real threat. After a mere developing move such as

1 3 B-K2 , Black could answer 1 3 . . . P-B5 with a real and strong
Q-side majority .
13 . . . R-Bl
White will now play so as to give Black hanging Pawns (a pair of
Pawns on adjacent files that are separated from all other Pawns by at
least one file on either side) , which he can do within the next few
moves by PxBP PxBP and at such a time that he will be able to take the
maximum advantage of the hanging Pawns. The disadvantage of
hanging Pawns is that they are weak and can be attacked , but they have
the advantage of controlling many important squares (b4 , c4 , d4, e4)
and furnishing points of support for their possessor ' s minor pieces .
In order for White to minimize the advantage Black derives from
hanging Pawns, he will try to exchange minor pieces , for the fewer
minor pieces left , the fewer counterchances Black will have .
14 B-NS
This is in harmony with the above-mentioned idea of exchanging

minor pieces . It would be natural for Black to play . . . N-Q2 to
support his QBP, and if he did so , it could eventually be answered by
BxN , exchanging one of the minor pieces and exposing Black ' s QBP
to more severe pressure by the White pieces .
14 . � • P-R3
Black wishes to drive the Bishop back , hoping that he can then
develop his Knight . For the moment the Bishop is in no danger of
being taken , but after 1 6 . . . R-R2 it will be .
White now gives Black the hanging Pawns .
1 5 PxP
Not 1 5 0-0 Q-N2 1 6 B-K2 P-BS with a powerful Q-side majority for
Black .
15 • . • PxP
204 Game 15
If instead 1 5 . . . RxP, then 1 6 0-0 ! could follow . Black cannot

avoid hanging Pawns in any case .
16 0-0 R-R2
Geller suggested 1 6 . . . Q-N2 1 7 B-K2 , but stronger is 1 7 B-R4 in

order to keep control of d7 .
Larsen's 1 6 . . . Q-R2 , however , does deserve consideration , for
1 7 B-R4 could be followed by 1 7 . . . P-QR4 and 1 8 . . . N-R3 . The
Black Knight must be developed to help defend Black 's weaknesses
and possibly to occupy important squares created by the hanging
Pawns.
17 B-K2
This move looks like the loss of a tempo , but it is not . By playing 1 4
B-N5 White has induced Black t o weaken his Q-side .
17 • • • N-Q2
Black's hanging Pawns appear somewhat weak , but how does

White go about attacking them? The Black QP is sufficiently pro
tected , and yet White hopes to attack the QBP either by N-K5-Q3 or
N-Q4-N3 , as we shall see later .
If Black's QBP is forced to advance-which is not now possible
since the Black Queen is unprotected-then the strong square at d4
becomes free for the White Knight .
18 N-Q4
This is a strong move on the one hand because if White exchanges

his Knight for the Black Bishop , his advantage will increase because
of the reduction of the number of minor pieces, and on the other
because the Knight can go to b3 , attacking Black' s QBP .
If 1 8 BxQRP? KR-R l , winning a piece .
18 • • • Q-Bl
Black does not wish to enter an inferior endgame which would exist
after 1 8 . . . N-B3 19 N-N3 P-B5 ( 1 9 . . . N-Q2 20 R-B3) 20 QxQ
RxQ 21 N-Q4 or after 18 . . . K-B l 19 NxBch PxN 20 P-K4 or
19 . . . QxN 20 KR-Q 1 . Yet the text makes things still more difficult
for him.
19 NxB!
Even though White trades off an active Knight for an inactive

Bishop and although Black no longer has hanging Pawns , the move is
good because it simplifies to a position in which White can take
advantage of Black' s pawn structure . With 20 P-K4 ! White will be
able to wreck and split up that pawn structure .
19 • • • PxN
Black's pawn configuration Pc5-Pd5-Pe6 is not weak as such. But

White now has the possibility of breaking up that formation if he acts
immediatcrly . To that end he plays
20 P-K4!
206 Game 15
This is the big move of the game !
20 • • • P-QS?
Black had a number of continuations , but 20 . . . P-Q5 was cer

tainly the worst . Let us consider the choices :
1 ) 20 . . . PxP 2 1 B-N4 (stronger than 2 1 Q-R3 Q-B3 22 B-B4

N-B l 23 KR-K l R-Q l 24 RxP QxP , for example) 2 1 . . . Q-B3 22
KR-K l N-K4 23 RxKP NxB 24 RxN , and Black has several
serious weaknesses in his pawn position but is perhaps not yet lost .
2) 20 . . . P-B5 2 1 Q-R3 N-B4 (stronger than 2 1 . . . Q-B3 22
PxP PxP 23 B-B3) 22 PxP PxP 23 P-QN3 ! PxP 24 PxP R-N l
(24 . . . R-N2? 25 BxP) 25 Q-K3 R-QB2 26 B-B 3 , and Black
will not be able to avoid the loss of a Pawn : 26 . . . R-Q l ? 27
P-QN4 or 26 . . . Q-Q3 27 KR-Q l RxP 28 BxPch or
27 . . . NxP 28 RxR QxR 29 BxPch.
3) 20 . . . N-B3 21 PxP PxP 22 B-B 3 , and with his QR , Bishop ,
and Queen actively posted , White has good attacking chances
against Black' s weak Pawns .
From these variations it appears that Black cannot reach complete

equality , but he can still fight . The text is worse than the choices listed
because from now on only White can develop plans and take the
initiative , whereas Black is helpless. Moreover, all three variations
result in very simplified positions in which Black, due to the reduced
number of pieces , can still hope for a draw even after the loss of a
Pawn . This is not the case after 20 . . . P-Q5 .
21 P-B4
White has a 4-to-3 majority on the K-side, which guarantees an

attack . Moreover, White' s KB , which will soon go to c4, is coopera
tive and killing .
If now 2 1 . . . P-K4 22 PxP Q-K2 23 P-K6 and wins : 23 . . . QxP
24 B-B4 or 23 . . . N-B l 24 R-B7 or 23 . . . N-B3 24 P-K5 N-Q4 25
R-B7 .
21 . • • Q-K2
22 P-KS! R-N l
Black hopes to get some counterchances along the QN-file by

pressing against White's QNP, for the White Queen will soon leave its
present square, and later the Black QRP will play to a5 and a4 .
Nonetheless, Black's move does not mean much .
After 22 . . . N-N3 in order to prevent 23 B-B4, White gets just as
strong an attack by 23 Q-QN3 ! N-Q4 24 P-B5 !
23 B-B4
White occupies his strong square , forcing Black to maintain the

protection of both his QRP and his KP , but the main feature of the
position is White' s attacking possibilities .
23 • • • K-Rl
The alternative 23 . . . N-N3 would be refuted by 24 Q-QN3 , and

Black' s KP is lost .
24 Q-R3
White 's general strategy will be: (a) to open the KB-file by P-B5 ;
(b) to double Rooks on the KB-file , threatening R-B7; and (c) to bring
the Queen to e4 and the Bishop to d3 with a mating attack. Especially
(c) has to be carried out carefully to avoid allowing Black to get
counterchances . Study the moves 25 P-QN3 , 30 P-KR4, and 33
P-QR4 with that in mind .
If now 24 . . . RxP ? , then 25 BxP, and White ' s strong center
Pawns will soon decide .
208 Game 15
24 • • • N-B l
25 P-QN3 P-QR4
With the intention of playing . . . P-R5 , which might give Black

some counterchances in the long run .
26 P-BS
Following the plan outlined under White 's 24th move . The fact that
with this move White gives himself an isolated Pawn is of no impor
tance . An isolated Pawn is a weakness only if (a) it can be successfully
attacked , thus tying up important pieces for its defense ; or (b) the
opponent can occupy the square in front of the Pawn . Neither (a) nor
(b) is applicable here .
26 • • • PxP
Otherwise 27 P-B6 would follow .
27 RxP
According to plan . White is already threatening 28 R-B 7 .
27 • • • N-R2
This prevents 28 R-B7? because of 28 . . . N-N4! .
28 QR-BI Q-Ql
In order not to be bothered by R-B7 now or later .
29 Q-N3
In order to be able to continue with P-KR4 , which will hem in

Black ' s Knight . White is perhaps also thinking in terms of Q-N6
and/or R-B7 .
29 • • • R-K2
Black wishes to double his Rooks on the 2d rank and end up with
one of them on b7 and the other on e7 . He may also wish to put his
Queen on his 2d rank so as to secure maximum protection for his KNP.
30 P-KR4
With the double purpose of confining Black' s Knight and of limit

ing the movements of the Black Queen after White has played R-B7
RxR ; RxR , etc . Black now prevents a successful 3 1 R-B7 by
30 • • • R/l-N2
31 P-K6
Limiting the freedom of Black's forces even more. Now 3 1 . . . N

B3 would lose immediately to 32 RxN PxR 33 RxP R-KR2 34 Q-K5 !
R/N-N2 35 P-K7 , etc .
31 • • • QR-B2
Black has no counterplay whatsoever ; 3 1 . . . P-Q6 is refuted by 32

R-Q5 .
32 Q-KS
Preparing the deadly blow as outlined in the strategy under White 's
24th move . Now 32 . . . N-B3 would lead to a still more convincing
debacle for Black after 33 RxN .
32 • •, . Q-Kl
White now makes some "cat-and-mouse" moves . Black can only

move back and forth .
33 P-R4
This may be considered a way to prevent . . . P-R5 , although the

latter move has long been out of the question .
White could have struck the blow immediately by 33 B-Q3 and 34
Q-K4 (which follows later) , threatening the direct attack R-B8ch ,
etc . , but the text avoids possible errors , prevents counterplay, and
emphasizes Black ' s helplessness . We have already remarked that
33 . . . N-B3 34 RxN ! PxR 35 RxP leaves his King out in the open.
210 Game 15
33 • • • Q·Q l
34 R/l·B2 Q-Kl
35 R/2- B3 Q-Ql
36 B-Q3
One more step toward the mating attack outlined under White's
24th move . After 37 Q-K4 Black will no longer be able to resist .
36 • • • Q-Kl
37 Q-K4
Since Black is now helpless in face of the threatened 38 R-B8ch

NxR 39 RxNch QxR 40 Q-R7 mate , he plays
37 • • • N-B3
38 RxN PxR
39 RxP
If now 39 . . . R-KR2 , then 40 Q-K5 .
39 • • • K-Nl
40 B-B4
This immobilizes Black's R/K2 because if that Rook moved, White

could play P-K7 dis eh .
40 • • • K-Rl
41 Q-B4
Threatening 42 R-B8ch . Just as effective would have been 4 1

RxPch K-N l 4 2 Q-N4ch R-N2 43 P-K7ch , etc .
QueenJs Gambit Declined: Tartakower Variation 21 1
41 • • • Resigns
For if 4 1 . . . R-B 1 42 RxPch K-N l 43 Q-N4ch R-N2 44 P-K7 dis

eh Q-B2 45 QxR/ 1 mate, and if 41 . . . K-N l 42 QxRP followed by
43 R-N6ch.
Black lost the game first because he did not completely solve the
problems caused by his hanging Pawns and later because he chose the
least favorable reply when White confronted him with a difficult
decision by playing 20 P-K4 . The resulting attack against the Black
King led to White' s spectacular win .
Game 16
Ideas behind the Queen's Gambit Accepted

Purpose and importance of 5 • • • P-QB4 in the Queen's Gambit Accepted
Temporary sacrifice of the White QP
Mobility resulting from White's isolated QP
Occupation of a strong square
The outpost on the KS-square
Pressure by the attacker resulting in restraint on the part of the defender
Simplification to make the most of the initiative
Attack on the K-side with reduced material and with the additional aim of
play against the opponent's weak Pawns
The plus Pawn in Rook endings with possibilities on both wings
Tying the opponent's King to the defense of the Q-side in order to be able
to attack and win the Pawns on the K-side
Pressure
In the annotations of a chess game one frequently finds the state
ment that a piece or Pawn exerts pressure on or is pressing against a
square, a piece, or a Pawn . For example : " 1 P-K4 P-K4 2 N
KB3 . . . The Knight exerts pressure on the Black KP," or " The
Knight is pressing against Black' s K4-square . "
What is the nature of pressure?
It is closely associated with the concept of attack , of the threat , of
restraint on or limitation of the possibilities of one's opponent, but in
its entirety it constitutes a type of force .
If one attacks a hostile Pawn and the opponent protects this Pawn
with a piece , then the protecting piece is limited in its movements ,
since it is tied down to the protection of the attacked Pawn . The same
conditions may obtain when a piece is threatened and has to be
protected by another piece . However , an attacked piece can often
escape from the area of pressure by moving , whereas the less mobile
Pawns are frequently fixed and must be protected in order to avoid
being captured .
Pressure exists in various forms . It may consist simply in the control
212
Queen's Gambit Accepted 213
of a square in or near the hostile position , and in that role it can limit
the opponent ' s choices . At times pressure is an attack on a piece or a
Pawn , but it can also be a threat to assault the King when because of
this threat the opponent' s pieces must be tied down to protect the
King .
In the following diagram , a number of examples of different types
of pressure are illustrated .
The White Rook presses against Pg7 and limits the Black KR in its
moves . In the same way Nc5 presses against Pb7 , which is protected
by the Black Bishop . The same White Knight presses against Pe6 ,
which is twice protected, and against the squares a6 and d7 . The Pe5
presses against d6 and f6 ; Pb6 presses against a7 and c7 . These are
examples of the most important types of pressure by White .
The Black QR presses along the QR-file . Its pressure on a2 is
especially significant, for it prevents White from playing N/3-K4 by
threatening to win a Rook with . . . R-R7ch . In this case the pressure
can easily be eliminated by playing K-K3 .
Pressure can be increased by exerting more pressure either on the
same square or on a different square of the $ame complex. As the
pressure mounts , the defender' s situation can become very difficult .
In fact, pressure on a given position sometimes becomes so over
whelming that the defender cannot make a single move without losing
something ; he is then said to be in Zugzwang .
Sometimes it is possible to decrease pressure in a given area by
exerting counterpressure on the same area. One of the most common
instances of pressure and counterpressure is that in which Rooks of
opposite sides are posted on the same open file. Then the pressure of
each Rook is neutralized by the counterpressure of the other . In such
cases , players tend not to exchange Rooks unless by so doing they can
H
214 Game 16
end up with control of the file in question or at least eliminate the

pressure they exerted .
It is very important to understand the concept of pressure in chess .
Its application in a game is absolutely essential to effective chess play .
Queen's Gambit Accepted

Tournament - Pula, Yugoslavia - 1 971
Svetozar Gligoric Lajos Portisch

Yugoslavia Hungary
1 P-Q4 P-Q4
2 P-QB4 PxP
The Queen 's Gambit Accepted .

Black temporarily gives up his center QP for White's side QBP with
the idea that while White is taking the time to win back this gambit
Pawn , Black can advance his Q-side Pawns , develop his QB , and thus
have a much freer game than he would in the Queen 's Gambit
Declined .
In the Queen' s Gambit Accepted Black gets this free game if he
succeeds in neutralizing the superiority in the center which he has
given White by exchanging his center Pawn for a side Pawn . This can
be accomplished by playing the neutralizing move . . . P-QB4 at the
right time . Without . . . P-QB4 White would get an ideal center
(Pd4-Pe4) , from which a K-side attack might result , and Black would
remain in a cramped position .
3 N-KB3
This move develops the KN to its most effective square , from

which it exercises a measure of control over e5 and thus pre
vents . . . P-K4, which would be an excellent move after 3 P-K3 .
3 . . . N-KB3
Black also develops his KN to its best square , from which it

exercises a measure of control over d5 and e4 .
4 P-K3
If Black were now to try to hold his QBP by 4 . . . P-QN4, White

would be able to answer 5 P-QR4 and the game might continue
5 . . . P-QB3 6 PxP PxP 7 P-QN3 , threatening 8 PxP . After
7 . . PxP, White regains the gambit Pawn by 8 BxPch and 9 QxP . If
.
7 . . . B-K3 , then 8 PxP PxP 9 N-KS wins back the Pawn, but 9
BxP? (instead of 9 N-K5) loses a piece after 9 . . . BxB 10 Q-R4ch
QN-Q2 1 1 QxB R-B l , etc .
4 • • • P-K3
S BxP
White chooses the most efficient method of regaining the gambit

Pawn . Under certain circumstances 5 Q-R4ch followed by 6 QxP also
regains the Pawn .
Although 5 N-B3 is playable here and later, in positions where
Black may advance his Q-side Pawns it is better to postpone the
development of White' s QN , partly because it could be exposed to
several attacks such as . . . P-QN4-N5 , partly because QN-Q2 may
turn out to be better .
s . . . P-B4
This is the logical move at this point to restore the balance in the
center , which is the idea of the opening . Were Black not able to make
this move , White would have a majority in the center, and after some
preparation he would play P-K4 and later attack .
6 0-0
216 Game 16
A continuation of the development.
6 . • • P-QR3
This is the beginning of a system which combines the ideas of

neutralizing the center and fianchettoing the Black QB .
7 P-QR4
Obviously to prevent the advance of Black' s Q-side Pawns . How

ever, the text loses a tempo and entails a certain weakening of b4. It is
difficult to decide which of the preceding considerations weighs more
heavily .
7 • • • N-B3
Developing his QN and pressing against d4 with one more piece .

This is the logical move here . For instance , 7 . . B-K2 could be
.
answered by 8 PxP, losing a tempo for Black .
8 Q-K2
A sham sacrifice of a Pawn , made at the right time . White moves

his Queen to e2 in order to vacate d 1 so that it can be occupied by his
Rook and perhaps with the idea of playing P-K4 later. Now White
already has the possibility of the sequence 9 PxP BxP 1 0 P-K4.
8 • • • PxP
This is the right time to exchange center Pawns . Unless Black does
so here , White will play PxP himself in order to gain a tempo .
Possible also is 8 . . . B-K2 and after 9 PxP, not 9 . . . BxP,
which is a clear loss of tempo , but 9 . . . N-K5 ! followed by
10 . . . NxQBP.
9 R-Ql B-K2
If Black should try to hold the Pawn by 9 . . . B-B4, he would lose

after 10 PxP NxP? 1 1 NxN B xN 1 2 B-K3 , etc . , for 12 . . . P-K4 1 3
BxB cannot be answered b y 1 3 . . . PxB .
In some cases , a player will give back an extra Pawn in such a way
as to impede his opponent' s development, but in this position , giving

the Pawn back by 9 . . . P-Q6 does not seem quite satisfactory , as is
shown in Gligoric 's analysis : 9 . . P-Q6 10 BxP Q-B2 1 1 N-B3
.
B-B4 (and if 1 2 P-K4? N-KN5 , threatening both 1 3 . . . BxPch and

1 3 . . . N-Q5 ! , whereas after 1 1 . . . B-K2 , the advance 1 2 P-K4 is
rather strong) 1 2 N-K4 B-K2 1 3 B-Q2 0-0 14 QR-B I , and White has
the better game , for he has more development and is preparing to
control the QB-file .
10 PxP
Of course, 1 0 NxP is also possible , but then after 1 0 . . . Q-B2

chances are completely equal . With the text White deliberately ac
cepts the isolated Pawn in hopes of taking advantage of the greater
mobility involved . A diagonal is opel)ed for the White QB , and the
K-file is cleared for action along that line .
10 • • • 0-0
1 1 N-B3
White now brings a third unit of pressure to bear on d5 and threatens

1 2 P-Q5 . If , for instance , Black should play 1 1 . . . P-QN3 to de
velop his QB , the advance 12 P-Q5 would be very effective ; e . g . ,
1 2 . . . PxP 1 3 NxP NxN 14 BxN and wins , since Black ' s Knight is
attacked , and his KB must be protected by his Queen . Likewise after
1 1 . . . B-Q2 the advance 1 2 P-Q5 could be unpleasant for Black . So
in order to prevent the advance of the White QP, which he fears , Black
answers
11 • • . N-Q4
In such a position White ' s standard reply is usually 1 2 N-K5 , which

from a strategical point of view makes room on the K-side for White' s
Queen and KR . But i n this position , 1 2 N-K5 i s not effective , for
Black could get an equal game by exchanging : 1 2 . . . KNxN 1 3 PxN
NxN 1 4 PxN Q-B2, and although White has more space on the K-side ,
which may result in a K-side attack, White' s QBP on the open file is a
serious weakness . So White plays a move which will put one of his
pieces in a position to attack effectively later .
12 B-Q3!
218 Game 16
In order to attack Black ' s KRP at the right moment. Note that at this
point Black ' s K-side is devoid of pieces with only his KB and his
Queen to stop a White attack on it . Black now takes advantage of the
fact that b4 is unprotected because of the advance of White's QRP .
12 • • • QN-NS
With this move Black reinforces his Knight on d5 and gains a tempo
by forcing the White KB to move once again .
13 B-Nl P-QNJ
In order to develop his QB to b7 . If Black had preferred to develop

his Bishop to d7 instead , he might well have gotten into trouble :
1 3 . . . B-Q2 1 4 N-K5 B-QB 3 1 5 R-R3 R-B l 1 6 N-K4 N-B 3 1 7
NxNch BxN 1 8 BxPch KxB 1 9 Q-R5ch K-N l 20 R-R3 followed by
mate . This mating combination became possible after the 3d rank was
freed for the White Rook by 1 6 N-K4 (above) , and so one might ask
why White could not free the 3d rank by 1 6 NxN. The answer is that
after 1 6 . . . QxN Black threatens mate on g2 ; therefore , after 1 7
BxPch KxB 1 8 Q-R5ch K-N l White cannot administer the deciding
blow because of the threatened mate .
Let us now examine the position with regard to White ' s isolated
QP . One of its characteristics is that it gives White points of support in
Black ' s territory . Here, for instance , White ' s QP would support a
White piece on e5 and also on c5 if Black did not have a Pawn on b6 .
But since the QP is isolated , both the QB- and K-file are open , which
makes it possible for White to support a piece on e5 or c5 (if Black did
not have a Pawn at b6) not only by his QP but also by his Rook , Queen ,
or any other piece . This position poses a very difficult problem for
White . He has to decide which line to follow in order to take advantage
of his attacking position .
(a) He can play 14 Q-K4, threatening mate , and force a weaken

ing of Black' s K-wing . However , it is questionable whether after
1 4 . . . P-B4 1 5 Q-K2 the loss of two moves balances the
weakening of Black' s KP , which is sufficiently protected for the
moment . Moreover , the Black KBP now prevents White from
stationing pieces on his important e4-square and in addition blocks
action by the White KB along the diagonal . Certainly, e5 will be a
welcome strong square and outpost for the White Knight , but
everything considered, it appears that apart from the KN , the
White pieces do not have too many possibilities for future
development .
(b) White can play 14 N-K5 immediately . In addition to being a
factor in an eventual attack on Black' s King , this Knight can also
go to c4 and render good service on the Q-side .
(c) With the above maneuver in mind , the preparatory move 1 4
P-R5 seems recommendable, for after 1 4 . . . PxP, 1 5 N-K5 will
be really strong , since at the proper time the White KN can go to c4
and play a part in regaining the temporarily sacrificed QRP with
pressure on Black' s Q-side-as will happen later when White ' s
QR, supported b y the Knight a t c 4 , recaptures the QRP .
14 P-RS
If now 14 . . . P-QN4, the reply 1 5 N-K5 would not be so effec

tive, since White lacks the possibility of continuing with N-QB4.
Instead, 15 N-K4 may now be considered, after which 1 5 . . . B-N2
1 6 N-B5 BxN 1 7 PxB . White does not . mind exchanging his well
posted Knight for Black' s Good Bishop, for now Black' s K-wing is
weakened because of the absence of his KB .
Or Black can develop his QB to b7 or to d7 . If 1 4 . . . B-N2 1 5
N-QR4, White gets control of c5 after 1 5 . . . PxP or 1 5 . . . P-QN4
or, if Black plays any other 1 5th move , after 16 PxP.
White' s control of c5 by a White Knight on a4 may be of some
importance, and that is why Black preferred to reply
14 • • • B-Q2
220 Game 16
With the text Black's QB controls a4 . If White should now consider

playing 1 5 N-QR4 in order to force Black's QNP to move and by so
doing to get control of c5 , Black's 14 . . . B-Q2 would discourage his
opponent from playing 1 5 N-QR4 , for that move would be answered
by 1 5 . . . BxN .
However , since , as the game develops , it does not turn out that
Black is able to stop White's initiative on other fronts , probably
14 . . . B-N2 followed by 1 5 N-QR4 PxP , ceding the control of c5 to
White , would have been better than the text move , 14 . . . B-Q2 .
15 N-KS
In order to bring his QN to c5 by 1 6 NxB QxN 1 7 N-R4 . It is a battle

on the Q-side for the possession of c5 . White is attempting at the same
time to build up an attack .
White does not care if he loses his QRP by . . . PxP . In the first
place , that exchange would give him c5 , and in the second place,
Black would have a rather worthless doubled isolated QRP which
White would regain in the long run .
15 • • • PxP
16 R-RJ
Usually it would be dangerous for White to play his valuable QR to

a square where Black is threatening it indirectly by his KB , but here
Black has no effective discovered attack by his QN .
White now threatens 1 7 NxN (in order to clear the 3d rank for
horizontal Rook movements) , and after 17 . . . NxN 1 8 BxPch wins
as above: 18 . . . KxB 19 Q-R5ch K-N l 20 R-R3 . This threat is
possible because White has so maneuvered that he has more or less
forced Black to play his QB to d7 instead of to b7 . If the Black Bishop
were at b7 , for instance , the combination would not work because, as
we have seen above , Black could answer 1 7 NxN by 17 . . . QxN ,
threatening mate .
16 • • • P-B4
Blocking the diagonal along which White's KB can act is the best
way to prevent White ' s attack . However , now Black' s backward KP
could become a problem since it will be vulnerable .
17 NxN
White exchanges because Black ' s Knights are very strong and in
order to clear his 3d rank for his QR .
17 • • • NxN
Things would not be made much easier by 1 7 . . . PxN . White

would continue 1 8 NxB (in order to free e5 for his QB) 1 8 . . . QxN
1 9 B-B4 followed by 20 B-K5 , and White' s outpost at e5 leads in the
long run to the creation of a passed Pawn . Since the White Bishop at e5
would be very strong , Black would try to get rid of it , and the only way
would be to try to play in such a way as to exchange the Bishop for his
Knight or his KB , and a passed Pawn for White would be the result of
such an exchange .
The game now enters a new phase . White' s pieces are better placed ,
but White is temporarily a Pawn down and has two isolated Pawns .
However , his QR , although en prise , is well placed for action , his
Knight is very strong on e5 , and Black' s backward KP constitutes a
serious weakness .
How will White now make the most of his advantage?
18 NxB
It may be surprising that White would exchange his well-posted

Knight for Black' s Bad Bishop , but by so doing he gets a better
opportunity to exploit the weaknesses of Black's backward KP, can
presently win back Black' s Pa5 and can exert pressure on Black' s Pa6 .
18 • • • QxN
Protecting his weak KP, for if 1 8 . . . BxR 1 9 NxR BxN 20

QxKPch, etc .
19 RxP
Regaining his Pawn and attacking Black' s remaining RP twice .

With Two Bishops and attacking chances on Black' s KP, White has a
slight superiority . In the meantime, White' s attacking chances on the
K-side are practically nullified because of the position of Black' s
222 Game 16
KBP. Since Black 's QRP is attacked by the White Queen and QR and
protected only by its QR , Black protects it a second time by
19 • . . N-B2
White now strengthens his pressure on Black ' s KP by
20 B-R2 B-Q3
To prevent the White Rook from going to e5 . White now looks for a
square on which to put added pressure and plays
21 B-QB4
Bringing additional pressure on Black' s QRP.
21 . . • K-Rl
This gets the Black King out of the line of the White Bishop . If
White now takes Black' s QRP by 22 BxRP , Black has a tactical
resource to win back his lost Pawn: 22 . . . BxPch 23 KxB Q-Q3
followed by 24 . . . NxB .
Since White now finds no direct way of continuing to apply pres
sure , he looks around for other ways of improving his position .
22 Q-B3
Among other things, this move will allow White to continue with
B-B4 , threatening to eliminate the Black Bishop , Black' s only very
active piece, or to place White ' s Bishop on the strong square e5 .
22 . • . B-NS
To eliminate the weakness of his QRP. White could now well play
23 R-K5 , and the game might continue 23 . . . B-Q3 24 R-K2 , but he
has other plans .
23 R-Rl P-QR4
The weakness of Black ' s QRP has been eliminated .

24 B-84!
A very strong move . Strategically, White intends to play his Bishop

to e5 and thus create new possibilities for pressure against Black' s
position . Tactically , he threatens to win a Pawn by 25 BxN QxB 26
BxP .
If now 24 . . . B-Q3 , then 25 B-K5 i s very strong . For instance ,
25 . . . BxB 26 PxB Q-K2 27 R-Q6 with strong pressure on the Black
position .
24 • • • N-Q4
In order to avoid the threatened 25 BxN and incidentally to reduce

the pressure on Black's KP . But this allows White to establish a strong
outpost on e5 by
25 B-K5
Another very strong move . Now Black can no longer afford to play
25 . . . B-Q3 because then 26 BxN wins � Pawn .
25 • • • KR-Bl
26 Q-K2
To gain control of the QB-file by playing B-R6 , thus driving the

Black KR from the QB-file . Black cannot answer 26 . . . R-B 3
because of 2 7 B-N5 .
26 • • • Q-N2
27 P-R3
224 Game 16
In the ensuing struggle for the QB-file White may need an escape
square for his King, as will become evident at White 's 3 1 st move .
27 • • • R-B3
To double Rooks on the QB-file . Now 28 B-N5 is answered by

28 . . . R-N3 .
28 QR-Bl QR-Bl
29 BxN
The plan is to simplify and accentuate White's advantage , for his

remaining Bishop at e5 is pressing against Black' s K-wing and is
much stronger than the Black Bishop, which does little more than
protect Black' s QRP and prevent White from gaining access to a few
squares of lesser importance .
29 • • • PxB
30 RxR
White leaves the QB-file to Black . He does not wish a general

exchange of heavy pieces because he needs material for the attack
against the Black King , which will soon follow .
30 • • • QxR
Equal material-each side has two isolated Pawns-but White's
Bishop exerts more pressure than Black ' s . Even more important is
that White ' s pressure makes the Black Pawns the more vulnerable .
Black must watch the defense of both his QRP and his KNP, and in
general it is difficult to defend two points at the same time .
31 R-Q3!
Thanks to the flight square created by White 's 27 P-R3 , White can
develop his attack against the Black King with greater freedom than he
could have if . . . Q-B8ch had forced him to pause there and later
exchange his Queen for the Black Queen .
If the Black Queen should now try to penetrate the White position
by 3 1 . . . Q-B7, which is a very plausible continuation , it is impor
tant that it be answered by the promising sacrifice 32 BxPch KxB . The
Black King would then be exposed to a number of checks by the White
Rook and Queen , and such checks generally lead to a forced mate . But
it is probable that neither of the players had calculated the exact
consequences of these checks . White must have observed that after
this sacrifice he had a least a draw with good chances for more . This
could have been a sufficient reason for him to make it. The same
reasoning could have made the Black player decide not to permit the
sacrifice .
It is noteworthy that the sacrifice does not lead to mate , or in any
case not to a forced mate , but that it does lead to positions in which the
chances completely favor White . After 3 1 . . . Q-B7 32 BxPch KxB :
1 ) 33 R-N3ch( ?) K-B2! 34 Q-R5ch (if 34 Q-K5 B-B l ! , and exact

analysis shows that White cannot carry the attack any further)
34 . . . K-K3 ! 35 R-K3ch K-Q3 36 Q-B7 (threatening mate)
36 . . . K-B3 ! 37 R-K6ch B-Q3 (now Black is threatening mate) .
The Black King has come into safety , and it is very questionable
whether White can still get a draw .
2) 33 Q-K5ch K-B2
2a) 34 QxBPch K-K l ! 35 R-K3ch K-Q l 36 QxPch K-B2,
and the Black King comes into safety , but this does not mean
that White could not force a draw at any time ;
2b) 34 QxQPch K-B3 [after 34 . . . K-K l , there follows 35
R-K3ch K-B l 36 R-N3 , and we get positions. similar to those
226 Game 16
we shall treat under 3)] 35 Q-K5ch K-B2 36 QxPch K-K I ! 37

P-Q5 ! (37 Q-K6ch K-Q l and 37 R-K3ch K-Q l do not lead to
anything) . White now has three Pawns for the piece and a
magnificent attacking position . Black can continue by
37 . . . Q-B8ch 38 K-R2 Q-B2ch 39 P-KN3 , but then he has
no follow-up. It will not be easy for him to defend his vulner
able King permanently without making material concessions.
Another possibility is 37 . . . K-Q l (instead of 37 . . . Q
B8ch) , after which White continues 38 P-Q6 ! , and now
38 . . . QxNP fails against 39 Q-N5ch K-Q2 40 Q-N5ch
K-K3 41 R-K3ch KxP 42 R-Q3ch K-K2 or K-K3 43 Q-Q7ch ,
winning the Rook .
3) 33 Q-K5ch K-B l 34 R-N3 Q-B 8ch (after 34 . . . Q-B 3 ,
White wins b y 3 5 QxPch K-K2 3 6 R-N7ch , etc . ) 3 5 K-R2 Q-B2
(with the intention of maintaining the pin on the White Rook if
White now checks with his Queen) 36 QxPch K-K l 37 P-B4!
(unpinning the Rook , which now threatens 3 8 R-N8ch)
37 . . . B-B I 38 R-N8 K-K2 (the only move, for Black is very
handicapped because his Queen must protect the Black Rook) 39
R-R8 ! and Black can no longer prevent great material losses .
One general remark : the complete elaboration of all possible varia

tions , including even the simplest , would require many pages . The
above analysis only presents some of the possibilities offered after
3 1 . . . Q-B7 32 BxPch KxB .
31 • • • Q-Q2
32 R-KN3 B-Bl
33 P-N3
This advance hampers Black by making it very difficult for him to

liquidate his QRP, which is a continual weakness since it is vulnerable
to attack . Moreover , the Black Queen is tied down to the protection of
its KBP . If in this position Black should play 33 . . . P-R5 , the game
could continue 34 PxP QxP 35 Q-R5 R-B8ch 36 K-R2 Q-Q2
(36 . . . Q-Q8 37 BxPch ! and wins) 37 R-B 3 , winning the KBP .
Note that White ' s pressure against Black' s KNP makes the defense
of Black ' s QRP more difficult . With the text White threatens 34 Q-R6
Q-Q l 35 Q-K6 , winning Black' s BP.
33 • • • R-Rl
In order to liquidate his QRP by . . . P-R5 , etc .

After 33 . . . K-N l (to unpin the KNP) 34 Q-R6 (very strong ,
since Black now has the problem of defending his QRP) 34 . . . R
B 8ch (the only way to proceed in order to protect the Black QRP) 35
K-R2 R-QR8 36 P-N4 ! P-R5 37 P-N5 P-R6 38 P-N6 and
1 ) 38 . . . P-R7 39 P-N7 R-QN8 40 P-N8 = Q , etc . ;

2) 38 . . . R-QN8 39 Q-R 8 !
2a) 3 9 . . . RxP 40 RxPch QxR 4 1 BxQ KxB 4 2 Q-R7ch,
etc . ;
2b) 39 . . . P-N3 40 RxP RxP 41 R-R7 Q-K3 42 R-N7ch
followed by mate .
34 Q-B2
Threatening to win a Pawn by 35 R-KB 3 .
34 • • . R-Bl
35 Q-Q2 R-Rl
Again, 35 . . . P-R5 would cost a Pawn after 36 PxP QxP 37

Q-N5 Q-Q2 38 R-B 3 .
36 Q-NS K-Nl
Taking the King out of the line with the White Bishop so that he can
avoid the loss of his BP by protecting it with . . . P-N3 .
37 R-KB3 P-N3
Black' s KBP is now protected, but the diagonal is opened for

White .
38 R-B3
Threatening 39 R-B7 with a quick decision thanks to open lines.

228 Game 16
Now the seemingly obvious 38 . . . R-B 1 is refuted by 39 RxR QxR

40 Q-B6, etc .
38 • • • Q-Ql
In face of a strong attack, exchange pieces . Black works toward that

end now and in the following moves . On the other hand , the attacker
must try to avoid the exchange and strengthen the attack unless he can
attain decisive material advantage by exchanging . For that reason ,
White plays
39 Q-Bl !
After 3 9 Q-N3 or 3 9 Q-B4? Black can prevent the penetration by

39 . . . R-R2 . After the text , 39 . . . R-R2 is not good on account of
40 R-B 8 .
39 • • • B-Q3
The relatively best defense .
40 Q-B4
Since he cannot prevent the exchange, White will at least retain

control of territory .
40 • • • BxB
Also after 40 . . . R-R3 41 BxB RxB (4 1 . . . QxB 42 QxQ RxQ

43 R-B8ch K-N2 44 R-QR8) 42 Q-K5 , Black will not be able to
prevent the loss of a Pawn in the long run . One example : 42 . . . R

Q2 43 R-B5 R-Q3 (Black cannot do anything) 44 R-N5 , and Black is
in Zugzwang . Every move he makes costs him material ; e . g . , 1)
44 . . Q-B2 45 RxQP ; 2) 44 . . . Q-Q2 45 RxRP ; 3) 44 . . . R-Q2
.
45 R-N8 ; 4) 44 . . K-B 1 45 Q-R8ch, etc . ; 5) 44 . . . P-R3 45 R-N7

.
Q-KB l (45 . . . R-Q2 46 R-N8) 46 R-QR7 ; 6) 44 . . . Q-B3 45 QxQ

RxQ 46 RxQP.
41 QxB R-R2
Black cannot permit R-B7 , but now the weakness of his isolated
QRP and QP will come into play .
42 R-B5 R-K2
Black can no longer avoid the loss of a Pawn , since 42 . . . R-Q2 is

refuted by 43 R-N5 , threatening 44 R-N8 . For instance , 43 . . . Q-K2
44 R-N8ch K-B2 45 Q-R8 , etc .
43 RxQP
After 43 QxPch QxQ 44 RxQ R-QN2 Black can get better coun
terchances , for he wins White' s QNP . In the game White can keep his
QNP, and Black captures only White's QP .
43 • • • Q-B2
44 QxQ RxQ
45 RxRP R-QN2
White now has two plus Pawns , but this is only temporary . When
one has a plus Pawn , the farther from the l<-wing the Pawn is , the
stronger it will be. Therefore , White defends his QNP.
46 R-R3 R-N5
47 P-Q5
A few tempos would have been saved by 47 K-B l followed by 48

K-K2 .
47 • • • K-N2
48 K-B l K-B3
230 Game 16
49 K-K2 K-K4
50 K-Q3 KxP
The game is entering a new phase . White must now maneuver in

such a way that the Black King will be confined to the Q-side , and he
must then try to capture one or two Black Pawns on the K-side .
51 K-B3 R-K5
Both in order to keep the White King from the K-side and , if
possible , to attack White' s K-side Pawns .
52 R-R4
By thi:eatening an exchange of Rooks White manages to drive the

Black Rook from active positions . Black must avoid exchanging
Rooks , for the resulting Pawn ending is an easy win for White under
all circumstances .
52 • • • R-K7
53 R-Q4ch
White will now be taking advantage of checking opportunities to

get his pieces into favorable positions and then put his own Rook in
such a position that the Black Rook cannot attack his K-side Pawns .
53 • • • K-B4
After 53 . . . K-K4 54 R-Q2 White would win simply by advanc

ing his QNP .
54 P-N4ch K-N4
55 R-QSch K-B3
Not 55 . . . K-R5 ? because of 56 R-R5 mate .
56 R-Q2
After some in-between moves by which White was able to

strengthen his position on the Q-wing , the White Rook now has the
opportunity to defend his own Pawns . While the Black King has to
keep an eye on the White passed Pawn , the White King can switch to
the other side at the right time and capture some of Black' s Pawns.
Moreover, it is also possible that the White Rook can do so .
56 • • • R-K8
57 P-B3 R-KN8
The White Rook is temporarily bound to its 2d rank , but now White
goes into action with his King .
58 K-Q4
With the text, which threatens 59 K-K5 , White forces the Black
Rook back to e l , and then the White Rook can leave its 2d rank .
White is now willing to give up his extra QNP in exchange for an
attack on the Black K-side Pawns . But Black cannot permit the
penetration of the White King via e5 , which would cost at least two
Pawns (58 . . . K-N4 59 K-K5 KxP 60 K-B6) , so he plays
58 • • • R-K8
59 R-B2ch
Since Black has prevented the White King from marching to the
K-wing , White tries to realize his plan by penetrating with his Rook . If
he succeeds in exchanging all the Pawns on the K-wing with the
232 Game 16
exception of one White Pawn , he has a theoretical win in view of the

bad position of the Black King , which is too far away to help stop the
White passed Pawn . An example of how White' s plans might work is
illustrated by the line: 59 . . . K-N4 60 R-B7 R-K7 6 1 P-N4 PxP 62
BPxP P-R4 63 PxP PxP 64 R-B5ch KxP 65 RxP, and according to
theory White must win this ending , but it will not be easy .
59 • • • K-N3
Preventing White' s plan of 60 R-B7, but Black will soon have to

make greater concessions .
60 K-QS
Planning 61 R-B6ch (which happens) and after 61 . . . K-N4 62

R-B7 or after 6 1 . . . K-N2 62 R-KB6 followed by 63 R-B7ch .
60 • • • R-K6
Black simply waits , keeping his Rook on the K-file so as not to let
the White King go to the K-side .
61 R-B6ch K-N4
If 6 1 . . . K-N2, then 62 R-B6 followed by 63 R-B7ch .
62 R-B7 P-R4
Relatively better, but also a loss , is 62 . . . R-K7 63 P-N4, as in the

line under 59 R-B2ch .
63 R-N7ch
This gives Black the disagreeable choice between 63 . . . K-R5 (as

in the game) 64 K-B4, threatening mate (the point is that the Black
Rook cannot effectively check in this position) , and 63 . . . K-R3 64
R-KN7 , and White wins the NP with check .
63 • • • K-RS?
64 K-B4
White abandons his plan to win on the K-wing and proceeds to win
with his QNP .
64 • • • K-R6
65 R-R7ch Resigns
The White passed Pawn advances rapidly and will cost Black at
least his Rook . For instance, 65 . . . K-N7 66 P-N5 R-B6ch 67 K-Q5
R-N6 68 K-B6 R-B6ch 69 K-N7 K-N6 70 P-N6 K-B5 7 1 R- R S K-N4
72 R-KS R-B7 73 R-K5ch K-N5 74 K-NS RxP 75 K-B7 R-B7ch 76
K-Q6 and, for instance, 76 . . . R-B l 77 P-N7 or 76 . . . R-Q7ch 77
R-Q5 R-K7 78 P-N7 R-K l 79 K-B 7 , etc . In general , if a King cannot
help in stopping a hostile passed Pawn supported by its King , the
passed Pawn must cost the defending side its Rook .
Black lost the game because after an interesting and, at the outset,
even struggle, Black could nor prevent the White Bishop from oc
cupying a dominating square which forced him into a completely
passive position in which his weakened Pawns became an even greater
burden . By simplifying at the right time , White got into a R + P vs . R
ending , which he managed to convert into a win by exact and systema
tic treatment.
An extraordinary game, rich in detail .
Game 1 7
Ideas behind the 4 Q-82 line of the Nimzoindian Defense

Implications of 4 . • • P-QB4
Neglect of K-side development
Opening the position when one has a lead in development
The creation of complications when one has more pieces in a given area
Opening lines to press the attack
Neglect of K-side Development

One of the most elementary and fundamental principles of chess
play is rapid piece development. Each piece should be brought out as
soon as possible , taking into consideration the requirements of the
successive positions in the opening phase of the game . As long as a
piece remains undeveloped , it contributes nothing to attack and little
to defense . For all practical purposes the player with a given number
of undeveloped pieces is that many pieces down , and this is even truer
if his opponent has been able to develop his pieces .
Failure t o develop any piece tends t o be bad , but still more serious is
failure to develop the K-side pieces , especially when the Q-side is
wide open and one's King is by force of circumstances still in the
center of the board . In such cases, not only is the King in great danger
of attack , but the undeveloped KB , KN , and KR are only partly
available either to protect it or to participate in the struggle for
equality .
In such a situation one ' s adversary has all the play . He can relent
lessly attack the undeveloped player' s King on the one hand and his
Queen and the few developed minor pieces on the other. Thus, the
undeveloped player is so busy defending that he has no time to develop
his K-side pieces.
Failure to develop one or more pieces is a common error of
amateurs , but it is interesting to note that in certain openings, because
of special considerations , even a master may neglect piece develop
ment in his desire to attain other ends first. But the nature of chess is
234
Nimzoindian Defense: 4 Q-B2 P-B4 Line 235
such that even the master will then have to suffer the consequences of
his lack of piece development .
Nimzoindian Defense -4 Q-82 P-84 Line

lnterzonal - Petropolls, Brazil 1 973
-
Vlastimil Hort - Czechoslovakia Borislav Ivkov - Yugoslavia

1 P-Q4 N-KB3
Instead of occupying the center with a Pawn , as was normally done

in earlier times , Black exerts pressure on the center with his KN . For
that reason White cannot now play P-K4 without further preparation .
2 P-QB4 P-K3
3 N-QB3 B-N5
The Nimzoindian Defense .

In agreement with modern principles the text can be regarded as
indirect pressure against the White center. The idea behind 3 . . . B
N5 is to prevent a White P-K4 and also to get a more active opening
than Black often does with the Queen' s Gambit Declined . In the
Nimzoindian Black is willing , if necessary , to exchange his KB for the
White QN in order to get a rapid development and sometimes to force
the doubling of White's QBP . In many games it has been shown that
the doubled QBP may constitute a serious weakness in the White
position .
4 Q-B2
On c2 the Queen renews the positional threat of P-K4 and by

protecting its QN affords White the possibility of avoiding doubled
Pawns if Black should play . . . BxNch .
4 • • • P-B4
Black immediately attacks the White center . White could now

continue with 5 P-K3 or 5 N-B 3 , but in either case Black could answer
5 . . . P-Q4 or 5 . . . N-B3 and would have no difficulty equalizing .
236 Game 17
However , White finds an answer which leads to sharper positions .
S PxP
After this move Black does have difficulty in equalizing . He must

find a series of strong , enterprising , and to some extent unexpected
moves , including a pawn sacrifice . For instance , after 5 . . . BxP, the
Black pressure against the White center has disappeared, and White
gets an excellent position with 6 N-B3 followed by 7 B-N5 because he
has more freedom . Black' s QP will constitute a problem . If he
plays . . . P-Q4, the QP might easily become isolated through White
moves such as B-N5 and R-Q l . But Black is not forced to recapture
the Pawn with his Bishop .
s . . . 0.0(!)
The Pirc Variation .

Black ' s idea is to develop as rapidly as possible and to take advan
tage of the fact that White has not yet developed his K-side .
This is a difficult position for both sides . White must continue his
development, always taking into account the strategical and tactical
consequences of . . . BxNch ; Black must find a way to win back die
Pc5 and exercise keen judgment as to the value of . . . BxNch . In one
position , . . . BxNch may be bad for Black , whereas in a slightly
different position it may be strong . In most cases , Black does not
play . . . BxN voluntarily but only when forced to do so by White' s
P-QR3 .
White now has several possibilities .
The usual move in this position is 6 N-B 3 . Then after 6 . . . N-R3
7 P-QR3 B xNch 8 QxB NxP White has the Bishop pair, but Black has
some counterplay because he controls e4 .
Or he can play 6 B-N5 , and the game might continue 6 . . . N-R3
7 P-QR3 BxNch 8 QxB NxP 9 P-B 3 KN-KS ! 10 BxQ NxQ 1 1 B-K7
N-N6 ! 1 2 BxR KxB 1 3 R-Q l NxR 14 KxN P-QR4, and Black stands a
bit better. Instead of 7 P-QR3 White should play 7 P-B3 .
Another possibility i s 6 B-Q2 N-R3 7 P-QR3 BxN 8 BxB NxP. The
advantage of this line is that White keeps his Queen on c2 , where it
controls the center and is not exposed to attack by . . . N-K5 .
Moreover, White' s QB on c3 takes an active part in the continuation of
the game .
Hoping to do better than in any of the above lines , White answers
6 B-B4
Now White exercises pressure on d6 and maintains the possibility

of playing P-B 3 in order to dispute Black's efforts to control e4 with
his KN. If Black now continues with the obvious 6 . . . BxP, White
gets a good development and a fine game with 7 P-K3 and 8 N-B 3 .
6 • • • N-R3
To be able to capture White 's Pc5 and then to exert more pressure
on e4 .
Also deserving of consideration is 6 . . . Q-R4 . For example :
I ) 7 B-Q6 R-K l (stronger than 7 . . N-K5 , after which White

.
wins the Exchange by 8 QxN ! BxNch 9 K-Q l BxP 10 R-N l ;

nonetheless, the position remains difficult) 8 P-B3 (8 . . . N-K5
was threatening) 8 . . B xP 9 BxB QxB with about even
.
chances . If 10 P-K4, Black plays 10 . P-Q4.

• .
2) 7 B-K5 N-N5 8 B-Q6 BxP ! 9 BxR? BxPch 10 K-Q2 Q-N4ch

1 1 P-K3 QxPch 12 K-Q l Q-K8 mate.
3) 7 P-K3 (best) 7 . . N-K5 8 N-K2 NxN 9 NxN QxBP 1 0
.
0-0-0, and White has the initiative .
7 P-QR3
White plays the text in order to force Black to make a choice .

238 Game 17
7 • • • BxNch
8 QxB NxP
It is important now that one of Black 's Knights be able to go to e4,

where it will be protected by Black ' s other Knight .
How should White now continue ? We will consider 1 ) the develop
ing moves 9 N-B3 and 9 P-K3 ; 2) 9 P-QN4; 3) 9 B-Q6 ; and the actual
continuation of the game , 9 R-Q l ? .
1 ) Safest in this position is to begin developing the K-side with 9

N-B 3 or 9 P-K3 .
2) However , most enterprising is 9 P-QN4 , with which White
could perhaps maintain a slight positional advantage: 9 . . QN
.
K5 1 0 Q-N2 P-Q4 1 1 P-B 3 N-Q3 1 2 P-B5 N-B4 (better than

1 2 . . . N-B5 1 3 Q-B2 followed by 1 4 P-K4 or 1 4 P-K3) 1 3 P-N4
N-R5 14 B-N5 N-N3 , after which the situation is not too clear ,
although chances seem equal .
3) If 9 B-Q6 QN-K5 1 0 Q-Q4 NxB 1 1 QxQN N-K5 1 2 Q-Q4
P-Q4 , Black is still more advanced in development than in the
game , and White is without any real compensation .
9 R-Ql ?
Since Black' s natural reply i s 9 . . . P-Q4, the text looks fine

because it exerts pressure along the Q-file . However in many varia
tions , because of the undeveloped White K-side Black can answer
. . . P-Q4 and sacrifice his QP successfully .
9 • • •
Now things are not so simple , for Black gets counterchances .

White ' s attempt to win the QP is dubious, for then all Black ' s pieces
come into action :
1 ) 1 0 PxP KN-K5 1 1 Q-B2 ( 1 1 Q-Q4 PxP 1 2 QxP Q-KB3 ,

threatening White ' s QNP, his QB , and indirectly his KBP)
1 1 . . . Q-B3 1 2 P-K3 PxP ( 1 2 . . . B-Q2 is also strong)
l a) 1 3 P-QN4 N-R5 ! , and now 1 4 QxN fails against
1 4 . . . Q-B6ch 1 5 K-K2 Q-N7ch followed by mate ;
l b) 1 3 RxP B-K3 1 4 RxN NxR 1 5 QxN QR-B l , and Black
has only a Rook for two pieces and a Pawn , but he has a Rook
check on c l which will win a piece : 1 6 Q moves R-B8ch 1 7
K-K2 B-B5ch, etc .
2) 1 0 P-QN4 KN-K5 1 1 Q-B2 Q-B3 1 2 P-K3 N-R5 ! with the
same complications as in l a) .
1 0 P-B3(?)
To prevent either of the Black Knights from going to e4 , but White

gets too far behind in development , for which he will soon be
punished . Better is 10 P-K3 , promoting development.
10 • • • B-Q2
A move which has various advantages: (a) it unpins the QP; (b) it
frees c8 for the Black QR ; (c) it prepares . . . B-R5 , which will
prevent White from being able to play Q-B2; and (d) it controls a4 so
that Black can in some variations bring his QN to that square without
fear of its being driven away .
11 P-K3
White must develop despite the unfavorable appearance of the
resultant Pe3-Pf3 pawn formation .
However, also to be considered is 1 1 PxP: 1 ) 1 1 . . . R-B 1 (gambit
style) 1 2 PxP NxP 1 3 Q-Q2 B-R5 is very promising for Black ; 2) 1 1
. . . N-R5 maintains the initiative with equal material .
11 • • • R-Bl
240 Game 17
Disagreeable for White in view of the limited number of replies at

his disposal .
12 P-QN3
This advance supports White' s QBP and prevents Black from

attacking by the very effective . . . N-R5 or . . B-R5 . Still, it does
.
not look very convincing , but what can White do?
1 ) 1 2 N-R3 loses a Pawn after 1 2 . . . N-R5 1 3 Q-N3 (or 1 3

Q-N4) 1 3 . . . PxP 1 4 BxP RxB 1 5 QxR NxP ;
2) 1 2 P-QN4 N-R5 1 3 Q-N3 PxP 14 BxP RxB 1 5 QxR N-N7 is
again very strong, for although White has equal material he is very
far behind in development.
12 • • • Q-N3
13 P-QN4
This is almost a " must" since White ' s QNP is en prise . The
alternative 1 3 R-N l B-R5 1 4 P-QN4 QN-Q2 results in pressure
against c4, and the position has the same unfavorable characteristics
for White as the text, namely lack of development and vulnerable
squares .
13 • • • N-RS
14 Q-B2
Now 1 4 . . . PxP would fail because of 1 5 RxB NxR 1 6 QxN,

winning two minor pieces for the Exchange . We now see why White
induced the Black Queen to go to b6 before he played P-QN4 . It is a
small measure of success for White to have been able to exclude the
possibility of 1 4 . . . PxP. Now Black must find some other way of
pressing his advantage .
14 • • • P-QR4
It is a general rule that when you are better developed, you should
open the position . Moreover, in almost all positions it is important to
try to break up an opponent's advanced pawn structure .
15 K-B2
This is a kind of development-and what else was there for White to

do?
1 ) 1 5 P-N5 BxP 1 6 R-N l Q-B4, etc . ;
2) 1 5 R-N l PxBP 1 6 BxP B-N4 , etc . ;
3 ) 1 5 PxRP QxRPch
3a) 1 6 Q-Q2 QxQch 1 7 RxQ PxP;
3b) 1 6 K-B2 PxP, and White loses his QBP (17 BxP?
P-QN4) ;
4) 1 5 P-B5 PxP
4a) 1 6 PxQ RxQ 1 7 PxP NxP, and Black has a plus Pawn as
well as a dominating position ;
4b) 16 QxN (the Queen is a desperado) 1 6 . . . BxQ
242 Game 17
1 7 PxQ BxR 18 KxB PxP, and the only way to stop Black' s
passed RP from queening is by 1 9 B-K5 , which i s refuted by
19 . . P-Q5 ! (and if 20 PxP N-Q4 or if 20 BxP KR-Q l ) .
.
15 . • • PxNP
16 R-Nl
The text regains the White Pawn but this takes time, and the White
King is far from safe .
16 • • • PxBP
Now that the White Rook no longer indirectly attacks the Black
Bishop, Black continues to open the game .
17 Rx:P Q-R2
18 Rx:BP N-Q4
Threatening to win the Bishop by 1 9 NxB .
19 Q-K4
The struggle is now in the open field . Because of his undeveloped

K-side pieces, White has to play with the equivalent of several pieces
down . After 19 P-N3 P-K4 20 B-N5 (20 BxP? QxPch followed by
2 1 . . QxB) 20
. P-R3 wins .
. . .
19 • • • N/S-B6
20 Q-Q4
So far White can still protect his vital points , but for how long?
20 • • • QxP
21 N-R3
At last a start toward development, but it is far too late .
21 • • • P-B3
Threatening to win a piece by 22 . . . P-K4 .

22 RxR RxR
23 B-B4
Since after 23 . . . P-K4 White's B/QB4 would be pinning the

Knight , it is temporarily inadvisable for Black to advance his KP at
this point .
23 . • . P-QN4
If now 24 BxN Q-N7ch and 1 ) 25 K-B l Q-K7ch 26 K-N l Q-K8

mate ; 2) 25 K-N3 N-K7ch , winning the Queen .
24 B-Q3 P-K4
25 BxKP PxB
If now 26 QxP Q-N7ch, then 27 K-N3 fails.because of 27 . . . N

K7ch , winning the Queen by using the Knight fork to realize Black' s
indirect attack on the White Queen .
26 Q-KR4 P-KS
To open more lines . If now 27 BxP Q-N7ch decides : 1 ) 28 K-N l

NxB followed by 29 . . . R-B8ch , etc . ; 2) 28 K-N3 N-K7ch 29 K-B2
N-B5 dis eh and mate follows (e . g . , 30 K-N3 QxP mate) . So White
continues
27 PxP R-Blch
28 Resigns
244 Game 17
For White is a piece down and has a bad King position . There might
follow :
1 ) 28 K-N3 Q-Q3ch 29 N-B4 NxN 30 PxN QxBch , etc . ;
2) 2 8 N-B4 NxPch ! 29 BxN QxPch , etc .
Black won because his pieces were active , whereas White ne
glected development completely . Black very cleverly opened the
maximum number of lines so that White had to struggle with a
concrete minority in the field .
Game 1 8
Ideas behind the 4 P-K3 line of the Nimzoindian Defense

The role of . • • P-QB4 and • • • P-Q4 in this line
The importance of Black's playing . • . P-Q4 in order to prevent White
from playing P-QS
The loose piece
Better development as compensation for a pawn sacrifice
The attack against the uncastled K-side denuded of pieces
The possibility of offering piece sacrifices in such an attack
Exchange of pieces in order to bring the exchanging player's remaining
pieces to better squares
Reducing to a won endgame position
The Sacrificial Attack with Pieces

The piece sacrifice discussed in Game 3 , the initiative described in
Game 1 1 , and the combination defined in Game 14 all come into play
at the same time when a player has better piece development than his
opponent and when the latter' s uncastled K-side is denuded of pieces .
Whether the defender ' s King has castled or not , the attacker by
seizing the initiative , by an effective use of threats , by keeping on the
outlook for possible combinations, and by properly manipulating his
pieces can frequently offer surprising sacrifices which the defender
cannot afford to accept because to do so would"lead to mate or to some
important advantage for the attacker .
These attacks and sacrifices are made possible because of the
weakness of the defender' s K-side , which is not caused by the adv
ance of his K-side Pawns but by the absence of the defender' s light
pieces on this front . In such positions the attacker can often afford to
offer the sacrifice of one piece after another .
Even in cases of such overwhelming attacks there may come a point
in the game when it is better for the attacker to settle for a winning
endgame position than to try to carry an attack through to mate . If
there really is a direct mate , the attacker should by all means discover
245
246 Game 18
and administer it. But if there is no direct mate , then he wisely wins by
the less brilliant but surer advantages offered by endgame position .
Nlmzolndian Defense 4 P-K3 P-84 Line

-
Olympiad - Skopje, Yugoslavia - 1 972
Lajos Portisch - Hungary Milko Bobotsov - Bulgaria
1 P-Q4 N-KB3
2 P-QB4 P-K3
3 N-QB3 B-NS
4 P-K3
This is the most important line of the Nimzoindian today . White

simply continues his development , preparing to bring his KB to d3 and
possibly his KN to e2 in order to avoid the doubling of his Pawns. He
leaves it to Black to decide whether to exchange his Bishop for the
White Knight . Masters do not usually make this exchange unless
White first loses a tempo by playing P-QR3 , for surrendering one of
the Two B ishops in order to play . . . BxN is probably not worth
while simply to give White a doubled Pawn .
The fact that in this line the White QB is hemmed in may be a
disadvantage , but there are many lines in the Indian defenses where
White ' s QB stands better on b2 or d2 than on f4 or g5 .
4 • • • P-B4
To attain equality in the center by exerting pressure on d4 . If, as

here , Black plays 4 . . . P-B4 without having first played . . . P-Q4 ,
there is the danger that by answering P-Q5 White could assure himself
of more freedom of movement and attacking chances . This will be
exemplified later in this game .
At this point , 5 P-Q5 is not dangerous for Black : 5 . . . N-K5 6
B-Q2 (6 Q-B2 Q-B 3 , and White cannot continue 7 B-Q2 because of
7 . . QxPch , and he cannot answer 7 QxN because of 7 . . . BxNch ,
.
after which he has to give up castling) 6 . . . BxN 7 BxB NxB 8 PxN ,

and Black stands well , for he has doubled White' s Pawns without
having left his opponent with the Bishop pair.
The alternative 4 . . . P-Q4 is just as good as 4 . . . P-B4 and often
leads to the same types of positions. Black could also castle and play
for equality in the center a bit later .
Nimzoindian Defense: 4 P-K3 P-84 Line 247
5 B-Q3
White plays his Bishop before his KN in order to reserve the choice
of where his KN should be developed . Especially in this position ,
N-K2 prevents Black from doubling White ' s BP' s . White could also
have played 5 P-QR3 , and after 5 . . . B xNch 6 PxB Black could
continue either with 6 . . P-QN3 or 6 . . P-Q4 , after which there
. .
arises a difficult situation in which both sides have chances .
5 . . . P-QN3
It would have perhaps been better to play 5 . . . P-Q4 to reach the

so-called ' ' normal ' ' variation of the Nimzoindian , which continues 6
N-B 3 0-0 7 0-0 N-B3 and which consists of a symmetrical center on
both sides except for the development of the KB ' s . This symmetry
refers only to the central pawn formation . The different positions of
the White and Black KB ' s can lead to different aims for each side .
White sometimes gets chances on the K-wing, Black on the Q-wing .
When a symmetrical position with the Pawns of each side on their
respective QB4- and Q4-squares occurs , it requires a very good sense
of position to be able to determine which Pawn or Pawns to exchange .
Symmetrical structures are still more difficult to handle in the
Queen ' s Gambit : 1 P-Q4 P-Q4 2 P-QB4 P-K3 3 N-QB3 P-QB4 4
P-K3 N-KB3 5 N-B3 N-B3 with complete symmetry . This is one of
the lines of the Tarrasch Variation of the Queen ' s Gambit Declined .
6 N-K2
Very good ! Now White can eventually play P-QR3 and force the
exchange of Bishop for Knight without the doubling of the Pawns .
248 Game 18
6 . . . B-N2
The presence of the Black QB on b7 prevents White from playing

P-Q5 .
7 0-0 PxP
It is understandable that Black would like to create a diagonal of

retreat for his KB in view of a possible P-QR3 . However , Black
should probably have accepted the necessity of exchanging his Bishop
for the White QN and played 7 . . . 0-0 or 7 . . . P-Q4 in order to
further his development.
8 PxP B-K2(?)
This move should certainly be condemned , for it is a clear loss of

tempo ! Correct is 8 . . BxN 9 NxB P-Q4 .
.
Black does not play 8 . .. . 0-0 because he fears 9 P-Q5 ! , which is

now good because of 9 . . . PxP 10 PxP NxP(?) 1 1 NxN BxN 1 2
BxPch KxB 1 3 QxB with advantage to White .
An immediate 8 . . P-Q4? loses a piece , because after 9 Q-R4ch
.
N-B3 1 0 PxP NxP 1 1 B-QN5 Black must give up a piece , for both his
QN and KB are threatened : 1 1 . . . R-QB l 1 2 NxN QxN 1 3 QxB .
9 P-QS!
This closes the diagonal for Black' s fianchettoed Bishop and

cramps the Black position . The fact that Black has more pieces
controlling d5 than White does not count at all .
Nimzoindian Defense: 4 P-K3 P-B4 Line 249
In positions in the Nimzoindian and Queen's Indian where the

Black QB is fianchettoed and Black has not yet played . . . P-Q4 ,
P-Q5 is always favorable for White ; but if it involves the sacrifice of a
Pawn , it must be determined whether the compensation along other
lines is worth that Pawn .
Here , in return for the sacrificed Pawn White has a lead in develop
ment and all his pieces are available for action , whereas after the
acceptance of the pawn sacrifice the B lack K-side is insufficiently
defended.
An experienced player can weigh these factors without calculating
possible variations . A less experienced player must either calculate or
take the risk , and if the outcome is negative, he has at least gained
experience .
9 • • • PxP
lO PxP NxP?
This leads to a complete catastrophe. Black could have played

I 0 . . . P-Q3 , after which with a majority in space White has an ideal
field for attack , which he may attain by bringing his light pieces a bit
nearer Black's K-side , such as , for instance , his Knight via g3 to f5 .
But Black has no weaknesses on the K-side and may be able to defend
himself .
Black could also have played 10 . . . 0-0 but probably feared 1 1
P-Q6 BxP 1 2 BxPch NxB 1 3 QxB , and White stands a bit better.
l l NxN BxN
The Black Bishop is now a loose piece which will be open to attack .
However, trying to regain the Pawn by 1 2 BxP is refuted by
12 . . . BxNP, a desperado combination : 13 KxB RxB , and the
Black position is certainly no worse .
12 N-B4
This gives White an important tempo to press his attack . The Knight
is now in a position to cooperate in an attack in various areas .
12 • • • B-N2
The alternative 12 . . . B-K3 is refuted by 1 3 NxB followed by

250 Game 18
either 13 . . . BPxN 14 Q-R5ch or by 13 . . . QPxN 14 B-K4, in

either case with a winning advantage for White .
13 R-Kl
As a compensation for his pawn sacrifice , all White ' s light pieces
are directed toward Black' s K-wing , and Black has no defense . The
power of White ' s position is illustrated most clearly by 1 3 . . 0-0,
.
which leads to a direct win for White : 1 4 Q-R5 P-N3 1 5 NxP BPxN 16
B xP PxB 17 QxPch K-R l 18 R-K5 wins .
13 • . • N-B3
Although this is a gesture on Black' s part to begin to develop his

pieces , 1 3 . . . K-B l would have been preferable . In that case , White
would not have had the fine and forcing sacrificial combination which
will occur in this game . After 1 3 . . . K-B I , White could play 1 4
N-R5 , for in general i t i s a part of the attacking strategy t o bring the
light pieces (especially the Knight) to the vicinity of the hostile King ,
particularly since in this case the Knight cannot be driven away
( 1 4 . . . P-N3? 1 5 B-R6ch) . The game might continue : 14 . . . B
KB 3 15 B -KB4 P-Q4 1 6 Q-Q2 . Certainly the White position is
superior then in spite of the fact that White is a Pawn down. B lack can
hardly breathe . The loss of castling makes his KR almost worthless .
Play might proceed : 1 6 . . . N-B3 1 7 QR-B l R-B l ( ?) 1 8 B-B5 R-R l
1 9 NxB QxN 20 QxP R-Q l 2 1 B-Q7 ! QxB 22 BxN ! and wins . The
Black Rook is attacked , and 22 . . . RxQ fails against 23 R-K8 mate ;
furthermore , 22 . . . R-B l is refuted by 23 Q-Q7 ; finally , 22 . . .
Q-B 3 23 QxRch QxQ 24 BxB followed by 25 R-B 8 . This is not only
Nimzoindian Defense: 4 P-K3 P-84 Line 251
an example to illustrate White 's superiority ; it also shows that it is not

easy to make use of the various advantages in the White position .
14 N-RS!
A very strong move . After 14 . . . P-N3 White mates in two : 1 5

N-B6ch K-B l 1 6 B-R6 mate . Nor is 1 4 . . . 0-0 good either, for 1 5
NxP KxN (what else?) 1 6 Q-N4ch K-R l 1 7 Q-B5 followed by mate .
14 • • • K-Bl
There is nothing else . But with White ' s active pieces and Black's
inactive ones , the position is such that White can now afford to
sacrifice in order to bring the Black King out into the open .
15 NxP
White had to carefully compare the results of making the sacrifice

with those of making a developing move such as 1 5 B-KB4 . If Black
answers 1 5 . . . KxN , then 1 6 Q-N4ch K-B-1 1 7 B-R6ch K-K l 1 8
Q-N7 and wins. If 1 5 . . . B-N4 (in order to prevent 1 6 B-R6) 1 6
R-K8ch wins Black' s Queen for a Rook and a Knight .
15 • • • P-KR3
This move also prevents 1 6 B-R6 .
16 N-B5
252 Game 18
Doubly attacking Black' s KRP with the intention of playing the

threatening 1 7 N-Q6 if Black answers 1 6 . . . B-N4 to defend it .
16 • • • B-N4
To defend the KRP.
17 N-Q6
Threatening both 1 7 NxB and 1 7 R-K8ch .
17 • • • Q-B2
18 B-N6!
Offering the sacrifice of a piece . Black cannot afford to accept the

sacrifice because of 1 8 . . PxB 1 9 Q-B3ch followed by mate . The
.
text also protects White' s Knight by removing the intervening Bishop .
18 • • • N-K2
At last Black has managed to mobilize some defending pieces

around his King , but it is far too late . After White 's next move Black' s
King will have lost all pawn protection .
19 BxP R-R2
Attacking White 's KB and forcing it to withdraw .
20 B-N3 Q-B3
At last Black has the dubious satisfaction of threatening mate once

in the course of the game . But since his position is completely
cramped , he has nothing better , so he is glad that his mating threat
enables him to force White to exchange his active Knight for the Black
QB .
21 NxB
It is now time for White to liquidate in order to reach a completely

won endgame position .
Nimzoindian Defense: 4 P-K3 P-B4 Line 253
21 • • • QxN
22 BxB PxB
23 Q-Q3
Putting his Queen into a more active position and giving full
freedom of movement to his Rooks as well as attacking the Black KR .
White could have played 23 RxN followed by 24 B-Q5 at once , but
then he would not have had the possibility which exists in the main
variation of 26 Q-K4ch (see the analysis following 25 . . . Resigns) ,
which wins a full Rook , or of 26 Q-B 3ch given in the variation under
Black' s 24th move .
23 • • • R-N2
24 RxN
With the elimination of the Black Knight White gets control of the
d5 and f5 squares , the most important on the board .
24 • • • KxR
Leading to the same type of play is 24 . . . RxR 25 B-Q5 Q-B 1 26
Q-B3ch , winning a full piece .
25 B-QS Resigns
For if 25 . . . Q-B l 26 Q-K4ch followed by 27 BxR, and Black is a

piece down .
254 Garne ts
White won because (a) Black lost time by withdrawing his KB from
b4 to e7 and then accepted White's pawn sacrifice ; (b) White's pieces
were actively developed , whereas Black had no development at all ;
(c) on account of the activity of White' s pieces Black' s King was
never able to castle to safety ; and (d) White eventually succeeded in
denuding Black' s K-side of pawn protection .
Game 19
Ideas behind the Siimisch Variation of the King's Indian Defense

• • • N-QB3 vs • • • • QN-Q2 in the King's Indian
A K-side attack by White vs. a Q-side attack by Black
The power of a threat of double check
Improving one's position through consolidation of forces
Keeping the position closed to prevent a counterattack via open lines
The final pawn push in the last phase of the game
Waves of Attack
The opponent is sometimes , but not always, overwhelmed by a
simple , straightforward operation consisting of a sequence of moves
which leads to mate or to some important material advantages .
There are cases in which an attack advances to a certain point , then
is stopped short , either by the player' s own volition or by the oppo
nent' s effective defense . However , this phase of the attack was not in
vain if it has resulted in some weakness in the opponent' s position .
Once the first wave of attack is over , the attacker examines the
weaknesses in his opponent ' s position and then proceeds to carry out a
new but different type of attack based on those weaknesses . This
attack may also be stopped , but still other weaknesses may have been
created in the opponent ' s position .
There may be several waves of attack in a game . The concept of
successive waves is important to an underst anding that some games
are won not by a single attack but by a series of different types of
attacks, each one taking as its basis the weaknesses created by the
preceding attack .
King's Indian Defense - Slmisch Variation

International Tournament - Torremolinos, Spain - 1 974
Florin Gheorghiu - Heikki Westerinen -

Ru mania Finland
255
256 Game 19
1 P-Q4 N-KB3
2 P-QB4 P-Q3
3 N-QB3 P-KN3
4 P-K4 B-N2
The basic formation of the King ' s Indian , where White has suc
ceeded in building up a broad pawn center (Pc4-Pd4-Pe4) , while
Black has fianchettoed his KB and played . . . P-Q3 to prevent White
from becoming too aggressive with his center Pawns . The Black
strategy in the King's Indian is to undermine the White pawn center.
But White ' s next move initiates a very special strategy .
5 P-B3
The Samisch Variation , one of the strongest lines , preferred by
many grandmasters . This move strengthens White' s KP and prepares a
concentration of forces by B-K3 , Q-Q2 , and 0-0-0 in order to launch
an attack on the K-side by advancing the Pawns on that wing . This
means that Black's counterchances , usually based on the push . . .
P-KB4 , are limited .
s . . . 0-0
6 B-K3
The QB now gives added protection to White' s center and after
White has played Q-Q2 can threaten to go to h6 to exchange itself for
Black' s powerful fianchettoed KB . Sometimes this Bishop goes in
stead to g5 to provoke . . . P-KR3 , a weakening which may be
exploited later in the attack against Black ' s K-side . In that case , the
Bishop withdraws to h4 .
6 • • . N-B3
King's Indian Defense: Simisch Variation 257
In many variations of this defense the Black QN stands better here

than on d7 where it hampers the movement of the other Black pieces .
Moreover, as soon as Black has played . . . P-K4, the Black QN at c6
aids in pressing against White's center QP ; thus , White will generally
find it necessary to advance that QP in order to avoid losing a Pawn ,
after which Black ' s QN finds a suitable place on e7 . For instance , if 7
Q-Q2 , then 7 . . . P-K4 threatens 8 . . . PxP 9 BxP NxB 1 0 QxN
NxP ! , winning a Pawn for Black, since if 1 1 QxN? R-K l .
The alternative to 6 . . . N-B3 is 6 . . . QN-Q2 followed by
7 . . . P-K4 or 7 . . . P-B4 . Either of these Black moves aims to
open the Black a l/h8 diagonal and to increase the activity of the Black
Bishop at g7 , which may be all the more important since White intends
to castle Q-side .
7 KN-K2
The KN is developed toward the center , where it strengthens d4 and

supports the QN which is often attacked by Black' s fianchettoed KB
as soon as White has played P-Q5 . From e2 it can also later participate
in the attack against Black ' s K-side , as it does in this game .
7 • • • R-Nl
By . . . P-QR3 and . . . P-QN4 Black prepares both to undermine

White' s QBP and to open the QN-file for himself . This is part of
Black ' s general strategy in the Samisch Variation of the King 's Indian
and is directed against White' s Q-side castling .
8 Q-Q2 R-Kl(?)
This move has no particular purpose . In some variations, after

simplification the Black Rook stands better on e8 than on f8 , but the
opposite may also be true . However, in cases where White plays
B-R6 , with his Rook on e8 Black can answer . . . B-R l , although
this is not the case in this game .
More consistent would have been 8 . . . P-QR3 followed by
9 . . P-QN4 , carrying out the Q-side strategy described under
.
7 . . . R-N l .
9 P-KR4
258 Game 19
The standard way of beginning an attack on Black 's castled King .

White threatens to open the KR-file eventually by P-KR5 after ade
quate preparation .
9 . . . P-KR4
To prevent White ' s advance . By so doing Black weakens his own

K-side, but it is difficult to decide what the best way of stemming the
White pawn storm is . In the Karpov-Korchnoi Sicilian Dragon De
fense (Game 8) , Black did not play . . . P-KR4 in a similar position
and had to put up with a heavy attack characterized by 1 4 P-R5 ! NxRP
1 5 P-KN4 N-B3 followed shortly by 1 7 B-R6 BxB 1 8 QxB , etc .
10 0-0- 0 P-R3
Since White has now castled Q-side , there is still more reason to
carry out the advance to b5 in order to open attacking files against
White ' s castled position .
1 1 B-R6
The customary way of eliminating the Black fianchettoed Bishop so

that it cannot aid in the defense of Black' s K-side or-as is sometimes
the case-in the attack on White' s Q-side . True , White also ex
changes his QB in this maneuver , but Black will eventually have to
defend the hole at h6, and his KB is more important for the defense
than is White ' s QB for the attack .
Also, in general , when the player with the greater number of
attacking pieces exchanges , his superiority increases . For instance, if
White has four attacking pieces and Black two defending pieces the
ratio is 2: 1 , but after the exchange White will have three attacking and
Black orily one defending piece , that is, a ratio of 3 : 1 . Therefore ,
White has increased his superiority proportionally .
11 • • • P-QN4
Black advances his own attack, since he does not want to lose a
tempo by playing 1 1 . . . B-R l , but if he had done that , White would
have continued his attack just as he does in the game .
12 P-KN4
Both sides hurry to launch their attack.
12 • • • PxBP
After 1 2 . . . PxNP White would have continued 1 3 P-R5 ! , and

then 1 3 . . . NxRP would have failed because of 14 RxN ! PxR 1 5
Q-N5 .
Another variation of this line is 1 2 . . . PxNP 1 3 P-R5 PxKBP 14
PxKNP PxN 1 5 BxB PxR= Qch 1 6 NxQ N-KN5 (White threatened 1 7
R-R8ch KxB 1 8 Q-R6 mate, and 1 6 . . . PxNP does not help because
of 1 7 B xN PxB 1 8 Q-R6) 17 PxPch KxP 1 8 Q-B4ch and wins :
1 8 . . . KxB 1 9 Q-N5ch K-B2 20 R-R7ch K-K3 2 1 Q-B5 mate or
1 8 . . . N-B 3 1 9 BxN PxB 20 R-R7ch K-N l 2 1 Q-R6 and wins . The
whole line shows how important a tempo in the attack can be. White
sacrifices a "diagonal of pieces" (those on g4-f3-e2-d l ) just to
forward the attack. ,,
It appears that Black was right in not getting into these complica
tions but rather in continuing along his own line , hoping to get an
attack along the QN-file .
13 N-N3
Pressing against Black ' s KRP , for 1 3 PxP NxP would lead to
nothing .
260 Game 19
ll . . . P-K4
Threatening to take White ' s QP with new threats which prevent

White' s attack from proceeding so quickly . Now White must look for
new possibilities. To that end he must first exchange Bishops .
14 BxB Kx:B
Now the situation has changed. Black has holes at f6 and h6 , and the
continuation of the game will show how new avenues of attack will
open up for White . But the original attack (PxRP) is stopped .
15 PxKP
The advance 1 5 P-Q5 is answered by 1 5 . . . N-Q5 1 6 PxP NxBP

followed by 17 . . . B-N5 , and it seems that Black can defend him
self; e . g . , 1 7 Q-K3 B-N5 1 8 PxP PxP 1 9 B -K2 N-Q5 21 Q-N5 BxB 2 1
QNxB NxNch 2 2 NxN N-R4 , and White has no suitable continuation
to the attack.
It is curious to note how in one case (the line following
1 2 . . . PxNP, after which White sacrifices "a diagonal of pieces " ) ,
the attack i s successful , and i n another (the one described directly
above after 1 5 P-Q5) , the attack is not successful . While the positions
do not differ very much , this is one proof that in complicated positions
one cannot rely exclusively on intuition .
15 • • • RxP
Let us examine the other choices , which are all favorable for White .
1 ) 1 5 . . . PxP 1 6 Q-N5 N-Q5 1 7 PxP, and White 's original

attack would revive in an overwhelming manner ; e . g . ,
1 7 . . . NxBP loses a piece : 1 8 RxQ NxQ 19 RxR NxR 20 PxN .
2) 1 5 . . . PxP 1 6 QxQ RxQ 1 7 RxR NxR 1 8 PxP PxP 1 9 BxP,
and White has the better endgame, for (a) Black's QRP and QBP
are isolated ; (b) White has better development ; and (c) Black' s
King i s unsafe and can be attacked b y R-N l . However, the
alternative 1 6 Q-N5 under 1 ) is much more convincing .
3) 1 5 . . . QNxP, and White continues his attack by 1 6 P-N5
KN-Q2 17 P-B4 N-N5 1 8 BxP or 1 8 Q-Q4ch with excellent
prospects , for he has (a) a better position for attacking pieces ; (b)
more space and more possibilities ; (c) more mobility ; and (d) his
Queen is in an attacking position .
After the text , White presses his attack , which is facilitated by the
fact that White can open the d4/g7 diagonal for attack.
16 P-NS
White carries out his plan to open a diagonal of attack for himself .
In this position , 1 6 PxP leads to nothing , for after 1 6 . . . NxRP 1 7
NxNch RxN the Rook can maintain itself o n its 4th rank .
16 • • • N-Ql
17 P-B4 R-R4
More solid is 17 . . . R-K l , after which White also has the attack .
But with the text Black was hoping to get some sort of counterattack
with moves such as 18 . . . N-B4 which threatens 19 . . . RxRP 20
NxR N-N6ch , forking the King and the Queen . Of course, this is only
a strategic schema, and White renders it impossible at once by
18 BxP
White now has a marvelous attacking position without having

sacrificed any material for it .
262 Game 19
18 • • • R-NS
Black makes all kinds of efforts to get some sort of attack against the
White King . But the text only furthers White's plans.
19 B-QS
If Black should try to protect his threatened Knight with

1 9 . . . N/2-N l , the game could continue 20 BxN NxB 2 1 N-QS !
R-B4ch 22 K-N l , and White threatens to gain control of the a l /h8
diagonal by 23 P-N3 followed by 24 Q-N2ch with dire consequences
for B lack .
19 • • • N-QS
In order to answer 20 P-R3 ? by 20 . . . RxB , threatening

2 1 . . . N-N6ch .
20 KN-K2 NxNch
After 20 . . . P-QB4 2 1 P-R3 N-N6ch 22 BxN RxB 23 QxP, Black

has lost a Pawn and his disadvantage is even greater .
21 NxN! R/4-N4
Just as bad is 2 1 . . . R/5-N4 because of 22 N-Q4 . However , the

main variation is 2 1 . . . R-B4ch 22 K-N l R-N l , which reveals the
goal of White ' s combination . Black has avoided the loss of the
Exchange , but White continues the attack successfully with 23 Q-
Q4ch K-N l 24 P-B5, and after 24 . . . N-K4 (probably the best)

White wins the Exchange with 25 QxR ! PxQ 26 BxPch KxB 27 RxQ .
22 N-Q4
Now 22 . . . R-N3 is refuted by 23 Q-B 3 , threatening 24 N-K6 db

eh followed by mate , so that the Black King has to move and White
wins the Exchange with 24 N-B6.
22 • . • RxP(?)
A little better may be 22 . . . R-B4ch, although then 23 K-N l

R-N3 (to prevent N-B6) 24 R-QB 1 , afteq vhich Black ' s counterattack
is refuted and White can resume his K-side attack.
23 Q-B3!
Threatening 24 N-B5 db eh or 24 N-K6 db eh and mate on the next

move .
23 • • • K-Nl
In order to get the King out of the line of the double check . Black
has nothing better . After 23 . . . R-N8ch 24 K-B2 R/4-N7ch 25
K-Q3 RxRch 26 RxR, and Black loses a whole Rook , for he must
prevent 27 N-K6 db eh and 27 N-B5 db eh followed by mate .
24 NxR RxN
25 R-Q4
To activate the Rook, which can now go to b4 or c4 , and to give

additional protection to the White KP.
The rest is relatively simple . Black does not have a shadow of
compensation for having given up the Exchange for a Pawn .
25 • • • Q-K2
White has carried his attack as far as he safely can , and he must now
consolidate his position . If he should try to continue the attack by 26
P-B5, for instance, after 26 . . . PxP 27 PxP White might open a file
264 Game 19
for Black' s Queen to counterattack . Moreover, 26 P-B5 would free e5

for the Black Knight and Queen . Tactically , if 26 QxP? R-B4ch . So
26 P-R4
To drive away Black 's Rook so as to be able to capture Black' s QBP

after 26 . . . R-N I or to force an advantageous simplification after
26 . . . R-B4.
26 • • • R-B4
The only way to hold his QBP.
27 R-B4 RxR
28 QxR
The exchange of Rooks is always good when one is the Exchange

up .
28 • • • N-N3
29 Q-N3 P-R4
The penetration into the 8th rank may be important for White . The
text prevents White from working toward that end by driving the
Black Knight from b6 by P-R5 . It also fixes White' s QRP so that
perhaps later Black can play . . . B-Q2 followed by the capture of
White ' s QRP.
30 R-Kl
In order to be able to advance his K-side Pawns for a decisive attack

at the right time, that is, at a time when Black cannot answer a future
P-B5 with . . . Q-K4, which might allow the Black Queen to pene
trate into the White position with a counterattack .
30 • • • B-Q2
31 Q-B3
The text accomplishes several things : (a) it attacks Black' s QRP

and QBP simultaneously so that White will get at least one Pawn in
exchange for his own threatened QRP; (b) it protects White's Rook so
that a possible 3 1 . . . NxB could be answered by 32 PxN ; and (c) it
covers e5 so that White can eventually play P-B5 without the danger of
Black' s getting a counterattack by . . . Q-K4 .
31 • • • Q-Ql
Black protects_ his QBP. But with 3 1 . . . BxP he would have

attained the same end without the loss of a tempo for his Queen .
32 QxRP BxP
33 P-BS!
At the right time ! The Black Queen can no longer go to e5 . Now 33

P-B5 is an effective attacking move .
33 • • • PxP
White would have answered 33 . . . Q-K2 by 34 Q-B 3 , preventing

34 . . . Q-K4 . �
34 PxP
With the K-file completely open White' s Rook can participate as an

active piece , and Black is still worse off .
34 • • • Q-Q2
White would answer 34 . . . K-N2 by 35 R-K7 ! QxR 36 P-B6ch,

etc . , and 34 . . . K-B l doesn' t offer any better prospects . After 35
266 Game 19
Q-B3 K-N l 36 BxPch ! (36 P-N6 NxB) 36 . . . KxB 37 P-N6ch K-N l

3 8 P-B6 , etc . , and if 38 . . . B-K l 39 RxBch wins .
35 P-N6
Now all the White pieces come into the attack, and the advanced
White NP eliminates the only remaining Black protecting Pawn , his
KBP .
35 • • • K-N2
If 35 . . . QxP? 36 BxPch followed by 37 QxQ .
36 P-B6ch
If now
1 ) 36 . . . KxNP 37 B-K4ch KxP 38 Q-N5ch and an early mate ;

2) 36 . . . KxBP 37 R-B l ch is decisive : 37 . . . KxP 3 8 B xPch
QxB 39 Q-NSch, etc . Also decisive after 36 . . . KxBP is 37 PxP,
threatening 38 P-B 8 = Q .
36 • . . K-Rl
37 Q-Q2 Resigns
Black has no satisfactory defense against 38 Q-R6ch, etc .
Black lost the game strategically because White' s K-side attack was
stronger than Black ' s Q-side attack and tactically because White
could combine the defense of his King' s position with attacks against
the hostile King . After White got the Exchange for a Pawn , he cleverly
kept the position closed until the opponent's pieces were in such a
position that White could without risk open new attacking lines which
could be used only by his own pieces .
Game 20
Ideas behind the Queen's Indian Defense

The struggle for control of the key square e4
The development of White's KB to d3 compared with its development to e2
Closing both sides of an attacking diagonal by P-KB4 with its resultant
exclusion of a K-side attack
The struggle for control of the open QR-file
The treacherous pin which costs a piece
The impotence of two Rooks against a Queen and Bishop
The Pin
A pin exists when a piece cannot move because this would expose
its King to check or a more valuable piece of the same color to capture .
The pin is always a potent weapon , for it prevents the pinned piece
from participating freely in the play . In cases where a Bishop pins a
Knight , for instance , it nullifies the pressure which the Knight normal
ly exerts on all squares to which it could move .
In addition to the ordinary pin there is a special type of pin in which
a player deliberately sacrifices something-often the Exchange-in
order to bring about the pin . In that case , the player making the pin
plans to exploit it in such a way that he will emerge from the operation
with some material advantage . Once such a pin exists, the pinning
player will bring as many of his own pieces as possible to bear on the
pinned piece , and his opponent will in tum defend the pinned piece
with all the pieces at his disposal .
If the player who has sacrificed something in order to produce the
pin can attack the pinned piece with one more piece than his opponent,
he will usually gain a material advantage . Otherwise, in the most
favorable case he will regain only the sacrificed material .
The side making the pin must take into consideration that his
opponent may sometimes be able to move the pinned piece (provided
that it is not protecting the King) and deliberately sacrifice the more
268
Queen's Indian Defense 269
valuable piece behind the pinned piece for still greater gain . This was
the case in Black' s 1 3th move of Game 1 4 .
Queen's Indian Defense

Club Match - Moscow, 1 971
Alexander Kotov - USSR Ratmir Kholmov - USSR

1 P-Q4 N-KB3
2 P-QB4 P-K3
White usually replies 3 N-QB3 and Black answers 3 . . . B-N5 ,

leading to the Nimzoindian Defense , which has been analyzed very
frequently and thoroughly . The fear of getting into a prepared varia
tion sometimes keeps players from following a well-known sequence .
In this game White replies
3 N-KB3
The text leads to positions which are characterized mainly by a

struggle for the center and for e4. Black could answer 3 . . . P-Q4
and continue with the Classical Variation of the Queen' s Gambit
Declined . Or he could play 3 . . . B-N5ch , and after 4 B-Q2 BxBch 5
QNxB White would have won a tempo , which would, however, be of
little importance . After 5 . . . P-Q4 6 P-K3 0-0 the position is even .
Black chooses the most consistent way of continuing the struggle
for e4 by playing
3 . . . P-QN3
Why does Black fianchetto on the Q-side after an early White

N-KB3 but not after an early White N-QB3 ? Because the purpose of
Black's Q-side fianchetto is to control e4 by both his QB and his KN.
As long as White has not yet developed his KN to f3 , he has the
possibility of meeting Black's Q-side fianchetto by P-KB3 followed
by P-K4 , after which White keeps control of e4 , and Black ' s Q-side
fianchetto is pointless . _
White could now play 4 B-N5 , which is not particularly valuable

but is effective to the extent that it opens the possibility of exchanging
Black ' s KN , thus relieving pressure on e4. However , this would leave
270 Game 20
Black with the Two Bishops , which might be significant. It can be

stated that 4 B-N5 is no better or worse than any other continuation of
the development.
4 P-K3
To enable White to play B-Q3 as soon as possible so as to contest

the Black control of e4 , which , as has already been stated , is the key to
this variation . Also , White is not sure whether he prefers his QN at c3
or d2, so he postpones moving the Knight .
White could also have continued by 4 P-KN3 , neutralizing the
activity of Black' s QB on b7 by B-KN2. In fact , after 4 P-KN3 Black
sometimes replies 4 . . . B-R3 followed by . . . P-B3 and . . . P
Q4 , exerting pressure along a diagonal which White' s KB is about to
leave , for after 4 P-KN3 , White ' s KB is more or less committed to a
fianchetto .
4 • • • B-N2
Further pressure on e4. Black now controls it with his Bishop and
Knight ; White does not control it at all .
5 B-Q3
As stated above, White knows that he wants his Bishop on d3 . He

does not yet know whether he wants his QN on c3 or d2 . Moreover , he
does not want to give Black the opportunity to pin his QN by . . . B
N5 after he has played N-B 3 .
If now 5 . . . B-N5ch, White answers 6 B-Q2 and Black has

accomplished nothing toward increasing his influence over e4 .
5 . . . B-K2
6 0-0 0-0
7 P-QN3
To make room for his QB on b2 . For the time being White turns his
attention from trying to control e4 to completing the development of
his pieces .
7 . . . P-Q4
Black brings a third piece to bear on e4 in order to prevent White

from playing P-K4 after the way has been prepared by N-QB3 or
QN-Q2 .
8 B-N2
This is the only good square to which to develop White's QB .

Although its free play is hampered by the White QP, this QB still
exerts some indirect pressure on e5 .
8 • . • QN-Q2
At d7 the Black QN exercises some control over e5 without cutting

the line of communication of his QB . It could also support a
later . . . P-B4 .
9 N-B3
If Black now plays 9 . . P-B4 , the position is almost symmetrical ,

.
for White' s KB is on d3 , Black' s KB is on e7 ; and White' s QN is on

c 3 , Black' s QN is on d7 . Each of these formations has its slight
advantages and disadvantages . White' s advantage lies in the fact that
his QN exerts pressure on d5 ; Black' s in the fact that his a8/h l
diagonal has not been closed by his QN .
9 • • . N-KS
272 Game 20
Black now takes advantage of his control of the long dia.gonal to

occupy e4 . His QN now has a new mission-it will go to f6 to support
the KN .
The text is strong , for it exerts pressure on the White position and an
exchange would not be advantageous for White-on the contrary , it
would entail some dangers ; e . g . , 1 0 BxN PxB 1 1 N-Q2 P-KB4, and
White ' s K-wing is deprived of defenders and may eventually be
attacked by Black' s Queen , KB , and KR . ·The game could continue 1 2
P-B3 PxP (not 1 2 . . . N-B3 1 3 PxP NxP 14 N/2xN BxN 1 5 NxB
PxN and Black' s KP' s are weak) 1 3 NxP N-B3 1 4 N-K5(?) B-Q3 , and
White has nothing but bad alternatives : 1) 15 N-Q3 ? BxPch with a
winning attack ; 2) 1 5 N-B3 loses a tempo ; 3) 1 5 N-N5 BxN 1 6 PxB
leaves White' s KP' s very weak . Black, on the other hand, has attack
ing chances .
If the White KB were on e2 instead of d3 , White could probably
exchange advantageously : 1 0 NxN PxN 1 1 N-Q2 P-KB4 1 2 P-B3 ,
thus reducing Black' s attacking possibilities .
It is a general rule that in such positions the White Bishop on d3 is
well placed to prevent the occupation of e4, which he could not
prevent in this case . But the Bishop is better placed on e2 when White
wishes to stop an eventual Black attack by exchanging on e4 . The
point is that if the Bishop is on d3 , NxN will cost a piece . True, in that
position BxN does not cost a piece , but if the Bishop is on e2 instead , a
good strategy is often NxN PxN ; N-Q2 followed by P-B 3 .
1 0 Q-K2
A standard maneuver by which White aims to exchange Black' s

fianchettoed Bishop by 1 1 PxP followed by 1 2 B-R6 . The purpose of

this exchange is to eliminate the force of the Black QB and then
perhaps to develop an attack against the weakened Q-side Pawns .
Also possible is 10 Q-B2, by which White threatens to win a Pawn
and also prepares for N-QN5 if Black' s Bishop should go to d6. But in
that case , after 1 0 . . . P-KB4 Black could start thinking of a K-side
attack.
10 • • • P-QR3
This prevents White 's above-mentioned simplifying maneuver and

also his N-QN5 if Black should want to play his Bishop to d3 .
11 QR-BI
This move has several advantages . The QB-file may become im
portant after PxP or after . . . P-QB4 . It may become advantageous
to move White' s KB to bl in order to play Q-B2. Also , White can then
play NxN without the danger of losing a piece if his KB is no longer on
d3 .
11 • • • B-Q3
This makes the exchange on e4 still less attractive for White , since
after 1 2 BxN PxN 1 3 N-Q2 P-B4 Black' s attack is already in progress .
1 2 N-Q2
White attacks Black's outpost on e4 , thus taking the first measure

against Black' s attack .
12 • • • P-KB4
This protects Black's KN a second time , for White threatened to

win a Pawn . Moreover, it enables Black ' s KR to join the attacking
forces by . . . R-B3-R3 .
If White should now play 1 3 P-B3 , both 1 ) 1 3 . . . Q-R5 14 P-N3
NxP 1 5 PxN BxP followed by 1 6 . . . R-B3 and 2) 13 . . . BxPch 1 4
KxB Q-R5ch 1 5 K-N l N-N6 could become dangerous for White .
274 Game 20
13 P-B4
To avoid all difficulties White closes the attacking diagonal of

Black' s KB and at the same time prepares to bring his own KN to e5
via f3 .
13 • • • NxKN
Black is right in exchanging this Knight , for if White should

succeed in playing his Knight to e5 after opening lines by PxP , his
position would be superior ; e . g . , 13 . . . Q-B3 14 N-B3 QR-K l 1 5
PxP PxP 1 6 N-K5 . If we compare the situation of each Knight on its
KS-square , we see that White' s Knight is much better situated because
if B lack had to exchange the White Knight , White would get a
protected passed Pawn , whereas the exchange of the Black Knight
would not produce such a passed Pawn .
14 QxN Q-K2
Black now plans to play for positional values : . . . B-R6 (to ex
change Bishops) and/or . . . P-B4. In any case , after an eventual
exchange on d5 (PxP PxP) , the Black Queen attacks the weak White
KP . Also , by 1 4 . . . Q-K2 the two Black Rooks are connected . If
Black wanted to play for attack , he could play . . . R-B3 , . . . R-R3 ,
. . . Q-R5 , and eventually . . . P-KN4 . However this line is very
doubtful-it takes too much time .
If instead of the text 1 4 . . . N-B3 1 5 PxP, which Black cannot
meet by 1 5 . . . PxP because of 1 6 BxBP.
15 N-R4
A very good move , for it develops White 's initiative on the Q-wing.
Now 1 5 . . . B-R6 is no longer advisable because of 1 6 BxB QxB 1 7
P-B5, cutting off the Black Queen ; moreover, 1 7 . . . PxP 1 8 NxP
NxN 19 RxN is not at all advantageous for Black , who has a weak and
backward QBP, an inactive QB , and a Queen which is out of play .
Note that except under special circumstances White would never
play PxP at any time, for after . . . PxP he would have a weak Pawn
on his K-file without any compensation .
15 • • • P-B3(?)
Probably Black hopes that White will fall into the trap 16 NxP
B-N5 ! (not 1� . . . NxN 17 P-B5) , and Black will win a piece
because White will have to do something about the attack on his
Queen , after which Black plays 17 . . . NxN .
Better would have been 1 5 . . . P-B4 with equal chances . It would
have given a symmetrical center . White could play for hanging Pawns
by 16 PxQP KPxP 17 PxP PxP, which would not be very good for him
since his KP is weak . The same goes for Black . So it seems that
neither side can do anything except move around and wait for a
favorable opportunity . Therefore chances are even . After the text
White has some possibilities , as shown by the continuation .
16 Q-QB2
Now White is threatening the sham sacrifice beginning 17 NxP .

276 Game 20
16• • • P-QN4
17 PxNP RPxP
Better than 17 . . . BPxP, after which 1 8 N-B5 would have been

favorable for White , since the Knight would be in an outpost position ,
and if Black exchanged, it would lead to a passed Pawn for White ,
whereas with the text it would not .
Now 1 8 N-B5 would not mean much , since , as was pointed out
above , the exchange of Knights would not give White a passed Pawn .
Moreover, 1 8 N-B5 BxN 1 9 PxB would cost a Pawn after
1 9 . . . RxP.
18 N-B3 P-NS
In order to be able to bring Black' s QB into the game via a6 and to

make White's QRP backward in the sense that it cannot be advanced .
19 N-R4 B-R3
Ideally , Black would like to play 20 . . . B-N4 followed by

2 1 . . . BxN 22 PxB P-B4 with an overwhelming position . But once
he plays 20 . . . B-N4 2 1 BxB PxB 22 N-B5 , White's QRP is lost . So
White must prevent . . . B-N4 .
20 Q-K2
This prevents Black from playing the above-mentioned sequence .

It forces the exchange of Bishops without giving Black the opportu
nity for . . . B-N4. If White had played, for instance, 20 R-B2 , Black
could have played 20 . . . B-N4 with the threats described above .
Leading to about the same situation is 20 BxB RxB , except that
Black may gain some advantage in being able to double his Rooks on
the QR-file .
20 • • • BxB
21 QxB P-B4
Black must eliminate his backward QBP as soon as possible .
22 PxP NxP
23 NxN BxN
24 R-KB2
A very fine move which prepares to double the Rooks and at the
same time indirectly protects the White QRP .
If now 24 . . . RxP 25 BxP ! RxR 26 BxR RxPch 27 KxR KxB ,
White has won the Exchange for a Pawn .
24 . • • R-R4
To help guard the Bishop against the White Rooks and to make it
possible for Black to double his Rooks .
25 B-Q4!
By exchanging Bishops White will now open the QB-file, which is

a considerable advantage . White could not have attained this open file
more directly by playing 25 KR-B2, for then 25 . . . RxP would have
been possible , as appears from
1 ) 26 RxB RxB ;
2) 26 BxP RxR
2a) 27 QxR BxPch ;
2b) 27 RxR KxB .
In all variations White loses material .
25 • . . Q-R2?
K
278 Game 20
Black tries to hold the QR-file , but this entails a direct catastrophe
for him . He should have played 25 . . . BxB , and then the game
could have continued 26 QxB KR-R l 27 R/ l -B2 (so as not to hide his
Rook behind his QRP) , and White has the QB-file and can hope for
some initiative . However , White need not make defensive moves .
Equally good at this point is 27 Q-KS , which indirectly protects the
QRP :
I ) 27 . . . RxP loses the Queen : 28 RxR RxR 29 R-B8ch K-B2

30 R-B7 , etc . ;
2) 27 . . . P-R3 is troublesome: 28 P-KR3 , and the point is that
Black still cannot play 28 . . . RxP because of 29 RxR RxR 30
R-B8ch K-R2 3 1 R-B7 Q-B l (forced) 32 QxKP .
If Black does not play for attack on a2 and instead follows a

defensive strategy , the result may remain uncertain .
26 RxB!
A standard maneuver in order to bring the opponent into a pin so as

to take advantage of it .
26 • . • RxR
27 R-B2 KR-Bl
Seemingly adequate . How can White now get more than the recap
ture of the sacrificed Exchange?
28 Q-NS!
This is the solution . Black must lose a piece !
28 • • . RxR
Nor is 28 . . . RxQ 29 RxRch K-B2 30 BxQ any better for Black .
29 BxQ RxP
Not only attacking the White Bishop but also threatening

30 . . . R-B8ch , etc .
30 B-85
Parrying both threats .
30 • • • P-R3
If 30 . . . R-QB7 3 1 B-Q4 , and White has nothing to fear either.
31 P-R4
Both to prevent a possible mate by Black on his 8th rank and to

support an attack against the Black King .
31 . • • K-R2
32 P-RS Resigns
Black has two Rooks for White' s Queen and B ishop and is therefore
at a material disadvantage . Nor can he get a counterattack with his two
Rooks, for White ' s Queen and Bishop could easily get Black' s King
into a mating net .
White cannot play for direct mate if Black restricts himself to
defense . But in that case , White captures Black' s QNP and advances
his own QNP. For instance : 32 . . . R-QB7 (hoping to double at
some time-it does not matter which move Black plays , White always
captures the Black QNP) 33 B-Q4 R/ 1 -B2 34 QxNP R-R7 35 Q-B8
(White must never allow the doubling of the Black Rooks on his 2d
rank) 35 . . . R-N2 36 P-QN4 R-R3 37 Q-K8 , and Black' s Rook must
remain on its 2d rank , for if 37 . . . RxP? 38 Q-N6ch followed by mate .
This illustrates the importance of the advanced position of White ' s
KRP .
280 Game 20
Black lost because he made one serious error of judgment, which

allowed White to get control of a greater number of squares and files ,
and he overlooked a pretty combination available to his opponent.
In the endgame White cleverly managed to keep Black ' s Rooks
under control by preventing him from doubling them along the Black
7th rank , which is very dangerous for the opponent and in most cases
good for at least a draw by perpetual check.
Game 21
Ideas behind the Griinfeld Defense

The 4 B-KB4 Variation of the Griinfeld
Taking advantage of the fact that White has not yet castled
The combined force of • • • B-N2 and • • • P-QB4
The combined attack of • • • Q-R4, • • • N-KS, and • • • B-N2 against the
White N/QB3
Cutting down the attack by the exchange of pieces
The disadYantage of delaying the recapture of a temporarily sacrificed
Pawn
The seriousness of a weakness in Black's pawn position because, among
other things, his King cannot find a refuge
The "bulldozer" strategy
Vain efforts on the part of the defender to get counterchances
Maximum coordination of attacking pieces to bring the struggle to a rapid
and successful conclusion
"Bulldozer" Strategy
In a chess game a situation sometimes arises in which two or three
center Pawns on adjacent files are being pushed forward from behind
by pieces . No numerically equivalent pawn front on the oppc;>site side
opposes them, and their advance threatens to bring the hostile King
into an exposed position .
In this situation the center must be considercr,d in its broadest sense ,
that is to say , consisting of the c4-d4-e4-f4-c5-d5-e5-f5 squares, and
the hostile King must be in such a position that it is forced to come out
into the open ; that is, it must not be able to find a refuge anywhere. It is
especially important that the aforementioned pawn front not be op
posed by an equivalent pawn front of the opponent . If, for instance ,
White' s QBP and QP were pushed forward only to meet a Black QBP
and QP, the respective fronts would either be exchanged or advanced
to an interlocked position, and the strategy about to be described
would be inoperative .
Once a situation arises in which all the above conditions exist , the
281
282 Game 21
player with the above-described pawn front can use what we shall
term the "bulldozer" strategy, that is, the pushing forward of the
pawn front in such a way that it crushes everything in its path .
When using this powerful strategy , the attacking side does not pay
much attention to what his opponent is doing in the meantime . His
own strategy is so powerful that he can afford to ignore everything
else , for he is keeping his opponent busy with threats and checks .
The purpose of the bulldozer strategy is easy to recognize . As they
advance, protected by pieces from behind , the Pawns will create free
files or diagonals which will make possible certain activities of the
pieces behind the Pawns . The advancing Pawns will also create
problems for the opponent . It is rather difficult to indicate the condi
tions which will have to be fulfilled to successfully apply this strategy
because carrying it out will cost not only material but also time . After
reaching the 4th rank, Pawns advance only one square per move ;
consequently , six moves are needed to advance two Pawns three
squares .
In view of the many conditions which must be fulfilled before
considering this strategy , it requires a skillful eye to determine
whether the bulldozer strategy can be successful in any given position .
Nonetheless , once the situation is ripe for the strategy , it can be
devastating to the opponent's game .
Grunfeld Defense - 4 B-KB4 Line

Candidates' Match - Buenos Aires - 1 971
Tigran Petrosian - USSR Robert Fischer - USA

1 P-Q4 N-KB3
2 P-QB4 P-KN3
3 N-QB3 P-Q4
The Griinfeld Defense .

If White now plays 4 PxP and the game continues 4 . . . NxP 5
P-K4 NxN 6 PxN, White gets a tremendous pawn preponderance in
the center. Before 1 920, under the influence of Tarrasch , Black would
never have allowed his opponent to get such a center majority , feeling
that it would constitute an overwhelming advantage . But later
analysis, especially Griinfeld' s , showed that such a pawn center can
be attacked by Black' s . . . B-N2 , . . . P-QB4, and . . . N-QB3
Griinfeld Defense: 4 B-KB4 Line 283
and that in the long run Black gets compensation on the Q-side where
he has two Pawns against one and that the White center is not so
powerful because of the strength of the Black fianchetto . To illustrate ,
if after the text play continues 4 PxP NxP 5 P-K4 NxN 6 PxN P-QB4 7
B-QB4 B-N2 8 N-K2 PxP 9 PxP, the situation just mentioned is
present .
The White center with Pawns on c3, d4, and e4 is much more
effective when Black has played . . . P-K3 instead of . . . P-KN3 ,
partly because there is no fianchettoed Black Bishop to exert pressure
on the center , partly because White sometimes gets attacking chances
by playing P-KS . In general , the conversion of a center majority into a
K-side attack is much less promising if B lack has fianchettoed on the
K-side .
In order to avoid the 4 PxP line , which does not give White a clear
advantage , Petrosian replied
4 B-B4
A developing move which will now allow White to play P-K3

without shutting in his QB . It is considered by many as White ' s best
line in the Griinfeld .
4 �
• • B-N2
S P-K3 P-B4
A very aggressive move which immediately poses problems for

White . It prevents him from consolidating by attacking his center, it
increases the possibilities of the fianchettoed Black KB , and it takes
advantage of the fact that because White has developed his Q-side
pieces he is not yet ready to castle . Black' s chances are based mainly
on an attack against White' s center with Black' s fianchettoed Bishop
in the background and on the fact that White' s QB has left its position
on the Q-side . In general , when that is the case and when the White
Bishop is cut off from the Q-side by the White pawn chain d4-e3-f2 , it
furthers the Black attack against the White Q-side .
This attack is most dangerous as long as White has not castled
and in the continuation of this game White has some problems because
his King is still in the center .
On the other hand, if White succeeds in cutting down the attack , his
pieces and especially his Bishop on f4 are very well posted.
284 Game 21
6 PxBP
White accepts Black' s challenge by taking the proffered Pawn .

This enhances the power of B lack' s KB , but White has compensation :
a temporary plus Pawn and more pressure against d5 .
White can play 6 N-B 3 , but then Black answers 6 . . . PxQP ,
which will also enhance the power of his Bishop somewhat later.
6 . . • Q-R4
In conjunction with 7 . . . N-K5 this is a strong attacking move

which takes maximum advantage of the fact that White has not yet
castled.
If now the questionable 7 PxP , Black has the choice between
1) 7 . . . N-K5 , winning back all material-which happens in

this game through a transposition of moves-and
2) 7 . . . NxP 8 QxN BxNch 9 PxB QxPch 1 0 K-K2 QxR 1 1
B-K5 Q-N8 1 2 BxR B-K3 , and the situation is very unclear . Black
will probably recapture the piece and stand better; e .g . , 1 3 Q-Q3
( 1 3 Q-Q2? B-B5ch) 13 . . . QxPch 14 K-B3 ( 1 4 Q-Q2? B-B5ch)
14 . . . P-B3
2a) 1 5 B-N7 N-B3 (threatening 1 6 . . . N-K4ch) 1 6 K-N3
R-Q l , and Black has all the pieces in play ;
2b) 1 5 Q-N5ch K-B2, and now 1 6 QxP? does not work
because of 1 6 . . . B-Q4ch .
This is a wild variation with excellent chances for Black notwith

standing the fact that he is a piece down . Certainly it is not forced for
either side . The entire attack is encouraged by the fact that the White
QB has left its Q-side unprotected . Black must take advantage of that
situation now or never.
7 R-Bl
White immediately protects his QN . The game could also have

continued 7 Q-N3 N-K5 8 R-B 1 NxP/4 , but since then White's Queen
is attacked and White loses a tempo , the text may be slightly better .
7 • • • N-KS
The expected move . White ' s QN is attacked three times, defended

only twice .
8 PxP
Nonetheless , White takes the time to win an extra Pawn . He can do

this because of the resources of his command after . . . NxN , as we
shall soon see .
8 . . . NxN
Not 8 . . . BxNch , because after 9 PxB : 1 ) 9 . . . NxP/B6? 1 0

Q-Q2, winning the Knight for a Pawn ; or 2 ) 9 . . QxRP 1 0 B-K2 ,
.
and Black has exchanged his valuable fianchettoed Bishop for a

Knight without any advantage-no extra Pawn . In general , the fian
chettoed Bishop must be preserved because of its great power and
because of the weaknesses which exist for the side that no longer has
it .
9 Q-Q2
A fine move and even a forced one if White wants to avoid having to
move his King , for if 9 PxN BxPch , the White King must move .
9 . • • QxRP
If 9 . . . QxBP 10 PxN, Black remains a Pawn down . With the text

Black is also a Pawn down , but later o.n White will not be able to
protect his QBP.
286 Game 21
lO Px:N Q-R4
If 1 0 . . . QxQch 1 1 KxQ , Black would still be a Pawn down , and

without Queens on the board the White King would stand well in the
center .
The side that has the initiative (in this case Black) should almost
never exchange Queens .
11 B-B4
White must castle as soon as possible . He therefore develops his KB

to a very appropriate square .
Black could now play 1 1 . . . QxP/4, and after 1 2 B-R2 White has
nothing more to fear ; the material balance is restored , but White
stands a bit better because his center Pawns are stronger than Black 's
side Pawns . The White center Pawns are so strong because they are
supported by their Bishops . They are stronger than Black' s passed
QRP because in this case the advancing passed Pawn has to work for
itself alone . The continuation of the game will show how powerful
White ' s QBP and QP are .
11 • • • N-Q2
The purpose of this move is to continue with 1 2 . . NxP, but.
Black reserves the possibility of playing . . . N-K4 if he should

become convinced that White ' s Pc5 will be lost anyway . In general ,
Black' s Knight would be stronger on his central K4-square than on his
QB4-square .
If now 1 2 P-B6 PxP 1 3 PxP N-N3 , attacking the White Bishop ,
White' s Pc6 cannot be protected and will eventually be lost .
12 N-K2
A very good move, for it supports White ' s P/B3 once more . If now
1 2 . . . NxP , then 1 3 0-0, and White stands a little better because he
has castled, has better development, has stronger Pawns , and Black' s
attack has , i n a sense , failed . Moreover, i f the Black Knight eventual
ly goes to e4 , it can be driven back by P-B3 , thanks to the fact that the
White Knight is on e2 rather than f3 .
Weaker is 1 2 N-B 3 , for then 1 2 . . . NxP, threatening 1 3 . . .
N-K5 , from which square Black ' s Knight would be attacking the then
insufficiently protected White P/B 3 .
12 . • . N-K4
In order to attack White ' s Bishop and to exert pressure on d3 , but

this proves to be more or less illusory . Simpler and perhaps better is
1 2 . . . NxP .
13 B-R2
For 1 3 BxN leaves Black with the Two Bishops .
13 • . . B-B4?
Apparently strong , for it threatens 1 4 . . . N-Q6ch .

So far both players have played very precisely , but Black ' s 1 3th
move is a mistake . If he had played 1 3 . . . QxP/4, the game would
have been almost even .
14 BxN
To parry the threat of 1 4 . . . N-Q6ch . When the attack becomes

too strong , one must cut down its force through exchanges .
14 • • • BxB
15 N-Q4!
Threatening on the one hand 1 6 NxB , giving Black a doubled

288 Game 21
Pawn , and on the other to maintain his pJus Pawn by 16 N-N3 or still
better by 16 P-B 6 . If now
1 ) 1 5 . . . B xN 16 BPxB , White is a Pawn up ;

2) 1 5 . . . B-Q2
2a) 16 N-N3(?) Q-R6 17 0-0 B-R5 1 8 R-N 1 0-0 , and White' s
position is not very attractive : his pieces are badly dispJaced ,
and it is not sure that White can maintain his Pawn in the Jong
run ;
2b) 1 6 R-QN l ! , attacking BJack' s QNP,
2b l ) 1 6 . . . Q-B2 1 7 P-B6 PxP 1 8 PxP, and now
1 8 . . . B-B 1 is not recommendab]e because of 1 9 N-N5 ,
and 1 8 . . . BxP loses the Exchange : 1 9 NxB QxN 20
B-Q5 ;
2b2) 1 6 . . . Q-R3 1 7 P-KB4 B-N2 1 8 P-B6 PxP 1 9 PxP
B-B l 20 N-N5 with an sorts of chances for White .
Therefore 1 3 . . . B-B4? was very bad . After this questionable

move Black had only the choice of a number of eviJs . He couJd permit
the exchange at f5 , which he did, or he could withdraw the Bishop
(variation 2b above) . Too simple to be taken seriously is
15 . . . BxN, discussed under variation 1 , since BJack ends up a
Pawn down without compensation .
15 • . • QxP/4
16 NxB PxN
Thus BJack' s K-side is mutilated and his Pf5 is weak . True , there
are Bishops of opposite coJors , but their equalizing force becomes
operative onJy in the ending . As long as there are Queens and Rooks
on the board , there wiU be a vigorous struggJe.
17 0-0
The White King is now safe , and White can now consider how to
take advantage of his superior position . White ' s position is superior
(a) because Black has a weak Pawn on f5 ; (b) because his King cannot
castle safely ; and (c) because White has Pawns in the center . White
already threatens 1 8 Q-B2, and 1 8 . . . P-B5 is not good because of

1 9 PxP BxP? 20 Q-R4ch , winning the Bishop .
17 • • • Q-R4
This (a) prevents the advance of White ' s QBP; (b) ties the White
Queen down to the protection of the White Bishop at a2; and (c)
prevents White from carrying out the aforementioned threat 18 Q-B2
P-B5 (other moves are also bad) 19 PxP BxKBP? .
The obvious 1 7 . . . 0-0 is neither better nor worse than the text : 1 8
Q-Q3 Q-B l ( 1 8 . . . P-B5 1 9 Q-B5 with the powerful threat of 20
B-N l ) 1 9 P-KB4 and now
1 ) 1 9 . . . B-B 3 ? 20 P-N4 !
l a) 20 . . . PxP? 21 B-N l , etc . ;
l b) 20 . . . P-K3 2 1 PxKP PxKP 22 PxP wins a Pawn ;
2) 1 9 . . . B-N2 20 P-K4 PxP 2 1 QxP, and Black cannot avoid
the loss of a Pawn .
Nor would 1 7 . . . Q-Q3 have saved the game . After 1 8 P-N3

P-N4 Black has indeed stopped the advance of White' s QBP , but after
1 9 Q-B2! (always that strong move with the Queen dominating two
diagonals and controlling the QB-file) 1 9 . . . P-K3 20 P-KB4 B-N2 2 1
P-K4 ! Black i s again i n trouble : 2 1 . . . PxKP 22 QxP (indirectly
threatening the Black QR) , and 22 . . . 0-0? fails because of 23 B-N l .
After 1 7 . . . Q-Q3 the reply 1 8 P-KB4 is also strong.
The point is that Black has too many weaknesses : (a) his KBP ; (b)
his open K-side which makes K-side castling questionable ; and (c) a
minority in the center which enables White to push his QBP or
possibly even his KP.
18 Q-B2
Unpinning his QBP and attacking Black ' s KBP.
18 • • • P-BS
Black could have tried 1 8 . . . R-QB 1 and the game might have
continued 1 9 QxP Q-B2 20 P-KB4 BxQBP 2 1 P-Q6 ! PxP 22 BxPch ! ,
winning .
290 Game 21
19 P-B4
White now seeks to make use of his strong center and direct
attacking chances , that is, to push his QBP to c5 and his QP to d6 , thus
activating his Bishop , all of which is very effective because of Black 's
bad K-position . It is interesting to note that after 1 9 . . PxP White
.
does not even take the time to recapture the Pawn . If 1 9 PxP BxP,
Black would have eliminated his weak Pawn , and the game would
have been simplified .
19 • . • PxP
If instead 1 9 . . . P-N3 (to prevent 20 P-B5) 20 PxP BxP 2 1

QR-K l , the Black King cannot find a safe spot .
After the text Black hoped for 20 PxP in order to simplify . As long
as the Black Pawn is on f4 it is in danger in view of a possible Q-K4 or
Q-B5 at the right time . Therefore , Black had every reason to want to
simplify with 1 9 . . . PxP 20 PxP. But Petrosian ' s genius saw far
ahead, and he realized that 20 P-B5 ! ! was much more important than
being a Pawn down .
20 P-BS! !
The bulldozer i n action ! White ' s compensation for the Pawn i s that
he now has a direct attack . Because of the open files , the Black King is
in immediate danger . For instance , if 20 . . . PxPch 21 QxP 0-0
(2 1 . B-B3 22 P-Q6) , 22 B -N l wins .
. .
20 • • • Q-Q7
This looks good, for it threatens the exchange of Queens , after

which White' s attacking chances would be considerably reduced .
Also 20 . . . B-Q5 looks playable, but then White can continue 2 1
P-Q6 PxPch 2 2 K-R l P-K3 2 3 Q-K4 QxB 24 QxB and 1 ) 24 . . .
0-0-0 25 P-B6 or 2) 24 . . . 0-0 25 Q-B6, threatening R-B3-N3ch .
21 Q-R4ch
Naturally White will not permit an exchange of Queens with such

an attack . The text also prevents Black from ever castling .
21 • • • K-Bl
If now 22 PxP QxKPch 23 K-R l Q-R3 , threatening mate .
22 QR-Ql
White puts his QR on the Q-file , where it will support the QP as it

advances .
22 • • • Q-K7
Black could have played 22 . . . P-K7 , and after 23 RxQ BxPch 24

KxB PxR =Q 25 P-Q6 Black is the Exchange ahead ; but he is still lost ,
since White ' s pieces are more active , for after 25 P-Q6 :
1 ) 25 . . . PxP 26 Q-KB4 Resigns ;

2) 25 . . . P-K3 26 P-Q7 K-K2 27 Q-R4ch P-B 3 28 Q-KN4 wins
by 29 Q-N7ch or 29 QxPch;
3) 25 . . . R-KN l 26 PxPch K-N2 27 Q-Q4ch P-B 3 (27 . . . K
R3 28 Q-R4ch K-N2 29 Q-N5ch K-R l 30 Q-B6ch R-N2 3 1
R-Q8ch , etc . ) 28 Q-N4ch K-R l 29 BxR RxB 30 R-QS , etc .
23 P-Q6!
Threatening 24 PxPch KxP 25 Q-Q7ch followed by 26 QxPch, but

Black would probably answer 24 PxPch by 24 . . . K-N2 .
Suppose that after the text Black answers 23 . . . R-KN l , the game
could then continue 24 PxPch K-N2 25 Q-N3 K-R l 26 QxBP? Q-N5
292 Game 21
27 P-N3 P-K7 , and Black wins . However, 26 QxKP (instead of 26

QxBP?) would win for White , since he has a plus Pawn and a powerful
position ; e . g . , 26 . . . BxPch 27 KxB QxB 28 Q-K5ch R-N2 29
R-Q8ch , etc .
23 • • •
Protecting his BP and threatening mate . But with 23 . . . BxPch

Black could have put up more resistance , and White could easily have
gone wrong . Still, White wins by force : 24 KxB Q-R4ch 25 K-N l
P-K7 26 PxPch ! K-N2 27 Q-Q4ch P-B3 28 R-Q3 ! PxR= Qch 29 KxQ
Q-R8ch 30 K-K2 Q-R4ch 3 1 K-Q2 (3 1 K-K l ? Q-K4ch, exchanging
Queens)
1 ) 3 1 . . . Q-N4ch 32 K-Q l Q-R4ch (he has to parry the threat of

33 R-N3) 33 R-B3 ! ! , and if Black protects his KBP, he loses the
Queen or is mated : 33 . . . Q-K4 34 R-N3ch ;
2) 3 1 . . . Q-R3ch 32 K-B2 Q-N3 33 K-N2, etc .
24 P-84
Forced .
24 • • • P-K7
The game would have been prolonged by 24 . . . B-B 3 , but that

would have been hopeless as well . White would then storm the
position by 25 R-Q5 Q-N3 26 B-Nl Q-R3 27 Q-K4 and thus recapture

his Pawn and maintain an overwhelming position .
25 PxB PxQR = Q
Bad would be 2 5 . . PxKR = Qch 2 6 RxQ , for then both the

.
White Rook and Bishop would be trained on f7 .
26 RxQ
If now 26 . . . PxP 27 R-KB I , again working along the KB-file .
26 • • • QxKP
It is interesting to note that White 's attack is so strong that he can

afford to lose all his Pawns and decide the game with his pieces .
27 R-KB l
Threatening 28 RxPch K-N l 29 RxKP dis eh, etc .
27 • . • P-B3
If 27 . . . QxBPch 28 K-R l P-B3 (28 . . . P-K3 29 Q-Q7 or

28 . . P-B4 29 Q-K4) 29 Q-N3 K-N2 30 Q-B7ch K-R3 3 1 PxP
.
KR-KN I 32 B-N l , etc .

A little more resistance might have been offered by 27 . . . P-B4,
but White wins : 28 Q-N3 ! (28 Q-Q7 K-N2 does not mean much)
28 . . . P-K3 29 QxNP and now
294 Game 21
1 ) 29 . . . QxBPch 30 K-R l R-K l 31 P-N4 ! , and Black cannot

parry the deadly threat 32 RxPch PxR 33 Q-B7 mate ;
2) 29 . . . R-K l 30 P-B6 (30 P-N4 would be answered by
30 . . . R-KN I 3 1 RxPch? QxR) 30 . . . R-KN I (what else?) 3 1
P-B7 ! (if 3 1 P-Q7 ? RxPch i s annoying and probably leads to
perpetual check) 3 1 . . . QxP 32 P-B8 = Q RxQ 33 RxPch, etc .
28 Q-N3 K-N2
If 28 . . . P-K3 29 QxNP with variations similar to those given

immediately above .
29 Q-B7ch K-R3
White 's attack is overwhelming , but it is actually still difficult for

him to find the right line .
30 PxP P-84
If 30 . . . R-KN l (either Rook) , then 3 1 B-N l R-N3 32 Q-B8ch

K-N4 33 BxR ; or if 3 1 . . . K-N4 (instead of 3 1 . . . R-N3) 32 RxP
QxR 33 P-R4ch, winning the Queen .
31 R:xP Q-QSch
32 K-Rl Resigns
For if 32 . . . Q-Q8ch 33 R-B 1 , and after the Black Queen moves

away 34 R-B6ch decides .
Black lost the game because with 1 3 . . B-B4? he got himself

.
into a position where White was able to saddle him with doubled
Pawns and prevent his castling profitably . The energetic advance of
the White QBP and QP made the Black K-position hopeless notwith
standing the defender' s inventive attempts at defense .
Game 22
The Open and Closed Catalan Variations of the Queen's Gambit Declined
The development of Black's QBP to c6 or c5 in the Catalan
The development of Black's QB to b7 vs. a6
The treacherous in-between move based on indirect attack
Simplification to an endgame when one is a Pawn up
The importance of creating a flight-square for one's King
The sacrifice of a Pawn for a more active position
Zugzwang on a full board
Cooperation of Queen and Bishop in the presence of a Bishop of the
opposite color
Varied action on both wings
Zugzwang
A familiar inscription found under many diagrams of pawn en
dgame positions is: "White to move and draw ; Black to move and
lose . ' ' In such positions it is obviously a disadvantage for Black to
have the move , since he has to play to his detriment . He is in
Zugzwang .
Zugzwang can also occur earlier in the game when many pieces are
still on the board . For instance , a cornered player has succeeded by
skillful maneuvering in preventing his opponent from penetrating into
his position . All his defensive pieces are in their optimal positions . All
his moves with extraneous Pawns have already been exhausted . If it
were now his turn to play , he would be obliged to weaken his
defensive setup fatally. But fortunately it is his opponent' s turn to
move . The latter will now maneuver in such a way that after a certain
number of moves the same position will again arise but now with the
cornered player to move . He is now in Zugzwang .
He would prefer not to have to move . But this is not possible in
chess . One of his pieces will have to give up its advantageous position .
So he has to play, and he must determine which move will hold the
damage to a minimum . With one move he loses a Pawn, another move
costs perhaps a piece , a third choice gives his opponent a formidible
296
Catalan Opening 297
passed Pawn . What move should he make ? In each case of Zugzwang

the decision is very difficult .
How can one bring an opponent into Zugzwang?
One can continuously attack various weak points in the opponent' s
position s o that defense becomes increasingly difficult . Even if the
opponent succeeds in parrying all threats , his position gradually loses
flexibility , which increases the danger of Zugzwang .
Experienced players see an approaching Zugzwang far in advance
and often accept some material or positional disadvantage rather than
permit Zugzwang, which will perhaps lead to still greater losses .
Catalan Opening
lnternatlonal Tournament - Baku, USSR - 1 972
Yuri Balashov - USSR Mikhail Tai - USSR

1 P-Q4 N-KB3
2 P-QB4 P-K3
3 N-KB3
As we have seen in the Kotov-Kholmov game , Black could now

reply 3 . . . P-QN3 in order to attempt to control e4 by . . . B-N2 .
This would then become the Queen' s Indian Defense.
3 . . . P-Q4
Instead, Tai now continues with 3 . . P-Q4 , which could lead to
.
one of the many variations of the Queen ' s Gambit Declined .
4 P-KN3
298 Game 22
This is the key move of the Catalan Opening , which is characterized

for White by Pc4 and Pd4 plus the K-side fianchetto .
As a matter of fact, at the outset the Catalan looks like a Queen ' s
Gambit Declined i n which the K B i s fianchettoed instead of being
developed to d3 , but because of that fianchetto the resulting strategy is
completely different from that of the classical Queen ' s Gambit
Declined .
In the Catalan Opening sooner or later Black will play . . . QPxBP
followed by . . . P-QB4 in order to free his game and to provide some
way to develop his QB advantageously . As soon as the exchange
. . . QPxBP is made , White ' s KB , which will by then be fianchet
toed , will have a fine diagonal along which to exert pressure on
Black ' s Q-wing .
The game can now go in one of two directions :
(a) the Open Formation , characterized b y 4 . . . PxP ; i t often

continues 5 Q-B2 P-QR3 6 QxP P-QN4 7 Q-B2 B-N2 8 B-N2
QN-Q2 9 0-0 P-B4, at which point Black has neutralized in the
center and has a satisfactory position ;
(b) the Closed Variation , in which Black postpones . . . PxP in
order first to develop pieces, as in the game that follows .
4 • • • B-K2
With this move Black commits himself to a closed formation . As

long as he postpones . . . PxP, the formation will remain closed . But
he will play . . . PxP much later .
5 B-N2 0-0
6 0-0 QN-Q2
Black simply develops , and now we have the basic structure of the
closed formation of the Catalan .
7 Q-B2
From experiences in recent play, it seems better to protect the QBP

by 7 Q-B2 than by 7 QN-Q2 , as was formerly done . This usually
permits White , after proper preparation , to develop his QN to the
more active c3 .
Catalan Opening 299
7 . . . P-B3
This gives Black a very solid position in the center and postpones-
. . . P-QB4, which will eventually be played after Black has de
veloped his QB . The extra move certainly involves a loss of tempo,
but it avoids the situation to be described in the next paragraph ,
and . . . P-QB4 can be played at a later time with less risk.
An immediate 7 . . . P-B4 would lead to a sort of Rubinstein
Variation of the Tarrasch Defense of the Queen' s Gambit Declined,
after which 8 PxQP might follow, and if 8 . . KPxP, Black' s QP
.
could become weak , and White ' s fianchettoed KB would take on real
meaning . In such cases, the ideal pawn formation for White is to have
a Pawn on d4 with Black Pawns on c5 and d5 . This would enable
White to give Black hanging Pawns or an isolated Pawn by playing
PxBP at any time . In order to avoid this formation Black should
answer 8 PxQP by 8 . . . NxP , and White can then continue with
R-Q l either immediately or after P-QR3 . In any case , White has a bit
more freedom .
8 P-N3
This will give White ' s QB an excellent post on b2 and furnishes

added and needed protection to White' s QBP .
8 . . . P-QN3
This serves to make a place for Black 's QB on a6 or b7 . As already

remarked , the QBP is on c6 only temporarily .
9 B-N2 B-R3
Now White cannot play lO N-B 3 , for he would lose a Pawn after
1 0 . . . PxP 1 1 PxP BxP .
The text seeks more active play for Black 's Q B than the modest
development on b7 would afford . In addition to forcing l O QN-Q2
(rather than lO N-B3), Black plans to exploit the position of White ' s
Queen b y opening the QB-file and pressing against c4 . The general
plan is . . . P-B4, . . . PxBP, . . . R-B l or . . . P-B4, . . . PXQP ,
. . . R-B l .
A bit too passive is 9 . . . B-N2 . White answers l O N-B 3 , and if
Black then plays lO . . . R-B 1 , White replies 1 1 P-K4 . However ,
Black can prevent the advance of White' s KP by playing l O . . .
300 Game 22
P-B4, and then after 1 1 PxQP Black can either go into the Rubinstein
formula by 1 1 . . . KPxP , or he can play 1 1 . . . NxP , and the game
continues 1 2 NxN BxN 1 3 P-K4 , in either case with some superiority
for White.
10 QN-Q2
In order to protect his QBP once more and to be able to play P-K4 . If
White could realize P-K4, it would give him a fine position after . . .
PxP; NxP. With it he would gain space and increase the force of his
fianchettoed KB , the more so since Black ' s QB is not on b7 .
10 • • • P-B4
Black is carrying out the planned outlined above , and it does not
matter to him if White gets some initiative in the meantime by
advancing his KP.
If instead Black had first played 10 . . . R-B I , White would still
answer 1 1 P-K4 but with more force because then Black would not
have a single counterchance .
Some possibilities after the text are I ) 1 1 PxBP NxP and Black
controls e4 ; and 2) 1 1 PxQP NxP 1 2 KR-K l R-B l , and Black stands
best , for 1 3 P-K4 is answered by 1 3 . . . N-N5 , possibly followed by
14 . . . N-Q6. The development of Black ' s QB to a6 has already
proved its worth .
1 1 P-K4
Consistent but perhaps not best . Everything would be fine if Black

were compelled to answer 1 1 . . . PxKP and if White could reply 1 2
Catalan Opening 301
NxP. Then he would get a good position , a greater command of space,

and attacking possibilities .
11 • . • PxBP!
Best , since it keeps Black's QB as active as possible , for it can later

successfully press against White' s QBP , which would not have been
the case after 1 1 . . PxKP.
.
12 PxP/4
White could have played 1 2 NxP, but then after 1 2 . . PxP 1 3.
NxQP R-B l , Black has some pressure on the White position .

Unclear is 1 2 P-KS for there could follow 1 2 . . PxNP 1 3 PxNP
, .
BxR 14 PxN BxB 1 5 PxB QxP 1 6 KxB , and it is not certain which side
stands better . White has a Bishop and a Knight , Black a Rook and two
Pawns . Materially speaking , Black is not badly off . He continues
1 6 . . . KR-B l , opens the QB-file , and tries to exchange as many
pieces as possible to prevent White from launching an attack with his
pieces . All in all , chances may be about equal .
Starting with his 1 2th move , White had to calculate five or more
moves ahead . But that is not too difficult since the choices for both
sides are limited . It is always a question of take , take , take, and the
only thing to consider continually is the relative material situation .
12 • • • PxP
Black gives White an isolated QBP. He had to make this move ;

otherwise White could play P-QS and become powerful in the center .
If now 1 3 NxP R-B l , White has two isolated Pawns, and Black
stands better since he has pressure along tbe QB-file .
13 P-KS
Opening the a8/h l diagonal with indirect threats against Black' s

Q R and the c 6 square, the importance o f which will be seen i n the
continuation of the game .
If Black answers the text with 1 3 . . . N-K l , White wins material
by 1 4 NxP R-B l 1 5 N-B6. Relatively better is 1 3 . . . N-NS 14 NxP
R-B l 1 5 N-B6 Q-K l 1 6 P-KR3 N-R3 1 7 NxP with the advantage of
302 Game 22
one Pawn to White . But rather than these disadvantageous continua

tions, Black finds a promising reply .
13 • . . P-Q6!
A very strong in-between move based on the Black Queen' s indi

rect attack on the White Queen if the latter captures the Pawn , as it
does .
14 QxP?
A bad mistake . White should play 14 Q-B 3 , and then Black has the
choice between 1) 14 . . . N-N5 1 5 P-KR3 N-R3 16 N-Q4 R-B l 1 7
N-B6 Q-K l 1 8 NxP R-B2 1 9 N-B6 N-QB4 with a complicated
position and about equal chances ; and 2) 14 . . . N-K l l 5 N-Q4 NxP
16 BxR QxB 1 7 P-B4, and it appears that Black has sufficient
compensation for the sacrificed Exchange : he controls the diagonal ,
whereas White has weak Pawns and an exposed King .
14 • • • NxP!
A sham sacrifice-a terrible surprise ! If l ) 15 QxQ, Black can

insert 15 . . . NxNch ; and if 2) 1 5 NxN QxQ 1 6 NxQ QR-Q I , Black
recaptures the sacrificed piece with a plus Pawn . If White continues
1 7 B xN , then 17 . . . PxB 1 8 B-K4 P-B4 and Black has gained
material .
15 Q-B2
Somewhat better would have been 15 Q-N3 ; e . g . , 15 . . . NxNch 1 6

Catalan Opening 303
NxN R-B l 1 7 QR-B I N-Q2 1 8 KR-Q l Q-B2, after which Black has a
plus Pawn and keeps chances on the full board ; however , White has
avoided the excessive simplification which follows and which is bad
for him because of his pawn weaknesses.
Bad now is 1 5 . . . N-Q6 , which loses material after 16 N-KS and
1 ) 1 6 . . . NxN 1 7 BxR , etc . , or 2) 1 6 . . . N-QN5 1 7 Q-B3 R-B l 1 8
P-QR3 , etc . So to simplify and to increase his advantage Black plays
15 • • . Q-Q6
If 16 Q-N3 , then 1 6 . . . NxNch 1 7 NxN QxP , and Black has won

a second Pawn . If 1 6 QxQ NxQ 1 7 B-B3 QR-B I , Black has a plus
Pawn and the initiative . So White plays the aggressive
16 Q-R4
Threatening 17 QxB . It looks promising , for Black's N/4 is still

hanging , and White ' s KB indirectly threatens Black' s QR . But Black
can take care of his N/4 by capturing with check.
16 • • • NxNch
17 BxN
White must recapture with the Bishop . If 1 7 NxN, then

1 7 . . . QxP wins Black a second Pawn .
17 • • • QxN
Here again comes a series of more or less forced exchanges .
18 BxN
White must make this capture first , for after 1 8 BxR QxB 1 9 QxB
RxB Black has two minor pieces for the Rook . The same is true for 1 8
QxB QxB 1 9 BxR RxB .
18 • • . BxB
If White now plays 19 QR-QI , then 19 . . . Q-R4 with material

advantage to Black .
If he replies 1 9 BxR, Black can best answer 1 9 . . . Q-R4 ! , and the
304 Game 22
game would continue 20 QxQ PxQ 21 B-B3 BxR 22 RxB BxP, and
the Bishops are of the same color and Black is two Pawns up ;
therefore , he must win in the ending although his QRP's are doubled
and isolated .
19 QxB BxR
20 BxR
Now that the smoke has cleared , what was formerly a rather
complicated series of positions has become, in fact , a rather simple
endgame . Each side has a Queen, a Rook , and a Bishop, but thanks to
his unexpected in-between move 1 3 . . . P-Q6 Black has emerged
with a plus Pawn . Moreover , he has two connected Pawns on the
Q-side, whereas White has two isolated Q-side Pawns.
20 • • •
After 20 . . . RxB 21 RxB White would have had better drawing

chances than after the text, which is to some extent unexpected since
now there are Bishops of opposite colors on the board . However, in
the attack it is sometimes advantageous to have Bishops of opposite
colors , and we will see this confirmed in what follows. Moreover,
endings with exclusively heavy pieces tend to draw even if one of the
two sides has a plus Pawn .
21 B-B3
White withdraws his Bishop to f3 rather than to g2 in order to leave

a flight-square for his King .
After 2 1 QxRP? P-QN4 ! Black gets an irresistible passed Pawn on
Catalan Opening 305
c4, for after 22 Q-R6 PxP White cannot answer 23 QxBP because of
23 . . . RxB .
21 . • . P-N3
A flight-square for the King in such positions is absolutely neces

sary . Black does not want to lose time holding his plus Pawn, which he
could have done by playing 2 1 . . . Q-B6 immediately or on the next
move , but rather prefers to pass on to the attack .
22 QxRP
Now 22 . . . P-QN4 would not give Black the irresistible passed

Pawn . White could protect his QBP by 23 Q-R6 .
22 • • • R-Ql
A fascinating position . Although White has temporarily restored

material equality , Black stands much better. All his pieces are active .
Black' s Bishop not only defends his QNP but also controls the a7/g l
diagonal . White' s Bishop has no square from which it can simulta
neously attack and defend; Black's Rook is mobile , whereas White' s
Rook i s tied down t o the defense of f2 ; and Black' s Queen i s much
more active than is White ' s .
2 3 K-N2 B-B4
To give the Rook ready access to the open Q-file .
24 Q-B7
,,
Ties the Black Queen to the protection of the Rook so that Black
cannot take White' s QRP.
24 • • • R-Q3
Black thus prevents the White Queen from reentering the game via
e5 . Also the Bishop protects the Rook so that the Black Queen can
move freely . Now 25 . . . QxP is threatened.
25 P-QR4 Q-B7
306 Game 22
With the deadly threat of an eventual . . . R-Q7 . White ' s KBP

cannot easily be defended after 26 . . . R-Q7 , and so the White Queen
must return to the game by Q-N8ch, Q-K5ch, and Q-K l .
26 Q-N7
If 26 P-R5 , Black threatens mate in a few moves by 26 . . . R-Q7 27

Q-N8ch K-N2 28 Q-K5ch P-B3 29 Q-K l PxP , and Black ' s passed
Pawn guarantees an easy win .
26 • • • QxRP
Now 26 . . . R-Q7 would not be decisive because of the variation

given under 26 Q-N7 : 27 Q-N8ch K-N2 28 Q-K5ch P-B3 29 Q-K l .
Black need not fear the exchange of Queens by 27 Q-R8ch QxQ 28
BxQ , for he wins a second Pawn by 28 . . . R-Q5 29 R-B l R-Q7 30
R-B I R-B7 . These last moves show that two weaknesses are far more
serious than twice one weakness .
27 B-Kl Q-B7
28 Q-B3 R-Q7
29 R-Kl
Thus White has been able to defend his vulnerable KBP in another
way .
29 • • • K-N2
30 K-Bl
White has succeeded in holding his own , but now he has practically
no more moves , and so Black can gradually strengthen his position .
30 • • • B-QS(?)
A superfluous move. Black could have played for Zugzwang im

mediately by 30 . . . P-K4 3 1 P-R4 P-R4 , and then Zugzwang would
be almost complete , as we will explain after Black' s 33d move when
the same position will arise .
31 P-R4 P-R4
Catalan Opening 307
It would not be wise for Black to allow P-R5 , for it might expose the
Black King to annoying checks .
32 K-N2
White should have taken advantage of the possibility of increasing

his freedom of movement by 32 P-N4 PxP 33 QxP .
32 • . • P-K4
Threatening to win a piece by 33 . . . P-K5 .
33 K-Bl B-B4
In order to make room for the Rook at d4 , so that 34 P-N4 could be

answered by 34 . . . R-Q5 , threatening 35 . . . R-B 5 ; e . g . , 35 Q-N3
R-B5 36 P-B3 PxP and wins .
White is now in almost complete Zugzwang . His King cannot move
because of 34 P-K5 , winning the Bishop, nor can the Rook move
because of 34 P-K5 , again winning the Bishop . Likewise, 34 P-N4 is
impossible on account of 34 . . . R-Q5 , threatening 35 . . . R-B5
and 36 . . . RxBPch . Finally , 34 Q-B6 fails against 34 . . . Q-B4 35
Q-N2 (35 Q-B 3 ? QxQ 36 BxQ RxPch) 35 . . . P-K5 , and White
cannot prevent Black from getting a strong passed Pawn on e3 , which
will decide the game in the long run .
34 R-Ql
With the text White gives up another Pawn . He has no reasonable

308 Game 22
moves, as has been shown above . Possibly 34 Q-B6 would have been
preferable (see above) .
34 • • • RxRch
35 BxR QxQBPch
36 B-K2 Q-QS
With two Pawns to the good the win is no longer in doubt , although
it may require considerable time . The presence of the Bishops of
opposite colors slows down the win .
37 K-N2 P-KS
38 Q-B4 Q-Q4
Threatening 39 . . . P-K6ch .
39 K-Bl B-Q3
As in Game 2, Black makes this move to gain time on the clock .

The 40-move time control is approaching .
40 Q-K3 B-B4
41 Q-B3ch B-QS
42 Q-B4
White would like to exchange Queens . It would give him some

drawing chances , since the White King is sufficiently near as to be
able (with the help of the Bishop) to stop Black' s QNP , whereas
Black ' s majority on the K-side is not yet very dangerous .
42 • • • Q-K4
Black avoids an exchange of Queens ; an endgame without Queens

and with Bishops of opposite colors may win , but not so easily . He
keeps his Queen to attack, possibly to win another Pawn , or to
advance his QNP (this advance would not be possible without the
Queens on the board) .
Now 43 . . . P-K6 is threatened , and if 44 P-B3 QxP , or if 44 P-B4
Q-K5 45 K-N l Q-N8ch 46 K-N2 B-B4, threatening 47 . . . Q-K8 , and
White' s possibilities of defense are decreased , for his K-wing is too
"open . "
Catalan Opening 309
43 K-N2
If now 43 . . . P-K6, White can answer 44 P-B 3 , for his NP is

protected .
43 . . . B-B4
To free his Queen from the protection of the Bishop .
44 B-Ql Q-B3
The White Queen must now go to the defense of its BP. Because of
that Black will soon be able to advance his QNP .
45 Q-K2 Q-QS
46 B-B2 P-B4
Practically forced , and it opens the Black King to a number of

checks . However, Tal has calculated the consequences very
precisely .
47 B-N3
White now threatens 48 Q-B4 QxQ (48 . . . QxPch 49 K-R3 and

Black cannot avoid perpetual check) 49 BxQ , after which with only
Bishops of opposite colors on the board White has drawing chances
despite the fact that he is two Pawns down .
47 . . . P-QN4!
L
310 Game 22
The Pawn has passed the critical point, but White dare not capture
it . If 48 QxNP QxPch 49 K-R3 Q-N8 , the Black King can escape
perpetual check:
1) (if the White Queen now checks) 50 Q-Q7ch K-R3 51 Q-Q2ch

P-K6 52 Q-KN2 (52 Q-K2 Q-R8ch 53 Q-R2 QxQch , etc . ) 52 . . .
QxQch 53 KxQ P-K7 and wins ;
2) (if the Queen limits itself to defense immediately) 50 Q-K2
B-B7 5 1 Q-N2ch K-R2 52 B-N8ch (the only try) 52 . . . KxB 53
Q-N8ch K-B2 54 Q-B7ch K-K3 55 Q-B6ch K-K4 56 Q-B3ch
B-Q5 57 Q-B7ch K-Q4 58 Q-Q7ch K-B5 59 Q-R4ch K-Q6 60
Q-N5ch K-B7 6 1 Q-B4ch K-N8 62 Q-N3ch B-N2-a wild chase
which has finally ended , for White has no further effective checks
and no way to prevent Black from mating .
48 B-B2 P-NS
49 B-N3 Q-B6
SO Resigns
Somewhat unexpected . We continue the game :
1 ) 50 Q-B4 Q-B6ch 5 1 K-R2 QxBPch 52 K-R3 Q-Q5

l a) 53 Q-N8ch K-R3 54 B-B7 Q-B 3 and White' s attack is cut
down ;
l b) 53 QxQ BxQ 54 K-N2 K-B3 55 K-B l P-N4 and Black
wins the ending with his three plus Pawns .
2) 50 Q-Q l Q-N7
2a) 5 1 Q-B2 QxQ 52 BxQ K-B3 (the fact that Black ' s QNP
has advanced two squares makes a big difference) 53 K-B 1
K-K4 54 K-K2 K-Q5 55 K-Q2 K-B5 , and White has the
choice between losing all his Pawns (56 BxP, etc . ) and allow
ing the Black QNP to queen ;
2b) 5 1 B-B2 BxP! 52 Q-Q7ch (52 KxB P-N6) 52 . . . K-R3
53 Q-B8 (or 53 Q-Q8) 53 . . . B-Q5 54 Q-B4 (otherwise
54 . . . P-N6) 54 . . . Q-B6 (with three Pawns up Black can
play for the exchange of Queens) 55 Q-K2 Q-K6 56 Q-Q l
Q-B7ch 57 K-R3 B-K4 , etc .
These are only two lines to give some idea of how to win . There are
many other ways .
Catalan Opening 311
White lost because Black got an advantage by carrying out a

strategic plan which would have led to a serious weakening of White' s
pawn structure , but White overlooked a tactical tum which still worse
cost him a Pawn . The struggle between the Queen , Rook , and Bishop
on both sides was magnificent, and Black had to surmount tremendous
obstacles before he could realize his material advantage .
Game 23
Comparison between the Sicilian Defense and the Sicilian in Reverse

The consequences of a "sharp" move
Driving the opponent's Knight to the edge of the board
Rendering an opponent 's advanced Pawn harmless through exchanges
The sham sacrifice
Harassment of a Rook by the Bishop pair
Venomous combination in the ending to avoid a disadvantage
The endgame with R + 6 Pawns vs. B + N + 3 Pawns
The Sham Sacrifice

When contemplating a sacrifice of material , one must carefully
consider its consequences . The sacrificed piece or Pawn must be
regained in one form or another-if not in material itself, then through
some positional advantage. Often the beauty of a sacrifice is judged by
the depth of the analysis required in order to evaluate its worth . If one
has to calculate many moves in advance in order to justify the results
of the sacrifice , it is generally considered "nicer . "
However, there are sacrifices which require little advance calcula
tion , for the sacrificed piece is regained after one or two moves . These
are known as ' 'sham sacrifices . ' ' Such sham sacrifices occur in many
openings . In the so-called "fork trick , " for instance , a Knight is
temporarily sacrificed to give a fork which regains the sacrificed piece
with greater development to the side making it : 1 P-K4 P-K4 2 N-KB3
N-QB3 3 B -B4 N-B3 4 N-B3 NxP 5 NxN P-Q4 .
But although these sham sacrifices look very simple, the details of
their execution are not always that simple . First of all , one must be
sure that after regaining the sacrificed material the situation has
improved or at least not become worse . Moreover, one must guard
against possible in-between moves on the part of the opponent , for the
sacrifice by its nature is a combination in which one is committed to a
certain second or third move . To regain the sacrificed material , one no
longer has a free choice of moves, and the opponent may take
advantage of this .
312
English Opening Sicilian in Reverse 313
White makes the sham sacrifice 1 NxP with the intention of regain
ing the piece after 1 .. . NxN by 2 P-Q4, etc . But White must first of
all take into consideration that instead of 1 . . . NxN Black can play
1 . . BxPch and the game could continue 2 RxB NxN , winning back
.
a Pawn for Black . Black has sacrificed his Bishop for a Pawn because
that Bishop would be lost in any case (a desperado combination) . In
the second place , after 1 NxP NxN White may discover to his chagrin
that Black now threatens 2 . Q-R5 with a winning attack : 3 P-KR3
. .
BxP, etc . It is difficult for White to take measures against the threat ,
for he is just about forced to answer 2 P-Q4 , the second move of the
sham sacrifice, in order to recover the sacrificed piece .
Thus , the sham sacrifice is an interesting and usually an effective
device , but it is sometimes accompanied by certain risks which must
be taken into consideration .
English Opening - The Sicilian In Reverse

lnterzonal - Petropolls, Brazil - 1 973
"'
Vassily Smyslov - USSR Henrique Mecking - Brazil

1 P-QB4 P-K4
This formation was traditionally called the English Opening , but in

more recent years it has frequently been referred to as the Sicilian in
Reverse, since whereas in "the Sicilian itself White puts his Pawn on
his K4 and Black his Pawn on his QB4 at the very outset, in this
opening it is White who puts his Pawn on his QB4 and Black his Pawn
on his K4 .
314 Game 23
However, as we shall see in this game, the aims of the Sicilian

proper are not normally realized in the Sicilian in Reverse .
When White plays the Sicilian in Reverse , he has one more tempo
than Black would if he were playing the Sicilian proper, and this gives
him an important advantage . Whereas when White is playing the
Sicilian he normally continues after 2 N-KB3 with 3 P-Q4 and Black
then answers 3 . . . PxP, opening the QB-file for himself, in the
Sicilian in Reverse Black rarely tries for . . . P-Q4 , since it would
give White too much of an advantage ; therefore, in the Sicilian in
Reverse the QB-file is rarely opened . Without a Black . . . P-Q4, we
get a Closed Sicilian in Reverse , comparable in the Sicilian proper
to 1 P-K4 P-QB4 2 N-QB3 N-QB3 3 P-KN3 P-KN3 4 B-N2
B-N2 .
In the Smyslov-Mecking game , Black does not fianchetto on his
K-side as White does in the Closed Sicilian , but White does .
As long as Black does not open up the game by . . . P-Q4, White
has no special strategy . For the moment he simply develops his pieces
toward the center and hopes that eventual complications created there
will be in his favor .
2 N-QB3
White exerts pressure on d5 and e4, already gaining some control of

the four vital center squares . Note that his QN is in the same relative
position as the Black QN in the Sicilian proper .
2 • • • N-KB3
Black also exerts pressure on the center squares , and his KN is also
in the same relative position as in the Sicilian proper . However , he
does not play 2 . . . N-KB3 so as to follow it up with 3 . . . P-Q4 , as
is the case in the Sicilian itself . The latter move could be played , but
the resultant position would not be easy for Black ; e . g . , 3 N-B 3 N-B3
(because of White' s lead in time Black cannot answer 3 . . . P-Q4 at
once but must first protect his KP by 3 . . . N-B3) 4 P-KN3 (this
would be the Dragon in the Sicilian proper) 4 . . . P-Q4 5 PxP NxP 6
B-N2 with some pressure on d5 . Black' s best move is now 6 . . .
N-N3 . After 6 . . . B-K3 , 7 P-Q4 might be troublesome .

3 N-B3
White develops his KN and attacks Black' s KP.

Black does not now continue with 3 . . . P-K5 , for after 4 N-KN5
Q-K2 5 Q-B2 White wins the Pawn .
3 . . . N-B3
'
Now 4 P-Q4 PxP 5 NxP B-N5 6 B-N5 , which was played in earlier
times , is not bad for Black ; it leads to another sort of game . True ,
Black can now mutilate White ' s pawn position by 6 . . . BxNch, but
it is doubtful whether this is advisable . White has compensation in the
form of a free game and atiacking chances. Theory considers the
positions about equal .
4 P-KN3
White plans to fianchetto his KB , partly to exert pressure on e4 and

d5 and partly hecause there is really no good square to which to
develop his KB except g2.
Now Black could answer 4 . . . P-Q4 , but after 5 PxP NxP 6 B
N2 he does not have an easy time of it. If 6 . . B-K3 , White replies 7
.
P-Q4 . Relatively best is probably 6 . . . N-N3 in order to prevent

White from playing P-Q4 .
4 • • . B-NS
Black must develop his KB somewhere . On e7 the position is too

cramped . Sometimes 4 . . . B-B4 is played . With the text Black has
the possibility of . . . BxN, doubling White ' s Pawns and weakening
White' s influence in the center.
5 B-N2
Also possible is 5 Q-B2, which would avoid the possibility of a

doubled Pawn .
s . . . 0-0
6 N-QS(?)
316 Game 23
A very sharp move, which White played because he thought he

could take advantage of Black' s 4 . . B-N5-but he has misjudged
.
the position .
Suddenly , the position has become dynamic instead of static , for
now both White and B lack can make exchanges . The text is a bit risky ,
for 6 . . . P-K5 seems very strong , whereas before 6 N-QS White
never had to fear . . . P-K5 because he could answer N-N5 with a
threefold attack on Black' s KP. Therefore, from now on every move
will have to be calculated very exactly . B lack cannot answer 6 N-QS
with 6 . . NxN , for after 7 PxN N-K2 he loses his KP. To eliminate
.
the pressure exerted by such a Pawn, the opponent would have to try to
exchange Pawns by . . . P-B3 after the proper preparation , and then
the doubled Pawn would disappear automatically.
There is a general rule which says that in the opening one should not
play the same piece twice , but this rule is especially valid in openings
in which a tempo counts a great deal . The text has perhaps no
theoretical drawbacks except tactical disadvantages, as will soon
become evident .
Instead of this sharp move White could have continued his develop
ment by 6 0-0 or 6 Q-B2.
6 . . . P-KS
Black immediately uses the text to drive White 's Knight to a bad
square .
Generally, in such positions a pawn advance to the 5th rank is not
good because of N-N5 , but in this game 7 N-N5 ? is not recommend-
able because after 7 . . . NxN 8 PxN QxN 9 PxN QPxP 1 0 BxP Black
can play 10 . . . B-KR6 , preventing White from castling .
Also bad is 7 NxB because White loses a piece after 7 . . . PxN 8
NxN PxB , and White cannot answer 9 NxQ because of
9 . . . PxR = Q mate .
7 N-R4
Forced . Although h4 is an unusual square for White' s Knight, it is

not completely unfavorable as long as f 5 is at his disposal in case
of . . . P-KN4. The two disadvantages of having the Knight at h4 are
that it cannot retreat to f3 and that it cannot accomplish much there .
But should the occasion arise where it could do something , it might
become strong .
At this point, the following factors must be taken into account in
judging the position : (a) White' s Knight is badly placed at h4 ; (b)
Black' s KP is vulnerable ; (a) after P-Q3 White may have the threat of
B-NS , which is under these circumstances a dangerous threat because
of White ' s N/5 ; and (d) Black is slightly ahead in development .
7 • • • B-84
Black does not want his Bishop exchanged for a Knight , especially
since here the exchange would not be compensated by a doubled Pawn
(e .g . , if 8 NxB NxN) . Also , White threatened 8 NxNch QxN 9 BxP,
winning a Pawn , but after 7 . . . B-B4 plus the above sequences ,
White must take into consideration the threat 9 . . . QxP mate .
8 0-0
White is now really threatening to win a J>awn by 9 NxNch and 1 0

BxP , since the above-mentioned mate is no longer possible . There
fore , Black protects his KP by
8 . . . R-Kl
9 P-Q3
This aims at removing Black' s oppressive KP, which prevents

White from getting his KN back into play by N-KB 3 . For instance ,
318 Game 23
after 9 P-N3 B-Q5 1 0 R-N l P-Q3 Black threatens to win the White KN
by 1 1 . . . P-KN4 , since f5 is no longer at its disposal .
9 . . . PxP
Forced , for White threatened 1 0 NxNch QxN 1 1 BxP, winning a

Pawn .
After the text the White KN is no longer in such a bad position , for
now it can retreat to f3 . Also , Black can no longer threaten the White
KN with . . . P-KN4, which would weaken his position in any case .
lO QxP
For many reasons 1 0 PxP would be weaker. After 1 0 PxP, d4 would

become a strong square for Black since it is out of reach of White's
Pawns, whereas with 1 0 QxP, the d4-square can be guarded by
playing P-K3 . After 10 PxP NxN 1 1 BxN P-Q3 1 2 P-N3 N-Q5 .
After the text the position is unclear . The pieces are not posted on
their most favorable squares , a consequence of the sharp turn 6 N-Q5
P-K5 . Now both sides must make the best of the situation , must look
for combinations, etc .
White now threatens to mutilate Black' s K-wing by 1 1 B-N5
followed by 1 2 BxN or 1 2 NxNch .
10 . • • N-K4
This not only attacks White ' s Queen but also prepares for . . . P
B3 so as to avoid the full impact of B-N5 , for the pinning of Black ' s
K N b y the White QB i n combination with the White Knight on d 5 is
especially dangerous .
1 1 Q-B2
White could equally well have played I I Q-N3 .
11 . . . P-B3
For 12 B-N5 is still threatened , and now White 's QN will have to
move .
12 N-QB3(?)
This leads to a chain of combinations , threats , half-threats , etc .

Gligoric remarks that something must be wrong with the White
position if he has to make this time-consuming retreat . True , after 1 2
NxNch QxN , Black would have more freedom of movement , but 1 2
N-K3 was probably the best choice to keep the position as closed as
possible . After that White could have attained equality , which is not
the case after the text .
Also to be considered is 1 2 B-K3 followed by either l ) 1 2 . . . BxB
NxB ; 2) 12 . . . B-B l 13 NxNch QxN ; or 3) 12 . . . PxN 13 BxB
PxP 14 B-Q6 , and Black will not be able to maintain his extra Pawn in
the long run .
12 • • . NxP
The win of this Pawn should be only temporary .

"
13 N-R4(?)
This appears to be a refutation of Black' s 12 . . . NxP , but it is not .

Another and probably better line is 1 3 N-K4 NxN (what else?) 1 4 BxN
P-Q4 ( 1 4 . . . P-KN3 1 5 QxN loses a piece) 1 5 BxPch K-R l 1 6 P-N3
N-N3 and 1) 1 7 B-N2 B-K2 or 2) 17 QxB KxB with almost equal
chances .
13 • • • B-Bl
14 QxN P-QN4
320 Game 23
The point !
15 Q-Q4
This is not the ideal place for the Queen , as will soon become clear .
Preferable is 1 5 Q-B2.
15 • • • PxN
If White should now play 1 6 QxP/4 , Black would answer

1 6 . . . RxP.
16 P-K4
In this way White protects his KP and threatens 17 P-K5 .
16 • • • B-R3
Black' s plan is to harass White ' s KR first with his QB and then ,
after preparation , by bringing his KB to b4 , all with tempo .
17 R-Kl Q-N3
This forces simplification, after which the Black plus Pawn will
count .
White cannot answer 1 8 QxRP because of 1 8 . . . N-N5 and 1 ) 1 9
Q-B2 B-B4 o r 2 ) 1 9 B-K3 NxB 2 0 RxN B-B4 .
White could play 1 8 Q-Q l , but then 1 8 . . . B-N5 is awkward for
him ; e . g . , 1 9 B-Q2 B-B4 20 B-K3 BxB 2 1 RxB QxNP . Black also has
other annoying moves , such as 1 8 . . . P-R6 .
If the White Queen had gone to c2 on the 1 5th move , 17 . . . Q-N3
would not have been that useful , and Black would have had to defend
his P/5 by 17 . . . Q-R4 , which could be answered by 1 8 B-Q2 , or by
17 . . . B-N4, which could be met by 1 8 P-K5 ! , and White would
have had all kinds of chances in the center .
18 B-K3 B-N5
Since White' s KR will be compelled to leave the K-file because of

the two Black Bishops, White' s KP will be in danger. If now 1 9
KR-Ql B-K7 20 KR-QB 1 QxQ 2 1 BxQ NxP or 1 9 KR-QB 1 QxQ 20
BxQ NxP , again winning the White KP .
19 QxQ
To avoid losing a Pawn .
19 • • • PxQ
Black thus improves his Pawn position and retains his plus Pawn .
20 KR-Ql
In order to answer 20 . . . NxP by 21 R-Q4 .
20 • • • B-K7
To give White no time to undertake anything and especially not the

simultaneous attack on the Black Knight and Bishop after the above
mentioned 20 . . . NxP 2 1 R-Q4 .
21 R-Q4
If now 2 1 . . . B-B4 22 R-Q2 BxB 23 RxB , White would still
remain one Pawn down , but with Bishops of opposite colors he might
have more drawing chances than in the game .
322 Game 23
�1 . . . P-B4
The beginning of a new combination which will accentuate Black' s

advantage . On the other hand , it looks risky because i t opens the
diagonal for White' s fianchettoed Bishop and makes possible combi
nations beginning with P-K5 .
22 RxB
White decides to simplify and to give Black a less favorable pawn

position . He can temporarily give up the Exchange , for he will get it
back on his 24th move .
He could have played 22 R-Q6, and the game might have continued
22 . . . NxP 23 RxQP or RxNP, but Black would still have a sound
plus Pawn .
22 • • • PxR
23 P-K5
Uncovering his attack on Black's QR . Now things do not look too

bad for White . He will at least regain the Exchange , and he has given
Black some weak Pawns .
23 • • • N-N5
24 BxR NxB
Much better than 24 . . . RxB 25 BxP.
25 R-Kl
After 25 PxN RxB White would be quite helpless because of his

pawn position and material inferiority . After 25 B-K4 or 25 B-N7 ,
25 . . . N-B5 and Black wins a second Pawn . Less convincing is 25
B-K4 RxP? 26 R-K l RxB 27 RxB , and White wins a piece .
25 • • • B-B5
Here Black saves the Bishop rather than the Knight because he
wants to attack a2 .
26 B-K4
The alternatives 26 RxN RxB 27 R-K4 P-QN4 and 27 P-N3 B-K3

would have given White only slight chances for a draw . White hopes
to get more , but Black again shows that he has seen more deeply .
26 • • • N-Q4
27 P-QR3
Practically forced in order to save his QRP .
27 • • • PxP
28 PxP
If Black now continued 28 . . . RxP?, he would lose the Exchange

after 29 BxPch KxB 30 RxR .
28 • • • N-B6!
This appears dangerous for Black , since it looks as if two Black

pieces on the same file could get into trouble if the White Rook were
later played to c l . White actually does play 30 R-QB l , but Mecking
has calculated far ahead and knows where his winning chances lie .
29 B-B3
White plays his Bishop to f3 rather than to g2 in order to keep the

latter square free for his King .
29 • . • P-B3!
In order to win a second Pawn .

The seemingly strong 29 . . . P-QN4 (to protect the Bishop and
make R-QB l harmless) would give White the possibility of 30 N-B5
P-B3 3 1 R-K3 with some chances to survive .
30 R-QBl
Attacking the two Black pieces on the QB-file , the possibility of

which was suggested after 28 . . . N-B6 ! . This seems to win a piece
324 Game 23
for White. Now 30 . . . N-K7ch 3 1 BxN BxB 32 PxP PxP 33 R-B7

would give counterchances to White . Much stronger is
30 • • • RxP!
White cannot take the Black Knight , for if 3 1 RxN R-K8ch 32

K-N2 B-B8ch 33 K-N l or 33 K-R l , 33 . . . B-R6 mate .
31 K-N2
White' s last hope . The Black Bishop and Knight are on the same
file and attacked by White' s Rook . But Black has foreseen that he will
have to return some material for his two plus Pawns , and he has
correctly judged that he can win the ensuing endgame.
If now 32 RxN , Black could no longer play the above-described
combination beginning 3 1 . . . R-K8ch , for with 32 . . . R-KS there
would be no check and White would simply capture the Black Bishop.
31 • • • R-QB4!
Except for this move Black would lose a piece without compensa
tion . But with it , in return for his lost piece , he as least gets the
Exchange and a position which will allow him to win White' s lone
QRP .
32 RxN B-B8ch
33 KxB RxR
Black now has a Rook and two Pawns for a Knight and a Bishop and
will soon win the QRP, thus ending up with three dangerous passed
Pawns against which White will have to bring all his pieces to bear .
34 B-Q5ch K-Bl
35 K-K2 RxRP
The rest is simple .
36 K-Q2 P-QN4
37 N-B5
At last the Knight comes into play .
37 • • • P-N5
38 N-K3 P-N6
39 K-:B3 R-R7
40 K-N4
Or 40 N-Q l R-B7ch 41 K-Q3 (not 41 K-N4 because of 41 . . . R

Q7) 4 1 . . . R-B4 42 B-B3 P-R6 with an easy win .
40 . • • RxP
There is no way that Black could have won on the Q-side . With his
King , Bishop , and Knight , White can stop the connected passed
Pawns and even capture them. But with White preoccupied with
Black' s Q-side Pawns , Black can eliminate White' s K-side Pawns .
41 KxP P-N7
326 Game 23
42 B-R2 RxP
43 K-N3 R-R6
44 N-B l
Hoping to be able to keep his NP.
44 • • • R-R8
45 N-Q2 R-KN8
46 Resigns
There is no way White can stop Black' s remaining passed Pawns.

Just one example of how the game might have continued after this
point is 46 KxP RxP 47 K-B2 P-R4 48 B-Q5 P-N4 49 K-Q l P-R5 50
K-K2 K-N2 5 1 K-B2 K-N3 52 N-B l R-QR6 53 N-R2 P-B4 54 N-B3
P-Q3 55 K-N2 P-N5 56 N-N l (56 NxPch? K-N4) 56 . . . P-B5 57
B-K4ch K-N4 58 B-Q5 P-R6ch 59 K-R2 K-RS , etc .
Black won because (a) he knew how to take advantage of White 's
slightly weak moves, starting with a sharp move in the opening and
followed by some misjudgments in the middle game; (b) he wisely
simplified after winning a Pawn ; (c) he had a keen perception of the
possibilities of an endgame with a Rook and a number of passed
Pawns against a Bishop and a Knight ; and (d) in that endgame he
understood where his winning chances lay .
Game 24
Characteristics of the Benoni

Black•s acquisition of a Q-side pawn majority
White's greater control of space and build-up in the center
The "Fischer K-side maneuver"
White's success in completely blocking Black's Q-side majority
White's careful preparation for a breakthrough in the center
Maintaining Queens on the board when an opponent has an unsafe
K-position
Tactical niceties brought about by surprising Knight maneuvers
The "echo" motif
The Center Majority vs. the Q-side Majority

At the beginning of the game both sides have eight Pawns stationed
directly opposite each other : three on the Q-side , three on the K-side ,
two in the center. Depending on the situation , the concept of ' ' center ' '
may be extended to include three or even four Pawns for each side .
After some ten opening moves , in which the Pawns often play a
very important part, this situation can change considerably : the paral
lel White and Black Pawns along the respective files will have disap
peared and White may have a majority on one side , Black a majority
on the other. A well-known theme found especially in games of fifty
or more years ago is the majority on the Q-side for one player vs . the
�
majority on the K-side for the other. With such a formation the
strategy of each side is very clearly prescribed : ' 'Advance on the wing
where you have a pawn majority . "
In some games , however, and particularly in those of more recent
years, one side may have a majority on the Q-side , the other a majority
in the center . If the majority in the center opposes a majority on one of
the wings, the influence of these adjacent majorities on each other
must be taken into account . For instance, a majority in the center will
not be so effective against a majority on the Q-side if the latter can be
advanced very rapidly . The pieces which support the advance of this
Q-side majority also exercise their influence in the center. On the
327
328 Game 24
other hand , this double function is, in general , not probable for the
pieces defending the majority in the center , for they are often far back
and are therefore farther from the scene of battle in the center than are
the opponent' s pieces on the Q-side .
If, however , the player with the majority in the center manages to
slow down or block the advancing Q-side majority in time by means of
pieces which also cooperate in the center, an ideal situation is created
for the successful manipulation of the central majority, especially
when-which also happens-the activity in the center is indirectly
productive of chances on the adjacent K-wing .
Benonl Defense
Olympiad - Skopje, Yugoslavia - 1 972
Svetozar Gligoric Lubomir Kavalek

Yugoslavia USA
1 P-Q4 N-KB3
2 P-QB4 P-B4
The Benoni Defense . The countergambit 2 . . P-B4 represents an

.
attempt by Black to contest White' s control of the center at once . The

basic idea behind the Benoni is to entice White to advance in the center
and then to attack him .
White could now answer 3 N-KB3 and the game could continue 1 )
3 . . . P-K3 4 N-B3 P-Q4, which i s the Tarrasch Variation of the
Queen ' s Gambit Declined, or 2) 3 . . . PxP 4 NxP P-Q3 (or 4 . . .
P-Q4 5 PxP NxP, a symmetrical variation which is a little better for
White) 5 N-QB3 P-KN3 , which somewhat resembles the Reti
formation found in Game 25 . Or 3 PxP P-K3 , and Black would get his
Pawn back just as in the Queen 's Gambit Accepted but with colors
reversed .
But since White wants to play for a clear advance with a view to
getting a greater control of space, he answers with the usual Benoni
continuation .
3 P-QS
This move increases White' s control of space , but on the other hand
it partially opens the al /h8 diagonal . White must now keep in mind
Black ' s later K-side fianchetto .
Benoni Defense 329
3 . . . P-K3
Black immediately attacks White ' s center and also prepares by

4 . . . PxP 5 PxP to open his K-file , the importance of which may
become apparent later. But the main purpose of this move is to obtain a
pawn majority on the Q-side for Black . This aim will be elaborated on
in the comments under White ' s l Oth move .
An alternative is 3 . . . P-Q3 , 4 . . . P-KN3 , 5 . . . B-N2 ,
6 . . . 0-0 , with counterplay along the diagonal . The purpose of this
system is not as clear , since Black does not get a Pawn majority on the
Q-side .
Another way to reply is 3 . . . P-QN4 , the Benko Gambit , in which
after 4 PxP P-QR3 5 PxP BxP, at the cost of one Pawn , Black gets all
kinds .of chances on the Q-side where he has two open files .
4 N-QB3
White supports the center . By 4 PxP White would give up the

center . After 4 . . . BPxP Black would possibly be able to attain
. . . P-Q4 , after which he would stand marvelously well . In any
case, after 4 PxP BPxP , Black would have a numerical advantage in
the center and an open KB-file .
If 4 P-Q6, White would lose a Pawn after 4 . . . Q-N3 .
4 . . . PxP
With this move Black destroys a part of White ' s center formation ,
which however leaves White with a somewhat greater control of space
and a majority in the center.
Instead , Black could have played 4 . . . P-Q3 , which comes to the
same position as the game after a later . . . PxP.
If Black should play 4 . . . P-K4 , he would lose time by playing his
KP twice in order to get to e5 , he would give up his chances along the
long diagonal , and he would get no pawn majority on the Q-side .
5 PxP
White' s advanced QP properly supported will constitute a restrain

ing factor on Black ' s development, but Black has corn-
330 Game 24
pensation : the majority on the Q-side and the possibility of the fian
chetto on the K-side .
White could have played 5 NxP, and the game could have con
tinued 5 . . . NxN 6 QxN ; but after 6 . . P-Q3 the White Queen
.
could soon be forced to withdraw by . . . B-K3 , and Black would get

a good game with . . . P-Q4 .
5 . . . P-Q3
Black consolidates his center, prevents a possible P-Q6 , and opens

a diagonal for his QB . After . . . P-KN3 he will soon develop his
Bishop to g7 where it will exert great pressure on the long diagonal and
support Black ' s Q-side pawn majority . Thus White will occupy more
space in the center, but Black will exert at least equal pressure with his
two favorable Bishops . It is noteworthy that neither of Black's
Bishops is hemmed in by its Pawns-Black has two Good Bishops , so
to speak .
6 P-K4
White plays this move (a) to support his QP , (b) to make an eventual
breakthrough in the center by P-K5 , and (c) to open a diagonal for the
development of his KB .
6 . . . P-KN3
When Black has completed the fianchetto by . . . B-N2, he will

control such important squares as d4 and e5 , he will be in a position to
exchange his KB for White ' s QN if this is desirable (but it very seldom
is) , he will indirectly threaten White's QR behind the piece and
Pawns, and he will be able to support his Q-side Pawns if they
advance, which is most important of all .
7 N-B3
The KN exerts more pressure on the center and could eventually

support the advance P-K5 .
7 • • • B-N2
8 B-K2
Benoni Defense 331
Although this is not a very active place for White ' s KB , it does
represent development in order to allow White to castle, it helps in
case Black should play . . . B-N5 , and later when the White KN has
moved , it can prevent the Black pieces, especially the Black KN , from
going to g4 .
Also possible is 8 B-QB4 , but in this game White wants to reserve
c4 for his KN , which could go there via d2 . Moreover , the KB does
not have a real function on c4, where it is exposed to threats such
as . . . P-QR3 , . . . P-QN4 , and . . . QN-Q2-N3 .
8 . . . 0-0
9 0-0 R-Kl
Attacking White ' s KP a second time .
10 N-Q2
White protects his KP a second time and plans to protect it once

more by , for instance , Q-B2; then after N-B4, the Knight will press ,
perhaps annoyingly, against Black 's QP .
Black' s position now has two noteworthy characteristics: his fian
chettoed Bishop is not blocked by Pawns , and he has a 3-to-2 Q-side
majority at last ! (His QP is a center Pawn and therefore does not count
in calculating that majority . ) Both characteristics indicate that Black
should advance his Pawns on the Q-side .
How should White now proceed ? He should (a) try to prevent
Black ' s advance and (b) build up a solid center where he has the
majority .
10 . . . QN-Q2
332 Game 24
This is not simply a developing move . It also serves to reduce the

importance of an eventual White N-QB4. As soon as White gets his
Knight to c4 , Black will be able to force him to exchange it or will
drive it away by . . . N-K4 or . . . N-N3 .
1 1 P-QR4
In general , this move is played to prevent Black from advancing his
Q-side Pawns , but it can also be used to advance to a5 in case Black
plays . . . N-N3 . In the third Spassky-Fischer game White played I I
Q-B2 here , supplying additional protection to his KP so that he could
continue by I 2 N-B4. There followed the peculiar move I I . . . N-R4 ,
which gave White the opportunity to mutilate the Black pawn posi
tion , which he did: I 2 BxN PxB I 3 N-B4 N-K4 I4 N-K3 Q-R5 I 5
B-Q2 N-N5 I 6 NxN PxN . Now Black ' s K-side Pawns are connected
again , and a very difficult struggle ensued . We cite this game to show
its similarity to the present game and to point out the seemingly small
but in reality big differences between the two games .
11 • . . N-K4
In this position Black need not fear 1 2 P-B4.because he can answer

I 2 . . . QN-N5 . White cannot drive away this Knight as long as his
KP does not have sufficient protection , which appears from 12 P-B4?
QN-N5 (threatening I 3 . . . N-K6 and if 1 3 BxN NxB 14 Q-K l
B-Q5ch I 5 K-R I N-K6 wins the Exchange) 1 3 N-B4! NxKP and
1 ) I 4 NxN RxN I 5 BxN RxN and Black has won a Pawn ;

2) I 4 BxN B -Q5ch
2a) I 5 K-R I ? BxB I 6 QxB N-B7ch I 7 RxN R-K8ch , etc . ,
leading to mate in one ;
2b) I 5 B-K3 NxN I 6 PxN BxBch and Black has won a Pawn .
This variation is a bit complicated because at first sight it seems that

Black cannot take White' s KP without leaving his QN unprotected . In
any case , we conclude that I 2 P-B4 would be a mistake .
Black goes to e5 at this time because he has no satisfactory waiting
moves in this position-I I . . . N-R4 loses a Pawn , and I I moves
in this position- I I . . . N-R4 Ioses a Pawn , and I 1 . . . N-N3 would
be answered by P-R5 or . . . N-N3 would be answered by
P-R5 . Perhaps he could have played I 1 . . . P-N3 , but
Benoni Defense 333
then 1 2 P-R5 PxP 1 3 Q-R4 N-R4 would have been somewhat better
for White.
12 Q-B2
With this move White now gives extra protection to his KP, but in
so doing makes it possible for Black to answer 1 2 . . . N-R4 without
sacrificing a Pawn .
12 • • • N-R4
True , the text gives White the opportunity to mutilate the Black
pawn position by 1 3 BxN , but it serves to carry out some attacking
maneuvers such as . . . Q-RS , . . . N-KB 5 , . . . N-N5 , and under
some circumstances . . . B-K4 . B lack accepts the doubling of his
Pawns knqwing that he will soon have the opportunity to undouble
them .
The Fischer maneuver (see the comment under 1 1 P-QR4) has
become possible because the White Queen has left its original square ,
thus leaving only White' s KB to attack the �lack Knight.
13 BxN PxB
14 N-Ql
As in the Spassky-Fischer game, so that the Knight can go to e3 in

order to meet a possible Black . . N-N5 . But the big difference
.
between that game and this is that Spassky played his Knight to e3 via
c4, which means that now the Knight at d2 (and later at c4) survives
instead of the one on c3 . Explanations later . Another purpose of the
text is to open the 3d rank for the QR if necessary .
334 Game 24
14 • • • Q-RS
Consistent with the above-mentioned plan of attack . Now Black is

ready to play . . . N-N5 , the continuation of the attack .
15 N-K3 N-NS
The Black Knight goes to g4 to force White to undouble Black' s

K-side Pawns , since 1 6 P-R3 NxN 1 7 PxN BxRP will give Black at
least a draw . If Black delays and plays for example 15 . . . B-Q2 , then
1 6 N/2-B4 is strong since it attacks Black ' s QP: 1 6 . . . NxN 17 NxN
QxKP 1 8 QxQ RxQ 19 NxP is good for White .
16 NxN PxN
All as in the Spassky-Fischer line . White traded Knights and
allowed Black to undouble his Pawns because Black was threatening
1 6 . . . QxP mate , and 16 P-R3 was not sufficient, as we have seen ,
whereas 1 6 N-B3 NxN costs White his KP .
Let us now try to evaluate the situation . Positionally Black cannot
hope for much on the Q-side . White' s Pa4 together with his 17 Nc4
impedes any Black action . On the K-side Black 's Pawns are now
undoubled , but there are still weaknesses on that wing : his KNP could
become a problem and f4 and f5 cannot be protected by Pawns .
Compensation? Two Bishops and chances to attack White' s KP
because to protect it by P-B3 PxP; PxP would weaken the White
K-side . But the weakness of White' s KP is more than compensated for
by his attacking chances against Black ' s backward QP.
17 N-B4
Benoni Defense 335
The difference between this and the Spassky-Fischer game is the

location of White' s QN . In the Spassky-Fischer game it was on c3
where it was continually exposed to the exchange . . . BxN, which in
the long run led to the capture of the White KP by Black . In the present
game it is on c4 where it actively threatens Black' s QP .
If now 17 . . . Q-K2 , protecting his QP and counterattacking
White ' s KP, after 1 8 R-K l B-B4 (or 1 8 . . . P-B4) , White can
answer 1 9 B-B4 ! with a superior game . For instance , 19 . . . BxKP 20
BxP BxQ 2 1 BxQ, and White' s passed Pawn will soon constitute a
real danger .
Relatively best, although not sufficient either , is 1 7 . . . P-N6 1 8
RPxP QxKP 1 9 QxQ RxQ 20 NxP R-K4 . White answers 2 1 N-N5
and maintains his plus Pawn, for if 21 . . . RxP? 22 N-B7 .
17 • . . Q-B3
The text protects Black' s QP and prevents the White Bishop from
going to f4 .
18 B-Q2
White plans to break the force of Black' s fianchettoed Bishop by 1 9

B-B3 .
18 . . . Q-N3
Black tjikes his Queen from the fianchettoed Bishop's diagonal and
attacks White' s KP a second time .
19 B-B3
"
White continues his play to eliminate the Black fianchettoed

Bishop , since he can win Black' s QP if Black takes his KP .
19 . . • BxB
Although Black rarely exchanges this fianchettoed Bishop , here he

cannot avoid doing so .
20 PxB
336 Game 24
If 20 QxB RxP, losing a Pawn for White, whereas if Black plays

20 . . . RxP after the text, 2 1 NxP ! and if 2 1 . . . QxN 22 QxR .
20 • • • P-NJ
Black decides not to exchange his QP for White ' s KP, since
20 . . QxP 2 1 QxQ RxQ 22 NxP leads to a favorable ending for
.
White because of his passed QP.

As already remarked , 20 . . RxP would be answered by 2 1 NxP ! ,
.
and if 2 1 . . . R-K2 2 2 QxQch RPxQ 23 P-QB4, after which White

has a strong protected passed Pawn, and White' s Knight is much more
active than Black' s Bishop. Black still has his majority on the Q-side
but it is a very bad one , for it is blocked . Only in the far future can
Black hope for a passed Pawn .
In the present position , Black ' s strategy will be first to drive away
White ' s Knight or to exchange it , then to stabilize his K-wing, to try to
keep White from breaking through at e5 , and finally to make his own
attack along the K-file .
21 KR-Kl B-RJ
At last Black succeeds in driving away White' s well-posted Knight .

However, now Black' s Bishop will not be available on his K-wing .
22 N-Q2 R-K4(?)
This move looks good . It prepares to double the Rooks and at the
same time threatens 23 . . . RxQP . But at this square the Rook is
exposed to various threats , as we shall soon see .
Benoni Defense 337
Preferable is 22 . . . R-K2 , which unlike the text does not lose a

tempo . With the text White will be able to force P-K5 anyway , as will
appear later .
23 P-KB4!
A very strong move, which parries Black' s threats and prepares in

the long run for the strong advance P-K5 . Now 23 . . . RxQP? no
longer works because of 24 P-B5 ! followed by 25 PxR, and
23 . . . R-K2 24 P-B4 would promote White ' s plan to play P-K5 after
careful preparation . Therefore , Black is forced to make the unfavor
able exchange that follows since 23 . . . R-R4 leaves the Black KR in
a rather useless and compromising position .
23 • • • PxP e.p.
24 N:xP
Attacking Black' s Rook , and 24 . . . RxQP is still not possible , for

25 N-R4 would allow White to win the Exchange .
24 • • • R-R4
To be considered is 24 . . . R-K2 followed by 25 . . . QR-K l , but

White can then bring his Knight with tempo to the strong f5 square: 25
N-R4 Q-B3 26 N-B5 . So Black rightly prefers to keep his Rook on the
4th rank .
25 Q-B2
By taking his Queen off the b 1 /h7 diagonal , White parries the threat
of . . . RxQP and makes possible both P-K5 and the maneuver N-R4-
B5 . Also , as will soon be seen , this is a part of a plan to advance in the
center and force a passed Pawn .
25 • • • Q-B3
To prevent both P-K5 and N-R4 and incidentally attacking White ' s
BP.
26 R-K3
338 Game 24
To protect the attacked BP, to enable White to push his KP, and to
be able, if desirable, to bring his Rook to g3 later .
26 • • • R-Kl
Black continues his defensive strategy of preventing White from

playing P-K5 . It is so important not to allow P-K5 because in case
White gets to play it, then after . . . PxP White would get a strong
passed Pawn and an open position in which the passed Pawn could
become very dangerous .
27 QR-Kl
White is now threatening 28 Q-N3ch K-R l 29 P-K5 , thus realizing

his strategic ideal of forcing a passed Pawn and breaking the position
open, which is, in general , dangerous for the side with an unsafe
K-position .
He is also threatening 28 P-K5 immediately, for after 28 . . . PxP
29 NxP Black' s Queen is en prise . Of course Black can answer
29 . . . QxQch, but White has pushed his Pawn . In other words , in
reality the Black Queen does not exercise practical control over e5 .
Black might now consider 27 . . . K-R 1 and if 28 Q-N3 R-N l , but
White could instead answer 28 P-K5 ! PxP 29 NxP QxQch QxQch 30
KxQ, and White has carried out his plan and has a strong passed Pawn .
27 • • • Q-BS
Black tries to prevent White from carrying out his threats of 28

P-K5 and 28 Q-N3 , but White ' s next move will show that Black ' s
preventive strategy i s only apparent . For White continues nonetheless
28 P-KS! PxP
Now 29 NxP?? would be met by 29 . . . QxPch .
29 R-K4
An in-between move which drives the Queen from its temporarily

dominating position . Among other things , the Queen must give up its
control of g3 .
Benoni Defense 339
29 . . . Q-B3
30 Q-N3ch
Also possible is 30 NxP, but the text is stronger since to leave the
Queens on the board favors White because of the unsafe position of the
Black King .
30 . . . K-Rl
31 NxP
White has now attained his goal of securing a passed Pawn and
moreover has tactical possibilities such as 32 NxPch and 32 N-N6ch ,
which win the Exchange and a Pawn since after either move Black' s
Re8 i s attacked b y White' s Re4 .
White took with the Knight instead of the Rook because of the
tactical possibilities and because the more heavy material there is left
on the board , the more disagreeable things are for the insecure Black
King .
31 . . . R-KNI
32 R-KN4
Now 32 R/4-N4 fails against 33 RxR RxR 34 QxR ! QxQ 35

. . .
NxPch , etc . The tactical possibilities of the Knight become apparent

in this line .
32 • • • RxR
33 NxR
340 Game 24
And now
I ) 33 . . . Q-R5 would not be so good because of 34 N-B6 ! QxQ

35 R-K8ch K-N2 36 NxRch , etc . ;
2) 33 . . . Q-Q l 34 N-B6 QxN 35 R-K8 mate .
33 • • • Q-N3
White could now win by 34 N-B6 and
I ) 34 . . . QxQ 35 R-K8ch K-N2 36 NxRch , etc . , or

2) 34 . . . R-N4 35 R-K8ch K-N2 36 R-N8ch KxN 37 RxQch ,
etc .
However, the way White chooses is still simpler .
34 P-B4
To open the long diagonal for his Queen . Black now has no proper
defense against 35 Q-B3ch .
34 • • • R-B4
In order to answer 35 Q-B3 by 35 . . . P-B 3 .
35 N-R6!
A symmetrical variation of the continuations mentioned under

33 . . . Q-N3 . It is like the echo motif in a problem , a symmetrical
situation between Rh5 + Nf6 and Rf5 + Nh6.
I) 35 . . . QxQ 36 R-K8ch K-N2 37 NxRch , etc . ;

2) 35 . . . R-N4? 36 QxR QxQ 37 NxPch , etc . ;
3 ) 3 5 . . . R-R4 3 6 R-K8ch K-N2 3 7 R-N8ch KxN 3 8 Q-
K3ch (38 RxQch amounts to about the same thing) 38 . . . R-N4
39 RxQch KxR 40 P-Q6 B-B I 4 1 Q-Q3ch and wins .
35 • • • R-B3
36 R-K8ch K N2
-
Benoni Defense 341
37 R-N8ch KxN
38 Q-R4ch Resigns
If 38 . . . Q-R4 39 QxRch .
White won the game because he managed to refute his opponent' s

attack and a t the same time pressed strongly against Black' s QP. The
underlying reason for White' s victory was the fact that Black' s Q-side
majority never got off the ground, and White ' s preponderance in the
center led both to a continually progressing attack against the Black
King and the birth of a strong passed Pawn .
Game 25
The idea behind 1 N-KB3

Center control by exerting pressure on the center squares rather than by
occupying them
Seizing the initiative in an almost symmetrical position
Attacking the side against which the fianchettoed Bishop is directed
The sacrifice of a Pawn based on intuition and justified by a complex of
variations
A long-term strategic plan
Vain attempts to get counterchances
The effectiveness of the Bishop pair when diagonals are open
Keeping one's K-side position closed to lessen the danger of perpetual
check
Attempts to open the opponent's K-side position
Penetration of the Queen into the opponent's Q-side pawn structure
The victorious advance of the passed Pawn
The Fianchettoed Bishop

A fianchettoed Bishop exerts considerable pressure along the
diagonal it controls , especially when this diagonal is open , that is, not
blocked by its own Pawns . A fianchettoed Bishop can exert great
force along such a free diagonal . But having such a fianchettoed
Bishop is not alone sufficient to win a game . There must be an
accompanying attacking strategy , and this strategy consists in an
attack against the side of the opponent toward which the fianchettoed
Bishop is directed . The attack is made by gradually advancing one' s
Pawns against that side . For instance , i f one's K B i s on its KN2-
square, one' s Q-side Pawns will gradually be advanced against the
opponent' s Q-side . The advance will be the more effective if the
attacker has a Q-side pawn majority , for with it he is likely to end up
with a passed Pawn .
If the opponent is a master , he will be quite aware of this strategy
and will on the one hand try to stop the pawn advance and on the other
try to complicate the position by tactical means so that the attack
342
Reti Opening 343
cannot be realized . He may also try to neutralize the force of the

fianchettoed Bishop by interposing his own Bishop on the diagonal ,
thus forcing an exchange of Bishops .
The result of the attack on the side against which the fianchettoed
Bishop is directed will, therefore, depend on the ability of the player
making it to forward his attack with skill and on his ability to meet his
opponent' s tactical thrusts successfully .
So much for the fianchettoed Bishop on the open diagonal . If the
diagonal is closed by the presence of one of the player' s own Pawns
(e . g . , a Black Bishop on g7 and a Black Pawn on e5) , then the
fianchettoed Bishop can still be valuable because of one or more of the
following considerations :
(a) the Bishop will exert indirect pressure on d4 ;

(b) the presence of the Bishop may prevent the opponent from
making certain moves . For instance , when contemplating a move
such as P-KB4, the White opponent will have to take into consid
eration that after that move the diagonal of the Bishop will be
opened by an exchange of Pawns ( . . . PxKBP) .
(c) Black can sometimes post a piece on f4 which is so powerful
there that White may feel obliged to exchange it, in which case the
diagonal will again be opened; e . g . , if White' s QP is on d5 and
Black ' s KP on e5 and if Black gets to play . . . N-KBS, there may
follow BxN PxB , freeing the a 1/h8 diagonal for Black' s Bishop at
g7 .
Retl Opening
USSR Championship Prelift\lnaries
Moscow 1 971 -
Semyon Furman - USSR Leonid Stein - USSR

1 N-KB3
This is an interesting opening move for several reasons:
(a) It exerts influence on the center. At f3 the Knight exercises a

measure of control over d4 and e5 . Among other things, it pre
vents Black from replying I . . . P-K4 .
344 Game 25
(b) It offers White a wide choice of directions in which to con

tinue . From this move all sorts of openings can arise , such as the
Sicilian ( I . . . P-QB4 2 P-K4) , the Queen' s Gambit (I . . . P-
Q4 2 P-QB4 P-K3 3 P-Q4) , the Benoni in reverse ( I . . . P-Q4
2 P-B4 P-Q5), etc .
As was stated in Game 1 5 , transposition of moves is an
important element in today' s opening variations . It is a custom in
modem games to make moves which reserve a maximum number
of possibilities of transposing into any number of openings.
(c) It exemplifies the modem concept of control of the center
squares as contrasted with the classical system of immediate
occupation of the center .
As was mentioned briefly in Game 1 7 , in former times players on

both sides used to occupy the center with Pawns as soon as they could,
and so games usually opened 1 P-K4 P-K4 or 1 P-Q4 P-Q4 .
About 1 920 it was generally recognized that it was also possible to
postpone the occupation of the center until a bit later , provided that the
moves made exercised some control over the four center squares (e4 ,
d4 , e5 , d5) . The idea was to wait to see what kind of center the
opponent would choose and then to attack it .
It was during that decade that a number of new openings were
developed, such as the King's Indian ( I P-Q4 N-KB3 2 P-QB4
P-KN3) and the Reti (which is characterized by 1 N-KB3 and the
K-side fianchetto plus P-QB4 but without an early P-Q4) .
One of the results of deferring the occupation of the center by pieces
was that the KB was often developed on the wing where, as a
fianchetto, it exerted pressure along the long diagonal . On its KN2-
square this fianchettoed Bishop can often exercise much greater
influence than on its K2- or Q3-square , where it sometimes gets in the
way of the center Pawns .
1 . . . N-KB3
This move is good for Black for the same reasons that it is good for
White .
2 P-B4
Instead of occupying the center squares White controls them by

Reti Opening 345
exerting pressure on them . At present his KN controls d4 and e5 and

his QBP controls d5 .
2 • • • P-KN3
In order to play a kind of King's Indian. Black also had many other
possibilities , such as 2 . . . P-K3 followed by 3 P-Q4 P-Q4 (the
Queen' s Gambit) or 2 . . . P-QN3 3 P-Q4 (the Queen' s Indian) .
3 P-KN3
In conjunction with the two preceding moves White prepares to

direct his KB toward the center .
3 . . . B-N2
4 B-N2 0-0
5 N-B3
Also good is 5 0-0, which may lead to the same position as in the
game after 5 . . . P-QB4 6 P-Q4 . But after 5 0-0 , the game could
continue 5 . . . P-Q4 6 PxP NxP 7 N-B3 N-N3 .
If after 5 N-B3 Black should play 5 . . . P-Q4, then we could get a
sort of reverse of the game with 6 PxP NxP 7 NxN QxN . Good or bad?
White has a slight advantage. One tempo can make a lot of difference .
With 5 . . . P-Q3 followed by 6 . . . N-B3 or 6 . . . QN-Q2
Black would have a normal King' s Indian ; after which White would
answer 7 P-Q4 .
5 . . . P-B4
This creates a symmetrical center position . The text is not inferior to

the above-mentioned 5 . . . P-Q3 . In both cases White has some
initiative as a result of making the first move .
6 P-Q4
The normal reply: expansion of space , seizing the initiative in an

almost symmetrical position .
One might feel that at this point there is no longer a Reti Opening ,
for we have pointed out under 1 N-KB3 (c) that White does not play
Game 25
P-Q4 in the Reti . But it was Reti 's intention to postpone the occupa
tion of the center squares only until it became evident what kind of
center the opponent would choose and then to attack it . In this game
the time has now arrived to attack the opponent ' s center .
One could distinguish between a pure Reti, in which e4 or d4 is not
occupied before the l Oth move, and a modified Reti , in which this
occupation comes somewhat earlier. Thus , to continue a pure Reti
line , White might have chosen to play 6 0-0 or 6 P-Q3 . However , this
attempt to distinguish between the pure Reti and the modified Reti is
only a question of nomenclature and is not very important .
6 • • • PxP
This exchange gives White complete freedom for many of his

pieces and temporary control of the most important center squares .
Also possible and perhaps preferable is 6 . . P-Q3 , which bol
.
sters Black' s center and opens a diagonal for his QB . Black need not
fear 7 PxP PxP 8 QxQ, for after 8 . . . RxQ White has no advantage .
If 7 P-Q5 , White blocks the action of his own KB and opens a diagonal
for Black' s KB . It leads to a position with completely different
characteristics . When followed by 7 . . . P-K3 , it becomes a kind of
Benoni after 8 0-0 PxP 9 PxP. White can also play 8 PxP PxP, and
Black will be able to continue with 9 . . . P-Q4 . Another possibility
after 7 P-Q5 is 7 . . P-K4 ; if White does not reply 8 PxP e.p. , then
.
pawn-chain strategy is in order-a chain with two spearheads (Game

1 5) . Black must strive for . . . P-KB4 because two Pawns in the
middle make a good center and give attacking possibilities , and if
White should play 8 P-K4, Black tries to attain . . . P-KB4. How
ever, even if White does not play 8 P-K4, an eventual . . . P-KB4
would be a very good move because two Pawns in the center constitute
Reti Opening 347
a strong formation which can be useful for all kinds of activities . It is

played not only to combat a pawn chain but to obtain preponderance of
space and influence in the center. In order to clear the way for . . .
P-KB4 Black usually plays his KN to e8 but sometimes to d7 or h5 .
7 NxP
To get some counterweight in the center . As a matter of fact, Black

had hardly any other move which would not create serious weaknesses
in the center , as 7 . . . P-K3 8 0-0 P-Q4 9 PxP PxP would , for
instance , since Black ends up with an isolated Pawn .
8 0-0 NxN
Black cannot effectively move his QP as long as his QN remains on

c6, for 8 . . . P-Q3 loses a Pawn after 9 NxN PxN 1 0 BxP .
9 QxN
The White Queen is now in a direct line with the fianchettoed Black
KB . Such a situation has in it an element of danger , but for the moment
the Black KN has no effective square to which it might go and
threaten .
9 • • • P-Q3
To mobilize the Black QB , which now covers g4 , Black keeps

. . . N-N5 in reserve in case it could later be played advantageously .
At this point White has a preponderance of space and exercises
some pressure against the Black Q-wing with his KB .
10 Q-Q3
Now that Black ' s Knight can move effectively , White wishes to
remove his Queen from the dangerous diagonal . He plays it to d3
because at d2 it would block his QB and at d I it would obstruct the free
movement of his Rooks . It could also have gone to h4 with the
possibility of continuing with B-R6 .
Black could now reply 10 . . . N-N5 with the intention of follow
ing this up with . . . N-K4 .
The eighth game of the Fischer-Spassky World Championship,
348 Game 25
which started out entirely differently, reached a position identical to

this one after Black ' s 9th move . On the l Oth move Fischer played l O
B-N5 followed b y 1 1 Q-B4, which i s time-consuming . He wished to
achieve the formation Qd2 and Be3 but could attain it only indirectly ,
since l O B-K3 could be answered by l O . . . N-N5 and l O B-B4 could
be met by l O . . . N-R4.
10 • • • P-QR3
Black begins a plan for counterplay consisting of . . . P

QR3 , . . . R-N l , and . . . P-QN4 followed eventually by . . . Q
R4, but Black does not get too far in this line .
The aim of the plan after Black has made the above moves is to
exchange off White' s QBP and to start a combined attack with the
Black Rook on b8 and the fianchettoed Bishop at g7 against b2.
In general , it is good strategy to advance the Pawns on the wing
against which your own fianchettoed Bishop is directed . However, the
carrying out of Black' s contemplated strategic plan , including . . .
R-N l and . . . P-QN4 , depends on too many " ifs . "
1 1 B-K3
To strengthen the pressure against Black' s Q-side as a means of

preventing Black' s plan as outlined above and to afford White' s QB
the possibility of going to d4 where it would neutralize the force of
Black' s fianchettoed Bishop along the diagonal . For instance, if
1 1 . . . R-N l , there could follow 12 B-R7 R-R l 1 3 B-Q4 . We shall
see that the text thwarts Black' s strategic plan as outlined above .
11 • • • N-NS
Reti Opening 349
Both to threaten to exchange the White QB and to bring the Black

Knight to e5 , a common maneuver made to exercise pressure against
White ' s QBP.
Instead , Black could have decreased White' s pressure by
1 1 . . . B-B4 1 2 Q-Q2 R-N l , and White could have continued with
1 3 QR-B 1 after which 1 3 . . . P-QN4 would lose the Exchange as
follows : 14 B-R7 R-B l 15 B-N7 R-B2 16 B-N6. Therefore, Black
would instead continue with 1 3 . . . Q-R4 , but White would have the
better position-more space . Black cannot undertake counteraction in
the center .
12 B-Q4
Practically forced , but White would be glad to exchange his QB for

Black ' s fianchettoed KB , which commands the long diagonal .
12 • • • N-K4
Black could have forced the exchange of White 's QB by 12 . . .

P-K4 , but after 1 3 B-K3 NxB 1 4 QxN White has the better game
because Black ' s QP is very weak .
White would not want to leave Black with the Bishop pair by
playing 1 3 BxN . So he continues
13 Q-Ql
He can leave his QBP en prise because 13 . . . NxP? is answered

by 14 BxB KxB 1 5 Q-Q4ch N-K4, winning the pinned piece by 1 6
P-B4.
13 • • • R Nl
-
It is uncomfortable to have a Rook on a long diagonal controlled by

an opponent ' s fianchettoed Bishop . Moreover , if White plays a move
like 14 N-Q5 , the text will permit . . . P-N3 , eliminating White's hold
on b6 .
White could now play 1 4 P-N3 , but since he plays P-QN4 later , he
saves a tempo by not making that move at this time .
14 R-Bl
350 Game 25
White leaves his QBP temporarily unprotected , convinced that the

long combination he has in mind is sound .
14 • • • B-R3(?)
A tricky move . Since 14 . . . NxP will cost a piece (see the com
ment under 1 3 Q-Q l ) , Black looks for another way . He moves his
Bishop from the diagonal with tempo since he now attacks White ' s
QR , hoping that h e will finally be able t o capture White's QBP, but
White' s sacrifice of a Pawn is still correct, as shown in the long
analysis given under White's next move .
In view of the final result, 1 4 . . . B -R3 does not seem very
good-it diverts Black' s KB from its normal square . Preferable was
14 . . . B -K3 as was played in the Tai-Torre game , Leningrad 1973 .
15 P-84
White probably had the feeling that Black could not now take the
QBP without incurring great difficulties ; otherwise Black would have
played 14 . . . P-N3 to avoid them. We will try to verify White 's
intuition .
If Black now answers 1 5 . . . NxBP, White gets a very strong

attack : 1 6 N-Q5 P-QN4 (after 1 6 . . . N-R4 White wins by 17 B-N6)
17 P-N3 N-R4 1 8 R-B7 and now
1 ) 1 8 . . . B-Q2 19 B-B6 !
l a) 1 9 . . . PxB 20 RxB , etc . ;
l b) 19 . . . R-K l 20 Q-Q2
Reti Opening 351
l b l ) 20 . . . N-B3 2 1 R-B l R-QB l ( 2 1 . . . N-K4 22

BxN PxB 23 RxB QxR 24 N-B6ch , etc . ) 22 KRxN BxR 23
BxP, etc . ;
l b2) 20 . . . N-N2 2 1 RxN RxR 22 BxP Q-N l
(22 . . . RxB 23 NxRch QxN 24 BxR and White wins the
Exchange) 23 N-B6ch K-R l 24 NxR with material advan
tage to White ;
l b3) 20 . . . P-N5 2 1 KR-B l B-KB l 22 B-QR I , and
White at least wins Black' s QNP by NxNP and has a
superior position with attacking possibilities ;
l b4) 20 . . . K-B l (relatively best) 2 1 QxN PxB 22 QxRP
B-K3 23 KR-B l with a clear advantage to White .
2) 1 8 . . . R-K l 1 9 Q-Q2
2a) 19 . . . N-N2 20 B-N6 N-B4 21 RxP RxB 22 RxRch ,
etc . ;
2b) 1 9 . . . P-N5 20 KR-B l and at least White will manage
to recapture Black' s QNP with an overwhelming position ;
e . g . , 20 . . . B-B l 2 1 B-R l , etc .
The reader should not worry too much about this complex of
variations . It only serves to show what White has vaguely in mind by
sacrificing the Pawn .
15 . • • N-BJ
Black withdraws his Knight to c6 to drive White's QB from the

diagonal so that Black ' s KB can return to its normal fianchettoed
square . Black " believes " his opponent. White was apparently con
vinced that he would get sufficient compensation if Black should
capture his QBP, and Black must have judged the capture of that Pawn
too risky . It is very probable that both sides have used their intuition
instead of calculating all the possibilities set forth in the preceding
analysis .
16 B-B2
Both of White's Bishops are now ideally placed to exert pressure on

Black' s Q-side .
16 . • . B-N2
352 Game 25
The original situation has been reestablished . White maintains his

pressure on Black ' s Q-side and has a preponderance in space . He has
risked a sacrifice of his QBP and has invested considerable time in
calculating the combination . He now has a superior position , whereas
Black has no compensating advantages . He was already at a disadvan
tage by the time he made his 1 3th move , but the situation was made
worse by 14 . . . B-R3 .
17 Q-Q2
White continues his development and protects his QNP in view of

his intention of playing N-QS . The Queen has more possibilities on d2
than on <! l , and d l is now freed for the KR .
White plans to attack Black' s Q-side with his Q-side majority , but
he must make a series of preparatory moves which he is already
planning here as his long-range strategy : KR-Q l , N-QS , P-QN4,
P-QR4 , P-QNS . Ample time is required before this plan can be
realized in its entirety .
17 • • • Q-R4
Black, who is looking for counterplay , activates his Queen before

White can play N-QS , encircling the Black, , position . He has little
space control , and on d8 the Black Queen hinders action on Black' s
l st rank . I f Black had waited t o play . . . Q-R4 until White was able
to post his Knight on d5 , it would have been countered by P-QN4.
18 KR-Ql
Reti Opening 353
White plays his KR to a more useful square and exerts more

pressure along the Q-file, which could be important if N-Q5 is
answered by a possible . . . P-K3 ; this Rook also supports its Queen ,
and this support will be needed when he plays N-Q5 .
Now a Black attempt to win a Pawn by 1 8 . . . BxN 19 QxB QxP?
would be refuted by 20 R-R l . It the same line, the exchange of Queens
by 19 . . . QxQ 20 RxQ would accentuate White' s positional advan
tage in view of White's pressure against the Q-side , especially since
Black would no longer have the Bishop pair.
Black is somewhat helpless and tries unsuccessfully to get some
counterplay with
18 • . . Q-R4
He is seeking more space control and trying to create new pos

sibilities such as . . . B-R6 or . . . B-N5 .
19 N-QS
White has been preparing this move for a long time. The Knight is
very powerful here , for it presses against b6 , c7 , and e7 . For the
moment there is no definite threat , but White is strangling his oppo
nent . In addition , he is preparing the strategic move 22 P-QN4.
19 • • • B-NS
Black tries to do something at least by attacking White's KP.
20 R-Kl
Both to protect his KP and to get his KR out of the line of the Black
QB in order to be able to advance his KP.
20 • • • P-K4?
Black hopes to simplify by 21 . . . PxP and to get drawing

chances .
The text certainly gives Black some possibility of counteraction ,
but it also makes lJlack' s QP definitely weak , and this , in the long run ,
must decide the battle . Black's position was already bad, but the text
354 Game 25
must eventually lead to material disadvantages which accentuate his

possibility of losing .
Black is probably lost in any case . If he makes a waiting move ,
White can continue his strategic plan with P-QN4, etc . It is Black's
powerlessness to do anything against White 's strategy which forces
him to look for tactical complications . He does not want to make
things too easy for White . He does not want to go down without a
struggle .
21 P-K3!
To support his KBP a second time . White must be prepared to

answer . . . PxP by KPxP, for NPxP could give Black some chances
on the K-side .
21 • • • KR-Kl
22 P-N4!
The standard and correct way to develop an attack against the

Q-side in combination with the fianchettoed Bishop on the K-side .
The advanced White Pawns on the Q-side will lead to new weaknesses
for Black . As was pointed out after White' s 1 7th move , the White
strategy was prepared for with 17 Q-Q2 , 1 8 KR-Q l , and 19 N-Q5 .
White ' s attack, which will be temporarily interrupted by Black' s
moves i n a different direction , will later be continued b y 2 7 P-QR4
and 29 P-N5 .
22 • • • PxP
The text will open two new lines for White : the K-file and the a7/f2
diagonal controlled by White ' s B/B2; but Black has no better move ,
and it does open Black's 4th rank for action by his Queen , as will
become evident in the commentary under 27 P-QR4 . If 22 . . . B
KB6 , then 23 P-N5 PxP 24 PxP N-Q l 25 R-B7.
Once again , Black had no reasonable alternative . He is continually
trying to find a way to meet White' s P-N5 , and after his 23 . . . B
KB6 he feels that he has found something .
23 KPxP B-KB6
Reti Opening 355
The idea is sound : neutralize the force of White ' s fianchettoed KB ;

but Black did not have the opportunity to do it soon enough .
Black is now hoping for 24 P-N5 PxP 25 PxP BxB 26 KxB (not 26
PxN because of 26 . . . QxN 27 QxQ BxQ 28 P-B7 RxRch followed
by 29 . . . R-QB l ) , and Black gets sufficient counterchances be
cause his Knight does not have to retreat to d8 ; instead, he can reply
26 . . . N-Q5 ! , threatening 27 . . . QxN . After 27 N-K7ch RxN ! 28
RxR Q-Q4ch 29 K-B 1 QxPch Black gets at least a draw . Here we see
what tactical complications Black has created .
For the time being White cannot continue his strategic plan . But he
can do so later. He first takes advantage of the fact that Black ' s Queen
is over to one side and threatens Black ' s l st rank by the series of
moves that follow .
24 RxRch RxR
25 R-Kl
If now 25 . . . R-Q l , then 26 P-N5 would be strong since after

26 . . . BxB 27 KxB PxP 28 PxP, the key move 28 . . . N-Q5 would
lose a piece after 29 N-K7ch , for the Black Knight would be en prise ,
and Black would no longer have a way of winning the White Knight .
25 • . • RxRch
26 QxR
Threatening 27 Q-K8ch B-B 1 28 N-B6ch . The open K-file is very

favorable for White .
If 26 . . . BxN, things become easier for White . It would make
356 Game 25
some sense if White's QNP could be captured, but that Pawn is

protected by White' s Queen .
26 • • • K-Bl
Now the push will not only demolish Black' s Q-wing but also lead
to a direct attack (Q-K7ch) as soon as the Black Knight is driven away .
27 P-QR4
With the threat of 28 P-N5 PxP 29 RPxP followed by driving the

Black Knight away from c6 and by 30 Q-K7ch . White could not play
27 P-N5 at once because of 27 . . . PxP 28 PxP QxN . That is what
Black attained by playing 22 . . . PxP and opening his 4th rank for his
Queen .
27 • • • BxN
The direct attack of Queen + Knight is thus eliminated, but the

threat to the Black Q-wing remains . Note that the counterpush
27 . . . P-QN4 will not work because of 28 RPxP PxP 29 N-B7 ,
threatening both 30 NxP and 30 Q-K8 mate .
28 BxB
The dangerous White Knight has been eliminated , but it has been
replaced by the powerful and well-posted Bishop . White retains the
Bishop pair in a position with open lines-and open lines are ideal for
the maximum effectiveness of Two Bishops . White is also now free to
continue the Q-side attack begun at his 22d move .
28 • • • Q-B4
To bring his Queen back into the game . White now continues the
strategy he began with 17 Q-Q2 . Black cannot now stop the following
advance or prevent the loss of a Pawn . He hopes only to be able to
check the White King and thus create some complications which
might give drawing chances .
29 P-NS
Reti Opening 357
The final result of this push will be to force the Black Knight from
its post on c6, after which Black' s QNP must fall .
29 • • • PxP
30 RPxP N-Ql
The only way to defend the QNP and then only temporarily . The
alternative 30 . . . N-Q5 3 1 BxNP would not give Black much coun�
terplay , and the White QNP is already very far advanced .
31 Q-RS!
A frightful stroke ! Black can no longer avoid the loss of a Pawn .

Note how helpless he is because his pieces do not cooperate . But 3 1
B-N6 would not have worked : 3 1 . . . B-B3 3 2 BxN BxB 33 BxNP
would give Black considerable drawing chances with 33 . . . B
N3ch, Bishops o f opposite colors , and a n unsafe White King .
31 • • • B-B3
After 3 1 . . . Q-Q2 32 Q-R8 B-B3 33 B-N6, Black would have lost

a Pawn anyway , but he could perhaps have held his own a little longer .
However, it is understandable that he did not want to condemn his
Queen to absolute passivity and instead tries for perpetual check and
some counterpressure .
32 Q-B7
Now one of the Pawns must fall . If 32 . . . B-K2 33 BxNP NxB 34

QxN , and Black has no chances . Then there are Bishops of the same
color.
32 . • • K-N2
33 QxQP
f--i'· . , , ·.
Also 33 BxNP would have won , but then 33 . . . N-K3 34 QxQP

P-N4 might have led to some complications because White ' s K-side
structure is broken open .
33 • • • Q-N8ch
34 K-N2 Q-N7
358 Game 25
Black threatens 35 . . . B-Q5 .
35 Q-N6
In order to meet the indicated threat .
35 . • • Q-87
In order to be in a position to attack White' s QBP if necessary . For

instance , Black hopes to play . . . N-K3 , and after BxN PxB , White
can continue in several ways ; but it may be important for the Black
Queen to be attacking White' s QBP at that time .
White now consolidates with
36 Q-K3
Black , seeing that 36 . . . N-K3 leads to nothing after 37 BxN PxB

38 QxP B-Q5 ? 39 Q-Q7ch , plays a waiting move .
36 . . . Q-N7
37 Q-K4
Attacking Black' s QNP a second time .
37 . • • P-R4
Black attempts to split the White K-side pawn formation, after
which the White King would have less protection.
If now 38 BxNP NxB 39 QxN B-Q5 40 Q-B3 P-R5 with possible
counterchances for Black . So White avoids complications and plays
38 P-R4
Reti Opening 359
Black now makes a waiting move .
38 • • • K-B l
In view of the fact that now 39 BxNP NxB 40 QxN B-Q5 4 1 Q-B3
Q-B7 would win the QBP for Black and would not be so easy for
White , the latter begins to prepare for the advance of his QBP by
putting his Queen in line with his QNP instead of trying to capture a
second Pawn .
39 Q-Q3
Black cannot improve his position , so he makes the waiting move
39 • • • K-N2
40 P-QBS
With this pawn push White will win the game .

Black now moves simply because he has to ; he cannot stop the
advance .
40 • . • Q-NS
41 P-B6 PxP
42 PxP Resigns
Black has no counterplay whatsoever . He must stop the QBP; e . g . ,

42 . . . Q-Q3 43 Q-B4 Q-B2 and , for instance , 44 Q-N5 N-K3 45
BxN PxB 46 Q-N7 B-Ql 47 B-N6 ! and now 47 . . . QxB is impos
sible , for the Black Queen is pinned .
360 Game 25
White won the game because after the opening he got a preponder
ance in space and could prepare a long-range strategic plan based on
the great mobility of his pieces and especially on the strong position of
his fianchettoed KB . Black tried to confuse his opponent by some
threats and small combinations, but White managed to handle these
complications successfully and to carry out his strategic plan , which
finally led to a plus Pawn and then to a strong passed Pawn .
Index of Openings
References are to pages
Alekhine Defense 84
Benoni Defense 328
Catalan Opening 297
English Opening 313
King's Indian Defense: Siimisch Variation 256
Nimzoindian Defense
4 Q-B2 P-B4 Line 235
4 P-K3 P-B4 Line 246
Petroff Defense 47
Pirc Defense 100
Queen's Gambit Declined
Slav Variation 184
Tartakower Variation 196
Reti Opening 343
Sicilian Defense
Dragon Variation 111
Irregular 1 70
Najdorf Variation 147, 159
Paulsen Variation 123
Scheveningen Variation 1 35
Sicilian in Reverse 3 13
Two Knights' Defense: 4 N-N5 Line 15
361
Index of Plnyers
References are to p ages
Balashov 297
Bisguier 47
Bohotsov 246
Browne 47
Byrne 31
Farkas 61
Fischer 84, 1 70, 196, 282
Furman 343
Gheorghiu 256
Gligoric 2 14, 328
Hort 235
lvkov 235
Karasev 100
Karpov 1 1 1 , 135
Kavalek 328
Kholmov 269
Klovan 15
Korchnoi 111
Kostro 71
Kotov 269
Kuindgi 15
Kupreichik 184
Larsen 123
Mecking 159, 3 1 3
Mikenas 184
Peters 1 23
Petrosian 1 70, 282
Portisch 2 1 4, 246
Quinteros 148
Rodriguez 148
362
Index of Players 363
Savon 1 59
Smyslov 313
Spassky 3 1 , 84 , 1 35 , 1 96
Stein 343
Szell 61
Tai 297
Timoshenko 100
Uhlmann 71
Westerinen 256
Index of SulJiects
References are to pages (er. 48; 136-39), to pages and moves (ex. 215, W l6; 306, 825),
occasionally to pages and games (ex. 135-46, GIO). References to the opening of a
game cite the 6rst move of that game in which the ideas behind the opening are
discu'iSed; references to a type of endgame cite the approximate move at which that
endgame begins.
Abbreviations and symbols used, 13 Castling, importance of, 99-100

Advantages, small, 158-59 Catalan Opening, 298, W4
Alekhine Defem;e, 84, 8 1 Center
Algebraic notation, 12-13 occupation of, 15, 8 1 ; 84, B2; 187,
Analysis, nature and importance of, 3-4 81 1 ; 343, Wl
Attack pressure on, 84, B l : 2.35, Bl ; 343, W l ,
against King castled K-side, 15-29, G l ; 81
3 1 -43, G2; 61 -00 , G4; 1 1 1 -20, GB ; White's center attacked by . . . P-Q84,
123-33 , G9; 135-46, GlO; 254-$, 100, Bl; 102, B7; 215, 85; 235, 84;
Gl9 283, 85 ; 299 , 87; 300 , 810
again�t King exposed on file, 7 1 -82, G5 Combination, 3, 5, 183-84
against pawn salient, 89-9 1 , W l l - 17
against Q-side in combination with Descriptive notation, 12-13
fianchettoed Bishop, 343-59, G25 Devices of masters for winning, 5-8
again�! spearhead of pawn chain, 73-
78, W5-B l4 Echo motif, ·340, W35
against WJcastled King, 100-20, G7; Elo system, 1
147-57, G l l ; 235-44 , Gl7; 246-53, Endgame
Gl8; 282-94, G2 1 importance of having King in center,
sacrificial with pieces, 245-46 27, W21
waves of, 255 Q + R + B + P's vs. Q + R + B +
1 extra P, 304, W20
R + P's vs. R + P's, 55, B2 1
B-R6 to eliminate opponent's fianchet R + 2 passed P's vs. B + N, 325, 835
toed Bishop, 257, W l l ; 272-73, 2 R's + B + P's vs. R + 2 B's + P's,
WlO 165, B22
Backward Pawn, 220, Bl6; 221, Bl8 reducing to when position is favorable,
Benko Gambit, 329, 83 7; 252, W21
Benoni Defense, 328, B2 when one player has plus P, 26, 828
Bishops with Q's vs. without Q's, 308, 842
fianchettoed, 342-43; 343, W l English Opening, 313, B I
o f opposite colors, 308, 836, 842 Exchange o f pieces
Bulldozer strategy, 281-82 to clear a rank, 22 1 , Wl7
364
Index of Subjects
to get the opportunity to exploit K-side development, 234-3.5; 239, W IO

enemy weaknesses, 22 I , WI8 I I ; 24 I , W I 9 , W2I
in order not to lose a tempo, I I5, WI3 King
of Queens, I75, WI2; 308, W42, 842 flight square for, 224 , W27, W3 1 ; 30.'I ,
to reach a won endgame position, 252, 82I
W2I importance of having in the centcr In
to remove an enemy piece from a the endgame, 27, W34
strong position, 1 15, WI3; 22 I , in the open field, I84; I89, W l 6
WI7 King's Gambit, 6 I , W2
of Rooks · when a player is the Ex King's Indian Defense
change up, 264, W28 basic formation, 256 , 84
to simplify in order to accentuate Simisch Variation, 256 , W5
one's advantage, 224 , W9
"Exchange," sacrifice of Lines, open, 227, W38; 243 , H2tl: :J,'l.f ,
to be able to assum e the initiative and 822
open up the position, 2 I , WI9 Loose piece, 67, W23 ; 249, H I l
to bring opponent into a pin, 278,
W26
Majority, center vs. Q-side, 327-2H
to bring opponent's King into the Master
open, 69, W26; 2IO, W38
characteristics of master ph1y, :1
to eliminate opponent's well-posted
definition of, I
piece, I56, W24
differences in style, I -2
to gain control of important squares, errors, 9
253, W24
how chosen, I
to get attacking chances, 22, WI7; 95, why masters lose, 8-9
W2I ; I54-5.5, W2 I
to simplify in order to give the oppo
N-KB3 as White's I st move!, :w: i , W I
nent a less favorable pawn position,
. . . N-KB3 as Black's I st mov1\ Hof , I l l :
322, W22
235 , B I ; 344 , BI
to win a Pawn, 263, B23
Nimzoindian Defense
4 Q-82 Line, 235 , W4
Falkbeer Countergambit, 6 I , 82 4 P-K3 Line, 246, W4
Fegatello Variation of the Two Knights' Notation used, I2-I3
Defense, I6, W5
Fischer maneuver ( . . . N-KR4) in the
Open lines, 227, W38; 2-i:J, 11211: :l.'S -1 ,
Benoni, 332-3.5, W l l -I7
822
Flight square for King, 224 , W27, W3 I ;
Opening position when one 1111.• d1w1•lo l '
3o.5 , 82 I
ment, 24 I , BI4; 243 , H20
French Defense-Tarrasch Variation, 7 1 ,
Operational phase of chcs., !(Miii•'. 2 :I
W3
P-KR4 to start attack Ml(Mlm1I 1111. . . k '•

Gambit, definition of, 6 I , W2
King castled K-side , I M , W IO : 2.'S'/ ,
Griinfeld Defense, 28 I , 84
W9
P-Q> where Black has fiand1"llo1'4l hi•
Hanging Pawns, I 95 -96 ; 202, WIO; 203, QB and has not yet pl 11y1-cl . . . I' f)'I ,
BI3; 204, BI7 249, W9
P-Q84 as White's Ist move• , l llfl, W I ;
Initiative, 6-7; 68, B2 I ; 1 19, W22; I47; 3 I3, W I
I93, 837; 345, W6 . . . P-Q84 to break up Whll.,'N l'l'llll'r,
Isolated Pawn, I69-70; I73, W8; I76, IOO, B I ; I02, B7; 2 1 :5 , ll.'1 : 2:l.'I, IW;
WI5, WI7; 2I7, WIO; 2I8, BI3; 283, 85; 299 , B7; 300, H I O
229, 84 Passive play, 63, IOB
366 Index of Subjects
Pawn Closed Variation, 32, 85

backward. 200 , Bl6; 22 1 , Bl8 idea� behind, 3 1 , W3
isolated, 169-70; 1 73, W8; 176, W I 5, importanc.-e of playing, 9 P-KR'.3, 33,
Wl7; 217, W IO; 218, Bl3; 229, 84 W9
position, 7 maneuvering of White's QN, 34, W l l
Pawn chain, 70-71 ; 73-78, W5-Bl4 Morphy Variation, 3 1 , 83
Pawn salient, 83, 89-9 1 , Wl l - 1 7
Pawns Sacrifice
on color of their Bi.�hop, 192, B29 to bring King into open field, 109, 24B,
hanging, 195-96; 202, WIO; 203, Bl3; 26B
204, Bl7 to open a diagonal and to win a
Petroff Defense, 47, B2 tempo, 22, WI4
Pieces to open a file, 15 1 , Wl3
failure to develop, 19, B9; 2 1 , Wl6; of piec.-es for attack, 245-46
23, 821 -22 ; 238, W9; 239, WIO; proffered, 52, Wl4; 9 1 , Wl8; 93,
24 1 , Wl5; 242, W l9, W21 W20; 94, W20; 95, W2 1 ; 154, W2 1 ;
importance of bringing them into 25 1 , Wl5; 252, Wl8
play, 14-15 sham, 302, Bl4; 3 12-13; 322, W22
numerical value of, 30 a� winning device, 5-6, 46-47
Pin, 268-69 Seventh rank, 179, W24; 1 8 1 , 830, W3 1 ,
Pirc Defense, 100, BI W33
Pressure, 6; 212-14 Sham sacrifice, 302, Bl4; 312-13; 322,
W22
Sicilian Defense
Queen
characteristics of, I l l , 82; 123, W6
disadvantage of playing out early in
Dragon Variation, l l2, 85
game, 63, W7
function of P-KB3, l l3, W7
importance of maintaining on board
function of . . . P-QR'.3, 124, B7; 148,
when one has attack, 55, 820; 308,
85; 1 7 1 , 84
842
Modified Paulsen Variation, 135, 88
Queen exchange
Najdorf Variation, 148, W6
to get better endgame position, 175,
Paulsen Variation, 123, 86
Wl2
. . . QN-83 vs . . . . QN-Q2, 149, B7
to get drawing chances, 308, W42,
Scheveningen Variation, 136, 86
842
Taimanov System, 170, W4; 1 7 1 , 84
Queen sacrifice, 30-3 1 ; 38, Bl9; 188, Bl3
variations possible after 4 NxP, 170,
Queen's Gambit, 184, W2
W4
Queen's Gambit Ac.'Cepted, 214, 82
Sicilian in Reverse, 313, BI
Queen's Gambit Declined
Spearhead Pawn, 70-7 1 ; 73-78, W5-B l4
advantage of playing . . . P-KR'.3, 198,
Strategic plan, 78, Bl7; 165, B24; 207,
86
W24; 208, W26; 224, W29; 230,
Classical Line, 197, W5
W51 ; 23 1 , W59; 352, Wl7; 354,
Lasker Defense, 199, W7
W22
Slav Defense, 184, 82
Strategy, 2; 134-35
Tartakower Defense ( . . . P-QN3), 197-
Strong square, 207, W23
98, W5; 199, W7, B7
Style, differences in, 2-3
Queen's Indian Defense, 269, 83
Ta<.'tics, 2-3, 134-35

Reti Opening, 345, W6 Threat
Rio Variations of the Two Knights' De a� winning devit.-e, 6
fense, 16, W5 importance of making move entailing,
Ruy Lopez Opening 64, B9-IO
Breyer Variation, 34, B9 Traxler Gambit, 16, 84
Index of Subjects 367
Two Knights' Defense Value of pieces, 30

4 N-KN5 Variation, 14 ; 16, W4
5 . . . N-QR4 Line, 14; 17, 58
9 N-KR3 Line, 18, W9 Yugoslav Defense, 100, Bl
Traxler Gambit, 16, B4
why more aggressive than Giuoco
Piano, 16, 83 Zugzwang, 296-97; 306, 830; 307, B33
Korch n o i vs . S passky : C h ess C risis
RAYM O N D KEEN E '
An i l l u m i n a t i n g a c c o u n t of t h e e l i m i n a t i o n to d e c i d e t h e
C h a l l e n g e r f o r t h e Wo r l d C h a m p i o n s h i p . I n terna t i o n a l G ra n d
m a ste r R a y m o n d Kee n e i n c l u d es d e e p a n d i n str u ctive a n n o
tat i o n s o f a l l g a m es, b i o g ra p h i es o f t h e p l ayers a n d t h e m oves
of t h e i r p rev i o u s e n c o u nters.
Ka rpov vs . Korch n oi
Wo r l d C h ess C h a m p i o ns h i p 1 978
B E N T LA R S E N
A n exc i t i n g a c c o u n t o f t h e matc h t o d e c i d e t h e Wo r l d C h ess
C h a m p i o n . The b o o k g i ves t h e b a c kg ro u n d to the matc h , all
t h e m oves a n d i n - d e pt h , expert a n a l ys i s .
The R o a d to C h ess M astery

Dr M AX E U W E a n d Dr WA LT E R M E I D E N
' Whether you wan t to impro ve yo ur o wn game, or merely to
un derstan d wh y a master is a master, I can warmly re commen d
T h e R o ad to C h ess M a ste ry. ' S pectat o r
' One o f the most interesting chess bo oks t o appear for many
years . ' S u n d a y Ti mes
C hess M aste r vs . C h ess Amateur

D r M AX E U W E a n d D r WA LT E R M E I D E N
T h i s b o o k p rovi d es t h e avera g e p l ayer w i t h n u m e ro u s ways
to i m p rove h i s g a m e . T h ro u g h twe nty - f i ve g a mes the a ut h o rs
c l e a r l y e x p l a i n typ i c a l a m a te u r m i sta kes a n d h ow to ex p l o i t
a n d avo i d t h e m .
H ow does a m a ste r o r a g ra n d m a ster
th i n k ? And h ow ca n t h e a m a te u r ass i m i
late t h a t t h i n k i n g i nto h i s o w n g a m e ?
C H E S S M A ST E R & G RA N D M AST E R
sets o u t t o a n swer t h ose q u est i o n s w i t h
twe n ty - f ive g a m es p l ayed between
masters and g ra n d m asters between 1 97 0
a n d 1 9 7 5 . N o l i m ited m o n og ra p h , it d e a l s
w i t h o p e n i n g s, m i d d l eg a m es a n d e n d
g a m e, e x p l a i n i n g t h e f u n d a m e n ta l p ri n
c i p l es o f t h e g a m e b u t a l so i l l u st ra t i n g
m o d e r n tec h n i q u es d eve l o ped d u ri n g t h e
l a st twe nty - f ive yea rs . T h e a n n otat i o n o f
t h e m oves i s p a rt i c u l a rl y str i k i n g : t h e
e m p h a s i s is o n revea l i n g t h e reaso n fo r
ea c h s i g n i f i c a n t move rat h e r t h a n o n
g i v i n g n u m e ro u s tacti c a l va r i a ti o n s -
a l t h o u g h t h e l a tter a re a l so i n c l u d ed
w h e re t h ey h e l p to c l a rify a positi o n 's
poss i b i l ities. E u we a n d M e i d e n t h u s p ro
v i d e i n s i g hts i nto t h e s k i l l s a n d tec h
n i q u es u sed by today's c h ess m a sters
a n d g ra n d m a sters. B y stu d y i n g t h es e
te c h n i q u es a n d a p p l y i n g t h e m to h is
o w n g a m e, t h e c h ess a m ate u r w i l l i m
p rove t h e stre n g t h a n d q u a l i ty o f h i s
p l a y.

Chess Master and Grandmaster - Euwe&amp;Meiden&amp;1978

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Chess Master and Grandmaster - Euwe&amp;Meiden&amp;1978

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Chess Master

This book is copyright under the Berne Convention. All

© Max Euwe and Walter Meiden, 1977

Originally published in the USA in 1977 as CHESS

British Library Cataloguing in Publication Data

Printed in Great Britain by

Game Opening Players

Two Knights ' Defense : Kuindgi-Klovan 15

17 Nimzoindian Defense : Hort-Ivkov 235

1 Bringing Every Piece into Play 14

The purpose of this book is to show the amateur player how to

We wish to thank friends who have read these games in manuscript

How does a chess master differ from other chess players?

Steinitz was famous for his scientific handling of positional chess ;

The master has a very keen awareness of the general direction in

The Operational Phase-The Role of Analysis

unexpected lines , so that a master cannot very often trust to his

Characteristics of Master Play

How Masters Won the Games in This Book

abilities as those listed above under the combination . (Games 2, 3 , 1 1 ,

5. Direct attack against the opponent's King

7 . Giving the opponent an unfavorable pawn position

8 . Exchange of pieces or refusal to permit exchange of pieces

9 . Simplification into a favorable endgame position

In addition to the nine major techniques described above, the

1. Standard types of attacking patterns (Game 3)

5 . Judicious play with Bishops of the same color or with Bishops

Why the Masters Lost the Games in This Book

1. an insufficient knowledge of certain patterns in the opening or

On examining the twenty-four games which were lost by one of the

1 . the loser was unable to defend himself successfully against the

It is noteworthy that in many of these games it required just one

Errors of Masters and Grandmasters

This work is designed for a wide range of chess players-from the

1 . The introduction to the games

3 . The middle game

5 . The analysis of the variations

6 . Restudying the game after a lapse o f time

Algebraic Designations of Squares on the Chessboard

7 . Notation system used in this book

{a) often to refer to a given square when this would be simpler ;

(c) occasionally to indicate the position of a piece; e.g. , "White

Abbreviations and symbols used

dis eh discovered check

Bringing Every Piece Into Play

to reintegrate his QN into the struggle can lead to serious conse­

Two Knights' Defense - 4 N-NS Line

Alexander Kuindgi - USSR Vanis Klovan - USSR

(a) Lines are opened for the development of pieces .

A very common continuation . It is important to get each piece into

game we will soon see how it cooperates in a later attack on that

One of the best replies to this position . It is more aggressive than

The old and dangerous continuation of the Two Knights' Defense,

If now 5 . . . NxP, all sorts of interesting variations and combina­

masters consider 6 P-Q4 (the Rio Variation) the strongest answer to

KR3 7 N-KB3 P-K5 , and now a recently discovered continuation is 8

Black does not take advantage of the opportunity of bringing his QN

NxB 10 QxNch N-Q2 1 1 P-Q3 B-K2 1 2 N-KB3 0-0 Black has a

Surprising, for this gives Black the opportunity to mutilate the

Black continues to develop his pieces-and note how undeveloped

Here 10 P-Q3 may lead to a transposition of moves after 10 . . . Q­

Threatening 1 1 . . . BxN followed by 1 2 . . . QxP mate .

In order to answer 1 1 . . . BxN by 1 2 B-K3 . Now we must look far

Black continues to develop . He is still not in a hurry to exchange his

Chess Master and Grandmaster - Euwe&Meiden&1978

Chess Master and Grandmaster - Euwe&Meiden&1978

to reintegrate his QN into the struggle can lead to serious conse

If now 5 . . . NxP, all sorts of interesting variations and combina

Here 10 P-Q3 may lead to a transposition of moves after 10 . . . Q

choosing the conventional way , Black plunges into a sea of complica

1 ) 2 1 PxBP NxP 22 Q-B2 NxPch 23 K-B l NxR (with 23 . . . N